JP2021142061A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of executing a highly entertaining performance.SOLUTION: In a game machine 1, a performance symbol is variably displayed along with variation display of a special symbol, and the performance symbol for notifying a player of a determination result is stopped and displayed along with the stop display of the special symbol. During the variation display of the special symbol, a ready-to-win performance is satisfied by the performance symbol and the ready-to-win performance can be executed. From the start of the variation display of the performance symbol until the ready-to-win performance is satisfied by the performance symbol, performance display capable of specifying the performance symbol that establishes a ready-to-win is executed. When the performance display is executed in this way, a predetermined ready-to-win performance is executed after the ready-to-win is satisfied by the performance symbol suggested by the performance display. At that time, when the ready-to-win is satisfied by a first performance symbol, the special game is more likely to be executed than when the ready-to-win is satisfied by a second performance symbol.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 18

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine provided with effect control means for controlling the execution of effect.

For example, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine, when a game ball wins a prize at the starting port, it is determined whether or not to execute a special game that is advantageous to the player, and the result of the above determination is shown after the special symbol is displayed in a variable manner. The special symbol is stopped and displayed. For example, in the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, based on the result of the above determination, an effect of expecting a big hit is executed during the variable display of the special symbol, and if the right of the above determination is reserved, the determination is made. The so-called look-ahead effect is executed based on the result of the preliminary judgment on the right of.

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2014-90853

By the way, it cannot be said that the production performed by the conventional gaming machine has sufficient interest, and further improvement of the interest is required.

Therefore, an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of performing a highly entertaining effect.

The gaming machine of the first invention for solving the above-mentioned problems is
Judgment means for determining whether or not to execute a special game that is advantageous to the player,
When the determination is made, the symbol display control means that causes the symbol display means to display the special symbol in a variable manner and then stops and displays the special symbol indicating the result of the determination.
It is characterized in that it is provided with an effect control means for controlling the execution of the effect.

According to the present invention, it is possible to carry out a highly interesting production.

Front view of gaming machine 1 Front view of game board 2 Enlarged view of the main display 40 in FIG. Explanatory drawing for explaining opening / closing control of 2nd prize opening 28 and V winning opening 287 A block diagram showing a configuration example of a control device included in the gaming machine 1. Explanatory diagram for explaining jackpot random numbers and symbol random numbers Time chart to explain the jackpot game Explanatory drawing for explaining flow of game in game machine 1 Explanatory drawing illustrating the flow of reach production Explanatory drawing for explaining the variation pattern selection table used for the process of selecting the variation pattern of a special symbol in a normal game state. Screen diagram exemplifying the production of the first normal mode in the normal game state (No. 1) Screen diagram exemplifying the production of the first normal mode in the normal game state (Part 2) Screen view showing an example of production when V prize is notified during a jackpot game Screen view showing an example of production when V prize is not notified during a jackpot game Explanatory drawing for explaining stage suggestion production Explanatory drawing for explaining the table used for the process of determining the production number of the production during the period suggested by the stage suggestion effect. Detailed flowchart of the step suggestion effect pattern setting process in step S172 of FIG. 57. Screen view showing a concrete example of stage suggestion effect Screen diagram exemplifying the production performed after the stage suggestion production is completed Explanatory drawing which illustrates the feature of each confirmed notification effect which game machine 1 can execute Explanatory drawing for explaining the jackpot reliability of the hold icon (and the icon) and the expected image. Explanatory drawing for explaining the jackpot reliability of the combination of the hold icon and the expected image Screen diagram showing a specific example of reliability suggestion pair display effect Screen diagram showing specific examples of the first expected effect and the second expected effect (No. 1) Screen diagram showing specific examples of the first expected effect and the second expected effect (No. 2) Time chart for explaining the 1st expected production, the 2nd expected production, and the 3rd expected production A time chart for explaining a modified example of the first expected effect and the second expected effect. Schematic diagram for explaining the arrangement of the first start port 21 and each light emitting group. Time chart to explain the light emission effect Explanatory drawing for explaining each effect suggestion image displayed in advance suggestion effect Screen view showing a concrete example of the advance suggestion effect Screen diagram exemplifying the production after the pre-suggestion production is performed Time chart to explain the pre-suggestion effect Explanatory drawing for explaining two types of precursory effects (expected effects) and four types of suggestive effects Explanatory drawing for explaining each icon displayed in the 3rd normal mode Screen view exemplifying the icon proliferation effect in which the effect image related to the hold suggestion display proliferates Screen view exemplifying the icon proliferation effect in which the effect image related to the fluctuation suggestion display proliferates Explanatory drawing for explaining the storage area of a main RAM 83 and the information stored in each storage area. A flowchart illustrating interrupt processing executed on the main control board 80 Detailed flowchart of the sensor detection process in step S2 of FIG. 39. Detailed flowchart of the pre-determination process in steps S211, 219 of FIG. Detailed flowchart of special symbol processing in step S3 of FIG. 39 Detailed flowchart of the jackpot determination process in step S308 of FIG. 42. Detailed flowchart of the fluctuation pattern selection process in step S309 of FIG. 42. Detailed flowchart of special figure stop processing in step S317 of FIG. 42 Detailed flowchart of the large winning opening opening / closing control process in step S6 of FIG. 39 (No. 1) Detailed flowchart of the large winning opening opening / closing control process in step S6 of FIG. 39 (Part 2) Detailed flowchart of the large winning opening opening / closing control process in step S6 of FIG. 39 (No. 3) A flowchart illustrating the main process executed on the sub-control board 90. Detailed flowchart of the first interrupt process in step S51 of FIG. 49. Detailed flowchart of the icon change effect pattern setting process in step S517 of FIG. Detailed flowchart of expected image change effect pattern setting process in step S518 of FIG. Detailed flowchart of expected effect pattern setting process in step S519 of FIG. Detailed flowchart of the precursor effect pattern setting process in step S521 of FIG. Detailed flowchart of the second interrupt process in step S53 of FIG. 49. Detailed flowchart of the command reception process in step S10 of FIG. 55. Detailed flowchart of the fluctuation start command reception process in step S16 of FIG. 56. Detailed flowchart of the variation effect pattern setting process in step S163 of FIG. 57. Detailed flowchart of the advance notice effect pattern setting process in step S164 of FIG. 57. Detailed flowchart of the basic notice effect pattern setting process in step S165 of FIG. 59. Detailed flowchart of the final notification effect pattern setting process in step S166 of FIG. 59. Detailed flowchart of the prior suggestion effect pattern setting process in step S167 of FIG. 59. Detailed flowchart of the round game start command reception process in step S23 of FIG. 56. Detailed flowchart of V winning command reception process in step S26 of FIG. A flowchart illustrating interrupt processing executed on the image / sound control board 100. Detailed flowchart of the image display control process in step S71 of FIG. 32. A flowchart illustrating interrupt processing executed on the lamp control board 120

Hereinafter, a gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine) 1 according to an embodiment of the gaming machine of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings as appropriate.

[Configuration example of gaming machine 1]
First, a configuration example of the gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 and 2. Here, FIG. 1 is a front view of the gaming machine 1, and FIG. 2 is a front view of the gaming board 2. As shown in FIGS. 1 and 2, the gaming machine 1 includes a gaming machine frame 30 and a gaming board 2 mounted in the gaming machine frame 30. The gaming machine frame 30 includes a front frame 31 having a decorative surface, a main body frame for attaching the gaming board 2 and the like, and an outer frame for fixing the gaming machine 1 to the island equipment of the hall. There is. The front frame 31 supports a glass plate arranged in parallel with the game board 2 at a predetermined interval, and the glass plate and the game board 2 form a game area 3 into which the game ball can flow down. ing.

Further, as shown in FIG. 1, the front frame 31 has a launch handle 32 for launching a game ball, an upper plate 33 for storing a game ball supplied to a launching device (not shown), and an upper plate. A lower plate 34 for storing game balls that cannot be stored in 33 is provided. When the player grasps the launch handle 32 and rotates it clockwise, the game ball stored in the upper plate 33 is guided to the launcher and is launched with a launch intensity corresponding to the rotation angle of the launch handle 32. The launched game ball moves along the rail member 4 located on the left side of the game area 3 and then is guided to the upper position of the game area 3 and comes into contact with a game nail, a windmill, or the like provided in the game area 3. As a result, the game area 3 flows down along the game board 2 while changing the moving direction.

A ball return prevention piece 6 is provided at the end of the rail member 4, and the ball return prevention piece 6 prevents the game ball once entering the game area 3 from returning to the launcher side. Further, a stop button is provided at a position close to the launch handle 32, and the player can temporarily launch the game ball by operating this stop button without returning the launch handle 32 to the initial posture. It is possible to stop it.

When the player performs "left-handed" by rotating the firing handle 32 by a small rotation angle, the game ball is launched with a relatively weak firing intensity, and the game ball flows down the left game area 3L. On the other hand, when the player performs "right-handed" by rotating the launch handle 32 by a large rotation angle, the game ball is launched with a relatively strong firing intensity, and the game ball is located above the right upper side of the center decoration body 10. After moving along the rail member 4, it flows down the right game area 3R.

The passage path of the game ball in the left game area 3L is provided with a first starting port 21, a second starting port 22, an opening / closing member 23, and three general winning ports 24 as accessories related to winning and determination ( (See FIG. 2). Further, in the passage path of the game ball in the right game area 3R, the second start opening 22, the opening / closing member 23, one general winning opening 24, the gate 25, and the first large winning opening are used as accessories related to winning and determination. 26, an opening / closing member 27, a second large winning opening 28, and an opening / closing member 29 are provided (see FIG. 2).

In the process of flowing down the game area 3 along the game board 2, the game ball launched from the launching device has the first starting port 21, the second starting port 22, the general winning opening 24, the first large winning opening 26, and the like. You may win a prize in any of the second major winning openings 28. In this case, a predetermined number of prize balls according to the winning place are paid out to the upper plate 33 or the lower plate 34. For example, four prize balls are paid out every time one game ball wins in the first starting port 21, and one prize ball is paid out every time one game ball wins in the second starting port 22. It is paid out, and every time one game ball wins in the general winning opening 24, five prize balls are paid out. In addition, 15 prize balls are paid out every time one game ball wins in the first prize opening 26, and 15 prizes are paid out every time one game ball wins in the second big prize opening 28. The ball is paid out. The game balls that did not win any prize are discharged from the game area 3 through the discharge port formed at the lower end of the game board 2.

A center decorative body 10 is provided in the opening formed in the center of the game board 2. The center decoration body 10 includes a stage portion 11 having a game ball rolling surface on which the game ball can roll, and a warp portion 12 having a warp inlet and a warp outlet at both ends. A game ball flowing down the left game area 3L may enter the warp section 12 from the warp entrance, and the game ball is discharged from the warp exit and guided to the stage section 11. A guide groove is formed at the center of the left and right sides of the stage portion 11 to drop the game ball rolling on the stage portion 11 toward the first starting port 21. Therefore, the game ball guided to the stage portion 11 via the warp portion 12 wins a prize at the first starting port 21 as compared with the game ball that flows down the left game area 3L without passing through the warp portion 12. easy.

The first starting port 21 is a starting area that is always open. The second starting port 22 is a starting region that is normally closed when the opening / closing member 23 as an electric accessory is not operating, and is opened by operating the opening / closing member 23. In the gaming machine 1, when the gaming ball wins the first starting opening 21 (or the second starting opening 22), it is determined whether or not to execute a special game (big hit game) that is advantageous to the player. Then, on the first special symbol display 41 (or the second special symbol display 42), which will be described later, the symbols are displayed in a variable manner, and the symbols (big hit symbols or lost symbols) indicating the result of the above determination are stopped and displayed. Here, when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed, the jackpot game that opens the first jackpot 26 and the second jackpot 28 is executed.

In the following description, the determination executed in response to the winning of the game ball for the first starting port 21 is referred to as "first special symbol determination", and is executed in response to the winning of the game ball for the second starting port 22. The determination is referred to as "second special symbol determination", and these are collectively referred to as "special symbol determination".

The first large winning opening 26 is a special winning area opened according to the result of the second special symbol determination. An opening / closing member 27, which is a plate for opening / closing the first winning opening 26, is provided at the opening of the first winning opening 26. The first large winning opening 26 is normally closed by the opening / closing member 27. On the other hand, when a predetermined jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 42, a jackpot game is executed in which the opening / closing member 27 is operated to open the first jackpot 26. During this jackpot game, there are a plurality of long open round games in which the opening / closing member 27 maintains an open posture (see FIG. 2) that opens the first prize opening 26 and then returns to a closed posture that closes the first prize opening 26. It is done once. In each long open round game in which the first large winning opening 26 is opened, in the present embodiment, 10 game balls win in the first large winning opening 26, or the first large winning opening 26 is opened. It continues until 25 seconds have passed (without 10 game balls winning in the first prize opening 26). In this way, during the jackpot game, a plurality of long-opening round games in which the first prize opening 26 (or the second winning opening 28) is opened for a long time are performed, so that the player hits right during the jackpot game. By doing so, more prize balls can be obtained than when the jackpot game is not performed.

The second special winning opening 28 is a special winning area that is opened according to the result of the first special symbol determination (or the second special symbol determination). An opening / closing member 29, which is a blade member for opening / closing the second special winning opening 28, is provided at the opening of the second special winning opening 28. The second large winning opening 28 is normally closed by the opening / closing member 29. On the other hand, when a predetermined jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 41 (or the second special symbol display 42), the opening / closing member 29 is operated to open the second special winning opening 28. A jackpot game is executed. During this jackpot game, a round game is performed a plurality of times in which the opening / closing member 29 maintains an open posture (see FIG. 2) that opens the second prize opening 28 and then returns to a closed posture that closes the second prize opening 28. Be struck. The round game for opening and closing the second prize opening 28 will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 7.

For convenience of explanation, FIG. 2 shows an open posture in which the opening / closing members 27 and 29 open the large winning openings 26 and 28 when the effect symbol is variablely displayed on the display screen 70 of the image display device 7. Although the state shown in the figure is shown, the opening / closing members 27 and 29 are not actually in the open posture during the variable display of the effect symbol. Further, in each round game in the big hit game, either one of the first big winning opening 26 and the second big winning opening 28 is used, so that these big winning openings are actually used at the same time as shown in FIG. It will not be released. In addition, whether the jackpot game is performed using both the first big winning opening 26 and the second big winning opening 28 or the big hit game using only the second big winning opening 28 depends on the type of big hit. (See FIGS. 6B and 6C).

An opening / closing member 23 (see FIG. 2) is arranged close to the second starting port 22. The opening / closing member 23 can change its posture between a closed posture in which the opening / closing member 23 closes the second starting port 22 and an open posture in which the opening / closing member 23 opens the second starting port 22 (see FIG. 2).

The second starting port 22 is normally closed by the opening / closing member 23. On the other hand, when the game ball hit right by the player passes through the gate 25, the prize ball is not paid out, but it is determined whether or not to open the second starting port 22. Here, when it is determined that the second starting port 22 is opened, the opening / closing member 23 maintains the open posture for a predetermined time and then returns to the closed posture a predetermined number of times. As described above, the second starting port 22 is in a state in which it is difficult for the game ball to pass when the opening / closing member 23 is not operating, whereas the second starting port 22 is in a state in which the game ball is easily passed by operating the opening / closing member 23. Become.

In the following description, the determination executed on the condition that the game ball passes through the gate 25 is referred to as "ordinary symbol determination".

The general winning opening 24 is always open like the first starting opening 21, and is a winning opening in which a predetermined number (five in this embodiment) of winning balls is paid out by winning a game ball. However, unlike the first starting opening 21 and the like, the determination is not made even if the game ball wins in the general winning opening 24.

[Configuration example of main display 40]
FIG. 3 is an enlarged view of the main display 40 in FIG. As illustrated in FIG. 3, the main display 40 includes a first special symbol display 41, a second special symbol display 42, a normal symbol display 43, a first special symbol hold indicator 44, and a second special symbol. It is configured to include a hold indicator 45, a normal figure hold indicator 46, a round indicator 47, a game state indicator 48, a launch direction indicator 49, and the like.

The first special symbol display 41 is configured to have eight LEDs indicated by "ip", and when the first special symbol determination is performed, the symbol is variablely displayed and then the first special symbol is displayed. The determination result of the first special symbol determination is notified by stopping and displaying the symbol indicating the determination result of the determination. Specifically, for example, the eight LEDs are turned on in order to display the variation of the symbol, and each LED is set for a predetermined fixed time (for example, 0.5) in a combination according to the determination result of the first special symbol determination. The symbol is stopped and displayed by turning it on (for seconds).

The second special symbol display 42 is configured to have eight LEDs indicated by "a to h", and when the second special symbol determination is performed, the symbol is variablely displayed and then the second special symbol is displayed. The determination result of the second special symbol determination is notified by stopping and displaying the symbol indicating the determination result of the determination. Specifically, for example, the above eight LEDs are turned on in order to display the variation of the symbol, and each LED is set for a predetermined fixed time (for example, 0.5) in a combination according to the determination result of the second special symbol determination. The symbol is stopped and displayed by turning it on (for seconds).

The first special symbol display 41 (or the second special symbol display 42) is notified that it is a jackpot as a symbol indicating the determination result of the first special symbol determination (or the second special symbol determination). "Symbol" or "Loss symbol" notifying that it is lost is stopped and displayed. In the gaming machine 1, a plurality of jackpot symbols that differ from each other depending on the type of jackpot are prepared, and when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed, the first jackpot 26 or the first jackpot 26 or the opening pattern according to the type of the jackpot symbol is used. A jackpot game that opens the second prize opening 28 is performed.

The ordinary symbol display 43 is configured to have two LEDs indicated by "s to t", and when the ordinary symbol determination is performed, the symbol is displayed in a variable manner and then the determination result of the ordinary symbol determination is shown. By stopping and displaying the symbol, the determination result of the normal symbol determination is notified. Specifically, for example, by alternately lighting the above two LEDs, a variable display of the symbol is performed, and each LED is turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds) in a lighting mode according to the determination result of the normal symbol determination. The symbol is stopped and displayed by turning it on. Here, when the hit symbol is stopped and displayed, an auxiliary game is performed in which the opening / closing member 23 is operated in an opening pattern according to the current gaming state to open the second starting port 22.

In the following description, the symbol displayed on the first special symbol display 41 and the second special symbol display 42 is referred to as a "special symbol", and the symbol displayed on the normal symbol display 43 is referred to as a "normal symbol". It shall be called. Further, the special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display 41 is called a "first special symbol", and the special symbol displayed on the second special symbol display 42 is called a "second special symbol". It may be distinguished.

The first special figure hold indicator 44 is configured to have two LEDs indicated by "u to v", and displays the number of holds for the first special symbol determination depending on the lighting mode of these LEDs. The second special figure hold indicator 45 is configured to have two LEDs indicated by "w to x", and displays the number of holds for the second special symbol determination depending on the lighting mode of these LEDs. In the present embodiment, the upper limit of the number of these reservations is set to "4". The normal figure hold indicator 46 is configured to have two LEDs indicated by "q to r", and displays the number of hold for normal symbol determination depending on the lighting mode of these LEDs.

The round display 47 is used in a jackpot game executed in response to a jackpot corresponding to the jackpot symbol as the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 41 or the second special symbol display 42. Displays the number of rounds indicating how many rounds the game is executed. In the present embodiment, the round display 47 includes an LED for 5R, an LED for 7R, and an LED for 9R, and the number of rounds is notified by lighting any of these LEDs. Will be done.

The game status display 48 is configured to have three LEDs indicated by “a1 to a3”, and displays the game status of the gaming machine 1 according to the lighting mode of these LEDs. The launch direction indicator 49 is configured to have two LEDs indicated by “y to z”, and displays the launch direction of the game ball according to the lighting mode of these LEDs. That is, it is displayed whether the player should hit left or right.

[Structure example of the production means included in the gaming machine 1]
As illustrated in FIGS. 1 and 2, the game board 2 and the front frame 31 have various effects, such as a decorative member 13, a movable decorative member 14, a frame lamp 37, a speaker 38, and an effect display 125. The effect first special figure hold indicator 126, the effect second special figure hold indicator 127, and the like are provided. An image display device 7 is provided behind the game board 2.

The decorative member 13 has a built-in board lamp 5 (see FIG. 5) composed of a plurality of LEDs, and changes the lighting and blinking patterns of each LED and changes the emission color of each LED. By doing so, various effects by light are performed.

The movable decorative member 14 is arranged in front of the image display device 7 and behind the decorative member 13. A plurality of LEDs are built in the movable decorative member 14, and the movable decorative member 14 performs a predetermined effect by the movement and / or light of the movable decorative member 14 itself. In the present embodiment, a predetermined space in which the movable decorative member 14 can operate is provided between the game board 2 and the display screen 70 of the image display device 7, and the movable decorative member 14 is along the display screen 70. It is configured to be able to move up and down. The movable decorative member 14 is usually arranged at an initial position (see FIG. 2) in which most of the movable decorative member 14 is hidden behind the decorative member 13 and only the lower end portion of the movable decorative member 14 is visible. On the other hand, the movable decorative member 14 emits light in a predetermined light emitting pattern and emits light on the display screen 70 when a notice effect having a relatively high jackpot reliability is executed by using the image display device 7 or the speaker 38. It falls to the operating position that covers most of it.

The frame lamp 37 is configured to have a plurality of LEDs built in various parts of the front frame 31, and changes the lighting and blinking patterns of each LED and changes the emission color of each LED. Various effects by light are performed.

The image display device 7 is a liquid crystal display device that displays an effect image on the display screen 70, and the player can visually recognize the display screen 70 through an opening formed in the central portion of the game board 2. On the display screen 70, the same number of hold images (hold) as the number of effect symbols, characters and items that notify the determination result of the special symbol determination, and the number of hold of the first special symbol determination (or the second special symbol determination) are displayed. An effect image including various display objects such as an icon) and a variation suggestion image (corresponding icon) suggesting that a variation display of a special symbol is being performed is displayed. The image display device 7 is not limited to the liquid crystal display device as long as it can display the effect image, and may be another image display device such as an EL display device.

The speaker 38 outputs production sounds such as music, sound, and sound effects in synchronization with or asynchronously with the display production performed on the display screen 70 to perform sound production.

The effect display 125 is configured to have two LEDs, displays the symbol in a variable manner according to the variable display of the special symbol and the effect symbol, and determines the special symbol in accordance with the stop display of the special symbol and the effect symbol. The symbol that notifies the judgment result of is stopped and displayed. The effect display 125 notifies the determination result of the special symbol determination according to the combination of lighting / extinguishing of each LED and the lighting color.

The first special figure holding indicator 126 is configured to have two LEDs, and is the same as the one displayed on the first special drawing holding indicator 44 depending on the combination of lighting and extinguishing of each LED. 1 Display the number of pending special symbol judgments. The second special figure hold indicator 127 is configured to have two LEDs, and is the same as that displayed on the second special figure hold indicator 45 depending on the combination of turning on and off each LED. 2 Display the number of pending special symbol judgments.

[Structure example of input means provided in game machine 1]
As illustrated in FIG. 1, the front frame 31 is provided with a first effect button 35 and a second effect button 36 as input means that can be input by a player. The first effect button 35 is a push button for inputting operation information by being pressed by the player. The second effect button 36 is a push button for the player to input operation information by grasping the grip portion of the second effect button 36 and pressing the second effect button 36. In the gaming machine 1, the effect corresponding to the operation of the first effect button 35 and the second effect button 36 may be performed.

Further, the first effect button 35 has a built-in first effect button lamp (not shown) having a plurality of color LEDs for emitting the first effect button 35, and the second effect button 36 has a built-in first effect button lamp (not shown). A second effect button lamp (not shown) having a plurality of color LEDs for emitting the second effect button 36 is built in. In the gaming machine 1, in order to prompt the player to operate the first effect button 35 during the valid period in which the operation of the first effect button 35 is valid, the first effect button lamp is set to any one of a plurality of emission colors. It emits light in the emission color. Further, the first effect button 35 has a built-in vibration motor 128 composed of an eccentric motor that vibrates the first effect button 35, and the gaming machine 1 displays an effect symbol in a mode of notifying a big hit on the display screen 70. The jackpot is notified by vibrating the first effect button 35 as it is displayed on the screen. In addition, the first effect button 35 may vibrate during the above validity period, immediately before the start of the validity period, immediately after the start of the variable display of the special symbol and the effect symbol, and the like. Under these circumstances, the first effect button 35 may vibrate. When the effect button 35 vibrates, the jackpot reliability is higher (the hit notification effect is more likely to be executed) than when the first effect button 35 does not vibrate. Further, in the gaming machine 1, in order to prompt the player to operate the second effect button 36 during the valid period in which the operation of the second effect button 36 is valid, the second effect button lamp 362 has a plurality of emission colors. It emits light in either emission color.

The configuration of the input means is not limited to the one illustrated in this embodiment, and may be another one. That is, for example, in the present embodiment, the case where the gaming machine 1 includes two input means will be described, but the number of input means may be one or three or more. Further, the input means is not limited to the push button, but a touch panel capable of detecting the player's touch operation, for example, an optical sensor capable of detecting the player's hand held over the display screen 70, and moving the position back and forth and left and right. It may be another input means such as a joystick for designating a direction or an operating means that the player can grasp and change the posture.

[Example of internal configuration of the second prize opening 28]
FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the opening / closing control of the second special winning opening 28 and the V winning opening 287. An opening / closing member 29 (an example of a first opening / closing member) for opening / closing the second special winning opening 28 is provided at the opening of the second special winning opening 28 (an example of a special winning area) (FIGS. 1 and 4). See (A)). Further, as illustrated in FIGS. 4A to 4C, inside the second large winning opening 28, the second large winning opening sensor 281, the V winning opening sensor 283, the discharge sensor 284, and the slide member 285 (An example of a second opening / closing member) and the like are provided.

The second prize opening sensor 281 detects a game ball that has entered the second prize opening 28, and in the present embodiment, 15 pieces are used each time the game ball passes through the second prize opening switch 281. The prize ball will be paid out. The V winning opening switch 283 detects the passage of the game ball through the V winning opening 287 (an example of a specific area) partitioned by the V winning opening switch 283. The discharge switch 284 detects the passage of the game ball through the discharge port partitioned by the discharge switch 284. The slide member 285 guides the game ball that has passed through the second large winning opening sensor 281 to the V winning opening 287 or the discharging port, and is configured to be slidable in the left-right direction in FIG. 4 (A) and 4 (B) exemplify a state in which the slide member 285 is arranged at the right position for closing the V winning opening 287, and FIGS. 4 (C) and 4 (D) show the slide member 285. An example shows a state in which the V winning opening 287 is arranged at the left position to be opened.

When the big hit game is not performed or during the long opening round game in which the first big winning opening 26 is opened long, the second big winning opening 28 is blocked by the opening / closing member 29 and the V winning opening 287 is closed. It is closed by the slide member 285 (see FIG. 4 (A)). On the other hand, in the round game in which the second special winning opening 28 is opened and closed, the second special winning opening 28 and the V winning opening 287 can be in the following states.

Specifically, in the round game of opening and closing the second special winning opening 28, as illustrated in FIG. 4B, the opening / closing member 29 rotates to open the second large winning opening 28. In addition, the slide member 285 may be arranged at the right position and the V winning opening 287 may be closed. In this case, although the second major winning opening 28 has changed from a difficult-to-enter state in which the game ball is difficult to enter to an easy-to-enter state in which the game ball is easy to enter, the V winning opening 287 is blocked by the slide member 285. The game ball that has entered the second major winning opening 28 does not pass through the V winning opening 287, but passes through the discharge sensor 284.

Further, in the round game in which the second special winning opening 28 is opened and closed, as illustrated in FIG. 4C, the opening / closing member 29 is rotated to be in an open state in which the second special winning opening 28 is opened. , The slide member 285 may move from the right position to the left position, and the V winning opening 287 may be in an open state. In this case, since the second large winning opening 28 has changed to an easy-to-enter state and the V winning opening 287 is open, the game ball that has entered the second large winning opening 28 has the V winning opening 287. (That is, it is detected by the V winning opening sensor 283).

The V winning opening sensor 283 functions as a so-called probability change switch, and as described above, the game ball wins a V prize when both the second major winning opening 28 and the V winning opening 287 are in the open state. In the case of (the game ball is detected by the V winning opening sensor 283), the game is controlled in the "probability variation game state" described later after the jackpot game with the V winning is completed. On the other hand, if the game ball does not win a V when both the second big winning opening 28 and the V winning opening 287 are in the open state, after the big hit game is completed, the "time saving game state" described later The game will be controlled by. Further, when either one of the second large winning opening 28 and the V winning opening 287 is in the blocked state (when the state is exemplified in FIG. 4 (B) and FIG. 4 (D)), Basically, since the game ball does not win a V prize, similarly, after the jackpot game is completed, the game is controlled in the "short-time game state".

It should be noted that both the second major winning opening 28 and the V winning opening 287 are open for a long time for a time during which the game ball can easily enter the second major winning opening 28 and pass through the V winning opening 287. There are a valid round game in which a valid period in which the V prize is valid is set, and a non-valid round game in which the V prize is not valid (the valid period is not set). Therefore, when the V winning opening sensor 283 detects the game ball during the effective round game, the game is controlled in the "probability changing game state" after the jackpot game is completed, but the V winning is won during the ineffective round game. Even if the mouth sensor 283 detects the game ball, the game is not controlled in the "probability changing game state" after the jackpot game is completed, subject to this detection.

Further, in the round game of opening and closing the second large winning opening 28, as illustrated in FIG. 4D, the opening and closing member 29 is not operating, so that the second large winning opening 28 is closed. In addition, the slide member 285 may move from the right position to the left position, and the V winning opening 287 may be opened. In this case, although the V winning opening 287 is open, the game ball does not enter the second major winning opening 28 because the second major winning opening 28 is in a difficult state of entry.

It should be noted that the transparent member provided at the position corresponding to the area including the second large winning opening sensor 281, the V winning opening sensor 283, the discharge port sensor 284, the slide member 285, etc. corresponds to the V winning opening sensor 283. The letter "V" is written at the position where it is to be displayed (see FIG. 2). Therefore, the player can easily identify the position of the V winning opening sensor 283 (the position of the V winning opening 287) by looking at the letter "V".

[Configuration of control device included in gaming machine 1]
FIG. 5 is a block diagram showing a configuration example of a control device included in the gaming machine 1.
On the back side of the game board 2, a control device for controlling the operation of the game machine 1 is provided. As illustrated in FIG. 5, the control device of the game machine 1 is a main control board 80 that controls the progress of a game using a game ball, and a sub that comprehensively controls the effect based on information from the main control board 80. It is composed of a control board 90, an image / sound control board 100 that controls an effect by an image or sound, a lamp control board 120 that controls an effect by various lamps or movable members, and the like. In the present embodiment, the main control board 80 functions as a game control unit that controls the progress of the game, and the sub control board 90, the image / sound control board 100, and the lamp control board 120 function as the effect control unit that controls the effect. .. The configuration of the control device is not limited to this, and for example, the sub control board 90, the image / sound control board 100, and the lamp control board 120 may be composed of one board.

<Structure example of main control board 80>
The main control board 80 includes a main CPU 81, a main ROM 82, and a main RAM 83. The main CPU 81 performs various arithmetic processes related to the determination and the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the program or the like stored in the main ROM 82. The main RAM 83 is used as a storage area for temporarily storing various data used by the main CPU 81 when executing the program, or as a work area for data processing.

The main control board 80 includes a first start port sensor 211, a second start port sensor 221 and a gate sensor 251. 284, a general winning opening sensor 241, a second starting opening solenoid 222, a first winning opening solenoid 262, a second winning opening solenoid 282, and a V winning opening solenoid 286 are connected. The gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment includes four general winning opening sensors 241 corresponding to the four general winning opening 24, but in FIG. 5, for convenience of explanation, only one general winning opening sensor 241 is provided. It is written.

The first start port sensor 211 detects that the game ball has won a prize in the first start port 21, and outputs the detection signal to the main control board 80. The second start port sensor 221 detects that the game ball has won a prize in the second start port 22, and outputs the detection signal to the main control board 80. The gate sensor 251 detects the passage of the game ball through the gate 25 and outputs the detection signal to the main control board 80. The first large winning opening sensor 261 detects that the game ball has won a prize in the first large winning opening 26, and outputs the detection signal to the main control board 80. The second big winning opening sensor 281 detects that the game ball has won a prize in the second big winning opening 28, and outputs the detection signal to the main control board 80. The V winning opening sensor 283 detects the passage of the game ball through the V winning opening 287 and outputs the detection signal to the main control board 80. The discharge port sensor 284 detects the passage of the game ball to the discharge port and outputs the detection signal to the main control board 80. The general winning opening sensor 241 detects that the game ball has won a prize in the general winning opening 24, and outputs the detection signal to the main control board 80.

The second starting port solenoid 222 is an electric solenoid that is connected to the opening / closing member 23 so as to be able to transmit a driving force, and operates the opening / closing member 23 based on a control signal from the main control board 80 to start the second start. Open and close the mouth 22. The first large winning opening solenoid 262 is an electric solenoid that is connected to the opening / closing member 27 so as to be able to transmit a driving force, and operates the opening / closing member 27 based on a control signal from the main control board 80 to operate the first opening / closing member 27. The large winning opening 26 is opened and closed. The second special winning opening solenoid 282 is an electric solenoid that is connected to the opening / closing member 29 so as to be able to transmit a driving force, and operates the opening / closing member 29 based on a control signal from the main control board 80 to operate the second opening / closing member 29. The large winning opening 28 is opened and closed. The V winning opening solenoid 286 is an electric solenoid that is connected to the slide member 285 so as to be able to transmit a driving force, and operates the slide member 285 based on a control signal from the main control board 80 to operate the V winning opening 287. Opens and closes.

Although not shown in the figure, the gaming machine 1 controls a drive motor that sends out a gaming ball from a ball tank provided on the back surface side of the gaming board 2 to supply the gaming ball to the upper plate 33 or the lower plate 34. It is equipped with a payout control board. When the main CPU 81 receives a detection signal from the first starting port sensor 211, the second starting port sensor 221 or the first winning opening sensor 261 or the second winning opening sensor 281 or the general winning opening sensor 241, the main CPU 81 receives a detection signal. The payout control board is instructed to pay out a predetermined number of prize balls according to the place where the game ball has won a prize, and the number of prize balls to be paid out is managed based on the information from the payout control board.

Further, the main CPU 81 acquires various random numbers as acquisition information at the timing when the detection signal from the first start port sensor 211 is input, and executes the first special symbol determination using the acquired random numbers. Further, the main CPU 81 acquires various random numbers as acquisition information at the timing when the detection signal from the second start port sensor 221 is input, and executes the second special symbol determination using the acquired random numbers. Here, the various random numbers are, specifically, jackpot random numbers, symbol random numbers, reach random numbers, and fluctuation pattern random numbers.

The jackpot random number is a random number for determining a jackpot or a loss. The symbol random number is a random number for determining the type of jackpot (the number of rounds of the jackpot game, the game state after the jackpot game, etc.) when it is determined to be a jackpot. The reach random number is a random number for determining whether to perform the effect with reach or the effect without reach when it is determined that there is a loss. The variation pattern random number is a random number for determining the variation pattern of the special symbol when the special symbol is displayed in a variable manner.

The main CPU 81 acquires these random numbers at the timing when the game ball wins the first start port 21 (or the second start port 22), and first, the acquired jackpot random numbers are stored in the main ROM 82 as a predetermined random number. It is determined whether or not to execute the jackpot game based on whether or not it matches the numerical value (winning value). Here, when it is determined that the jackpot game is executed based on the fact that the jackpot random number matches the winning value, the symbol random number acquired together with the jackpot random number is stored in the main ROM 82 (compared with the symbol random number). ) Determine the type of jackpot based on which random number value of a predetermined random number matches. The types of jackpots will be described in detail later based on FIGS. 6 (B) and 6 (C).

On the other hand, when the main CPU 81 determines that the jackpot game is not executed based on the fact that the acquired jackpot random number does not match the winning value, the reach random number acquired together with the jackpot random number is stored in the main ROM 82. Based on whether or not it matches a predetermined random number value (compared with the reach random number), it is determined whether to perform the effect with reach or the effect without reach. Further, the main CPU 81 determines the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol when displaying the special symbol in a variable manner based on the fluctuation pattern random number acquired together with the jackpot random number, regardless of the result of the determination based on the jackpot random number. As a result, the fluctuation time of the special symbol is determined.

When the main CPU 81 determines that the jackpot game is to be executed and determines the type of jackpot, the main CPU 81 controls the opening and closing of the first jackpot 26 via the first jackpot solenoid 262 according to the type of jackpot. By controlling the opening and closing of the second winning opening 28 via the second winning opening solenoid 282 and controlling the opening and closing of the V winning opening 287 via the V winning opening solenoid 286, a jackpot game according to the type of jackpot. To execute.

Further, the main CPU 81 acquires a random number (ordinary symbol random number) at the timing when the detection signal from the gate sensor 251 is input, and executes the ordinary symbol determination using the acquired ordinary symbol random number. Then, when it is determined that the second starting port 22 is to be opened as a result of this normal symbol determination, the second starting port 22 is opened by controlling the opening and closing of the second starting port 22 via the second starting port solenoid 222. Perform an auxiliary game.

Further, on the main control board 80, a first special symbol display 41, a second special symbol display 42, a normal symbol display 43, a first special symbol hold indicator 44, a second special symbol hold indicator 45, and a general one are used. Figure Hold indicator 46, round indicator 47, game status indicator 48, launch direction indicator 49 are connected.

The main CPU 81 controls these indicators 41 to 49 constituting the main indicator 40 to execute the above-mentioned display process based on FIG.

<Configuration example of sub-control board 90>
The sub control board 90 includes a sub CPU 91, a sub ROM 92, a sub RAM 93, and an RTC (real time clock) 94. The sub CPU 91 performs arithmetic processing when controlling the effect based on the program stored in the sub ROM 92. The sub RAM 93 is used as a storage area for temporarily storing various data used by the sub CPU 91 when executing the program, or as a work area for data processing. The RTC94 measures the current date and time (date or time).

The first effect button detection sensor 96 and the second effect button detection sensor 97 are connected to the sub control board 90. When the first effect button 35 (see FIG. 1) is operated, the first effect button detection sensor 96 outputs operation information (operation signal) indicating that fact to the sub control board 90. When the second effect button 36 (see FIG. 1) is operated, the second effect button detection sensor 97 outputs operation information (operation signal) indicating that fact to the sub control board 90.

The sub CPU 91 sets the effect content based on the game information related to the special symbol determination, the normal symbol determination, the jackpot game, etc. transmitted from the main control board 80. At that time, the input of the operation information from the first effect button 35 and the second effect button 36 may be accepted, and the effect content corresponding to the operation information may be set. The sub CPU 91 transmits a command instructing the execution of the effect of the set effect content to the image / sound control board 100 and the lamp control board 120.

<Structure example of image / sound control board 100>
The image / sound control board 100 controls the image display by the image display device 7 and the output of the effect sound by the speaker 38. In the present embodiment, the image / acoustic control board 100 includes an image / acoustic control CPU 101, a control ROM 102, a control RAM 103, a VDP (Video Display Processor) 104, a CGROM 105, a VRAM 106, an acoustic DSP (Digital Signal Processor) 107, an acoustic ROM 108, and an SDRAM 109. And an amplifier 110.

The control ROM 102 is composed of a mask ROM, and various tables such as a control program of the image / sound control CPU 101, a display list generation program for generating a display list, and a display list creation table used for a process of creating a display list. Is remembered. Here, the display list is composed of a group of commands for instructing the execution of drawing on a frame-by-frame basis, and includes the type of image to be drawn, the position (coordinates) to draw the image, the display priority, the display magnification, and the rotation. It includes various parameters such as angle and transmittance. The control RAM 103 is used as a storage area for temporarily storing various data used by the audiovisual control CPU 101 when executing the control program, and as a work area for data processing and the like.

The image / sound control CPU 101 displays image data stored in the CGROM 105 with respect to the VDP 104 based on the control program, various tables such as the display list creation table, commands received from the sub control board 90, and the like. Instruct to display on. This instruction is mainly given by the output of the display list. Further, the image / acoustic control CPU 101 instructs the acoustic DSP 107 to output the acoustic data stored in the acoustic ROM 108 from the speaker 38.

The CGROM 105 stores the effect data necessary for executing the variation effect associated with the variation display of the special symbol, the effect associated with the jackpot game, and the like. The CGROM 105 is composed of a flash memory, EEPROM, EPROM, mask ROM, etc., and is composed of a collection of pixel information in a predetermined range of pixels (for example, 32 × 32 pixels), sprite data (one image data), and a plurality of image data. The movie data, etc., which consists of a collection of data, is compressed and stored. The pixel information is composed of color number information that specifies a color number for each pixel and an α value that indicates the transparency of the image. Further, the CGROM 105 stores the palette data or the like in which the color number information for designating the color number and the display color information for actually displaying the color are associated with each other without compression.

It should be noted that only a part of the image data stored in the CGROM 105 may be compressed. Further, as a compression method of movie data, various known compression methods such as MPEG4 can be used.

The VRAM 106 is composed of an SRAM capable of writing and reading image data at high speed, and is not shown in the figure, but is configured to have a display list storage area, an expansion storage area, a frame buffer, and the like. ing.

The display list storage area temporarily stores the display list output from the image / sound control CPU 101. The expanded storage area stores image data that has been decompressed after being read from the CGROM 105. The frame buffer is a frame buffer that is also used for drawing and displaying the image data displayed on the display screen 70.

The VDP 104 decompresses the image data stored in the compressed state in the CGROM 105, and stores the decompressed image data in the decompressed storage area. Further, the VDP 104 performs drawing processing on the frame buffer using the image data stored in the expansion storage area based on the display list stored in the display list storage area. Further, the VDP 104 generates an RGB signal as a video signal indicating the color of the image from the image data stored in the frame buffer, and outputs the generated RGB signal to the image display device 7.

An acoustic ROM 108, an SDRAM 109, and an amplifier 110 are connected to the acoustic DSP 107. The acoustic ROM 108 stores various acoustic data related to music, voice, sound effects, warning sounds, and the like. The SDRAM 109 is used as a work area for data processing and the like by the acoustic DSP 107. The acoustic DSP 107 reads the acoustic data corresponding to the instruction from the image / acoustic control CPU 101 from the acoustic ROM 108 to the SDRAM 109, executes data processing, and outputs the acoustic data after the data processing to the speaker 38 (via the amplifier 110). The amplifier 110 adjusts the volume according to the instruction regarding the volume obtained from the image / sound control CPU 101 via the sound DSP 107, and outputs the sound data to the speaker 38.

In this embodiment, the case where the VDP is responsible for drawing management and the acoustic DSP is responsible for sound management will be described, but in other embodiments, a configuration is adopted in which the VDP is responsible for both drawing management and sound management. You may. In this case, it is not necessary to separately provide an acoustic DSP.

<Structure example of lamp control board 120>
The lamp control board 120 includes a lamp CPU 121, a lamp ROM 122, and a lamp RAM 123, and includes a frame lamp 37, a board lamp 5, a movable decorative member 14, an effect display 125, an effect first special figure hold indicator 126, and an effect second special. Figure Hold indicator 127 and vibration motor 128 are connected. The lamp ROM 122 stores a program executed by the lamp CPU 121, light emission pattern data, operation pattern data, and the like. Here, the light emission pattern data is built in the frame lamp 37, the board surface lamp 5 (including the first light emitting group 511, the second light emitting group 512, and the third light emitting group 523, which will be described later based on FIG. 28), and the movable decorative member 14. It is data which shows each light emission pattern of the LED, the 1st effect button lamp built in the 1st effect button 35, the 2nd effect button lamp built in the 2nd effect button 36, and the like. The motion pattern data is data indicating an motion pattern of the movable decorative member 14 and the like. The vibration pattern data is data showing a vibration pattern (drive pattern of the vibration motor 128) of the first effect button 35 that vibrates by the driving force of the vibration motor 128.

Based on the program stored in the lamp ROM 122, the lamp CPU 121 includes a frame lamp 37, a board lamp 5, a movable decorative member 14, an effect display 125, an effect first special figure hold indicator 126, and an effect second special figure hold. Performs arithmetic processing when controlling the operation of the display 127, the vibration motor 128, and the like.

The lamp CPU 121 reads the light emission pattern data corresponding to the command received from the sub-control board 90 from the light emission pattern data stored in the lamp ROM 122 into the lamp RAM 123, and reads the frame lamp 37, the board lamp 5, and the movable decorative member. It controls the light emission of the LED built in 14, the first effect button lamp built in the first effect button 35, the second effect button lamp built in the second effect button 36, and the like. Further, the lamp CPU 121 reads the operation pattern data corresponding to the command received from the sub-control board 90 from the operation pattern data stored in the lamp ROM 122 into the lamp RAM 123, and operates the movable decorative member 14. Control the drive. Further, the lamp CPU 121 controls the driving of the vibration motor 128 by reading the vibration pattern data corresponding to the command received from the sub-control board 90 from the vibration pattern data stored in the lamp ROM 122 into the lamp RAM 123.

Further, the lamp CPU 121 controls the variation display and the stop display of the symbol on the effect display 125 based on the command from the sub control board 90. Further, the lamp CPU 121 displays the number of holds related to the first special symbol determination by the effect first special figure hold indicator 126, and the effect second special figure hold indicator 127 based on the command from the sub control board 90. 2 Controls the display of the number of holds related to the special symbol determination.

[About game status]
Next, the gaming state of the gaming machine 1 will be described. In the present embodiment, the gaming machine 1 is controlled in any of the three gaming states of "normal gaming state", "probability variable gaming state", and "time saving gaming state".

The "normal game state" is a support function (so-called) that supports a winning of a game ball for the second starting port 22 while performing a special symbol determination in a low probability state in which the probability of being determined to execute a jackpot game is relatively low. It is a gaming state (low probability and low base state) in which a function called "electric support" or the like is not provided. In the normal game state, the probability that the jackpot game will be executed by the special symbol determination is set to a relatively low probability (for example, 1/160) (see FIG. 6A). Further, the probability that the second starting port 22 is determined to be opened by the normal symbol determination is set to a relatively low probability (for example, 1/11), and the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is a relatively long time (for example, 20 seconds). And when it is determined that the second starting port 22 is to be opened, the opening time of the second starting port 22 is set to a relatively short time (for example, 0.1 second × 1 time).

The "probability variation game state" is a game state (high probability high base state) in which the special symbol judgment is performed in a high probability state in which the probability of being determined to execute the jackpot game is relatively high, and the above support function is given. be. That is, in the probabilistic game state, the probability that the jackpot game will be executed by the special symbol determination is set to a relatively high probability (for example, 1/60) (see FIG. 6A). Further, the probability that the second starting port 22 is determined to be opened by the normal symbol determination is set to a relatively high probability (for example, 11/11), and the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is set to a relatively short time (for example, 1.5). The opening time of the second starting port 22 is set to a relatively long time (for example, 1.5 seconds × 3 times) when it is determined that the second starting port 22 is opened.

The "time saving game state" is a game state (low probability high base state) in which the special symbol determination is performed in the above-mentioned low probability state and the electric chew support function is given. That is, in the time-saving game state, the probability that the jackpot game will be executed by the special symbol determination is set to a relatively low probability (for example, 1/160). Further, the probability that the second starting port 12 is determined to be opened by the normal symbol determination is set to a relatively high probability (for example, 11/11), and the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is set to a relatively short time (for example, 1.5). Seconds), and the opening time of the second starting port 12 when it is determined to open the second starting port 12 is set to a relatively long time (for example, 1.5 seconds × 3 times).

Comparing these gaming states with respect to the variation time of the special symbol, the variation time of the special symbol in the "probability variation game state" and the "short-time gaming state" is relative to the variation time of the special symbol in the "normal gaming state". It is easy to set a short time. In addition, the probability of being determined to execute the special game (big hit probability), the probability of being determined to open the second starting port 22 (probability of winning the normal symbol determination), and the variation of the normal symbol shown in the explanation of each game state. Needless to say, the time and the opening time of the second starting port 22 are merely examples, and may be other probabilities or times.

In the following description, a state in which the game ball can easily win a prize in the second starting port 22 due to the above support function is referred to as a "high base state", and the support function is not provided. A state in which it is difficult for a game ball to win a prize in the second starting port 22 is referred to as a "low base state".

[Game flow]
A game ball hit by the player to the right does not win a prize in the first starting port 21, but may win a prize in the second starting port 22. However, in the low base state, it is difficult to open the second starting port 22, and even if it is opened, the opening time is short. Therefore, when the game is controlled in a low base state (corresponding to the "normal game state" in the present embodiment), the player decides to play the game by left-handed aiming at the first starting port 21. Become.

When the left-handed game ball wins the first starting port 21 in the normal game state, the first special symbol determination is executed, and after the first special symbol is variablely displayed, the determination result of the first special symbol determination is displayed. As the first special symbol to be shown, the jackpot symbol or the lost symbol is stopped and displayed.

Here, when the lost symbol is stopped and displayed, the jackpot game is not performed and the game state does not change. On the other hand, when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed as the first special symbol, a jackpot game in which a predetermined number of round games are performed according to the jackpot symbol is executed. The game will be controlled by the "state".

When the game state shifts to the "probability variation game state" or the "time saving game state" when the jackpot game ends, that is, when the game state shifts from the low base state to the high base state, the game ball to the second starting port 22 With the above-mentioned support function for facilitating the winning of the game ball, the game ball is more likely to be won in the second starting port 22 than in the first starting port 21. Therefore, when the game is controlled in the high base state, the player plays the game by hitting the right side aiming at the second starting port 22. Therefore, when the game is controlled in the probabilistic game state or the time-saving game state, the second special symbol determination is basically performed.

When the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed as the second special symbol in the probabilistic game state or the time-saving game state, the game is basically controlled in the probabilistic game state after the jackpot game ends. On the other hand, if the jackpot cannot be assigned in the probabilistic game state or the time-saving game state, the game state will be returned from the probabilistic game state (or the time-saving game state) to the normal game state.

[About special symbol judgment using random numbers]
Next, the determination process using the jackpot random number and the symbol random number will be described with reference to FIG. Here, FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the jackpot random number and the symbol random number. In the explanatory diagrams relating to each random number illustrated in FIGS. 6 and 6 and thereafter, the range in which the random numbers can be taken is set to a range smaller than the actual range in order to facilitate the explanation.

<Processing based on jackpot random numbers>
The jackpot random number exemplified in FIG. 6A is a random number used in the jackpot determination process (step S308 in FIG. 42) as to whether or not to execute the jackpot game, and the probability of being determined to execute the jackpot game is high. Each of the relatively low low probability state and the high probability state in which the probability of being determined to execute the jackpot game is relatively high is set individually.

In the present embodiment, six winning values are stored in the main ROM 82 regarding the low probability state, and the main CPU 81 corresponds to the low probability state (in the present embodiment, the "normal game state" and the "time saving game state" correspond to this. ), And when the acquired jackpot random number matches any of these six winning values, it is determined that the jackpot game is executed. Further, regarding the high probability state (in this embodiment, the "probability variation game state" corresponds to this), 16 winning values are stored in the main ROM 82, and are acquired when the game is controlled in the high probability state. When the jackpot random number is matched with any of these 16 winning values, it is determined that the jackpot game is executed.

In this embodiment, the jackpot random number can take 960 values of "0" to "959" in both the low-probability state and the high-probability state. Therefore, the jackpot probability in the low probability state is 1/160 (= 6/960), and the jackpot probability in the high probability state is 1/60 (= 16/960).

<Processing based on symbol random numbers>
When the main CPU 81 determines that the jackpot game is to be executed, which of the random number values preset for each type of jackpot matches the symbol random number acquired together with the jackpot random number used for the determination. Determine the type of jackpot based on. In other words, the first special symbol (second special symbol) that is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 41 (or the second special symbol display 42) is selected as the jackpot symbol.

(Type of jackpot related to the first special symbol judgment)
As illustrated in FIG. 6B, in the present embodiment, the types of jackpots due to the first start opening winning (in the normal gaming state) are "5R probability variation A", "5R probability variation B", and "5R normal A". , And "5R Normal B", four types of jackpots are available.

Here, "5R probability variation A" (see FIG. 6B) is a jackpot game in which a jackpot game including five round games for opening and closing the second prize opening 28 is executed. When this "5R probability variation A" is won, both the second major winning opening 28 and the V winning opening 287 are controlled to be open, and the valid period during which the V winning of the game ball for the V winning opening 287 becomes valid is On condition that a jackpot game including the set effective round game (see "1R" in FIG. 7A) is executed and the passage of the game ball is detected by the V winning opening sensor 283 during this effective round game. After the jackpot game is completed, the game is controlled in the "probability change game state".

“5R Probability B” (see FIG. 6B) is a jackpot in which a jackpot game including five rounds of opening and closing the second prize opening 28 is executed. When the "5R probability variation B" is won, a jackpot game including an effective round game (see "3R" in FIG. 7B) is executed as in the case of winning the "5R probability variation A", and this valid round is executed. After the jackpot game is completed, the game is controlled in the "probability variation game state" on condition that the passage of the game ball is detected by the V winning opening sensor 283 during the game.

“5R Normal A” (see FIG. 6B) is a jackpot in which a jackpot game including five rounds of opening and closing the second prize opening 28 is executed. When this "5R normal A" is won, a jackpot game that does not include a valid round game and includes an ineffective round game (see "2R" and "4R" in FIG. 7C) is executed. Therefore, even if the game ball passes through the V winning opening 287 during the ineffective round game, the V winning is not obtained, and after the jackpot game is completed, the game is controlled in the "short-time game state".

“5R Normal B” (see FIG. 6B) is a jackpot in which a jackpot game including five rounds of opening and closing the second prize opening 28 is executed. When this "5R normal B" is won, as in the case of winning "5R normal A", the valid round game is not included and the ineffective round game (see "2R" and "4R" in FIG. 7 (D)). A jackpot game including is executed. Therefore, even if the game ball passes through the V winning opening 287 during the ineffective round game, the V winning is not obtained, and after the jackpot game is completed, the game is controlled in the "short-time game state".

As is clear from the notation of FIGS. 7A to 7D, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the jackpots related to the first special symbol determination in the normal gaming state are "5R probability variation A" and "5R". Regardless of which of the jackpots "Probability B", "5R Normal A", and "5R Normal B" is hit, the second big prize opening 28 is opened for a long time (only for the time when 10 game balls can easily win). The round game is executed twice. Therefore, each of these four types of jackpots is a real two-round (2R) jackpot that can win prize balls for two rounds (300 pieces = 15 pieces x 10 counts x 2R).

As described above, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the main CPU 81 determines that the jackpot game is to be executed and selects "5R probability variation A" or "5R probability variation B" as the type of jackpot, (second). The opening / closing member 29 and the slide member 285 are operated (via the large winning opening solenoid 282 and the V winning opening solenoid 286) to open the second large winning opening 28 and the V winning opening 287 so that the game ball can easily pass through. It is possible to execute a plurality of round games including an effective round game (specific round game).

As illustrated in FIG. 6B, in the present embodiment, when the determination result of the first special symbol determination is a big hit, a random number value for determining the type of the big hit is stored in the main ROM 82. ing. Specifically, 30 random values are stored for "5R probability variation A", 30 random values are stored for "5R probability variation B", and 20 random values are stored for "5R normal A". Random values are stored, and 20 random values are stored for "5R normal B".

In the present embodiment, the range in which the symbol random number can be taken is set to "0" to "99", and the jackpot is based on the jackpot random number acquired in response to the winning of the game ball in the first starting port 21. When it is determined, "5R probability variation A" is selected at a rate of 30% (= 30/100 x 100) and "5R probability variation B" is 30% (= 30) as the type of jackpot related to the first special symbol determination. "5R normal A" is selected at a ratio of 20% (= 20/100 x 100), and "5R normal B" is selected at a ratio of 20% (= 20/100 x 100). It is selected by percentage (see FIG. 6B).

Therefore, when the judgment result of the first special symbol determination is a jackpot, the jackpot symbol X1 indicating "5R probability variation A" is 30% as the jackpot symbol that is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 41. The jackpot symbol X2 indicating "5R probability variation B" is selected at a rate of 30%, the jackpot symbol X3 indicating "5R normal A" is selected at a rate of 20%, and the jackpot symbol indicating "5R normal B" is selected. X4 is selected at a rate of 20%.

(Type of jackpot related to the second special symbol judgment)
As illustrated in FIG. 6C, in the present embodiment, the types of jackpots due to the second start opening winning (in the probabilistic game state or the time-saving game state) are "5R probable change", "7R probable change", and "7R probable change". Three types of jackpots of "9R probability change" are prepared.

Here, the "5R probability variation" (see FIG. 6C) is a jackpot game in which a jackpot game including five round games for opening and closing the second prize opening 28 is executed. When this "5R probability change" is won, a jackpot game including a valid round game is executed, and after the jackpot game is completed, provided that the passage of the game ball is detected by the V winning opening sensor 283 during this valid round game. Is controlled in the "probability changing game state". In the case of this "5R probability change", a round game in which the second major winning opening 28 is opened for a long time (only for the time when 10 game balls can easily win) including the above-mentioned effective round game is executed 5 times. Will be done. Therefore, the "5R probability variation" related to the second special symbol determination is a jackpot of 5 rounds (5R) in which 5 rounds of prize balls (750 = 15 x 10 counts x 5R) can be obtained.

"7R Probability Change" (see FIG. 6C) includes a total of 7 round games including 5 round games that open and close the 2nd prize opening 28 and 2 round games that open and close the 1st prize opening 26. It is a jackpot in which a jackpot game including a round game of is executed. When this "7R probability change" is won, the above-mentioned effective round game using the second large winning opening 28 is executed, and the passage of the game ball is detected by the V winning opening sensor 283 during this effective round game. After the jackpot game is completed, the game is controlled in the "probability change game state". In the case of this "7R probability change", a round game in which the second major winning opening 28 is opened for a long time (only for the time when 10 game balls can easily win) including the above-mentioned effective round game is executed 5 times. In addition, a long-open round game in which the first large winning opening 26 is opened for a long time (only for a time during which 10 game balls can easily win) is executed twice. Therefore, the "7R probability change" related to the second special symbol determination is a jackpot of 7 rounds (7R) in which 7 rounds of prize balls (1050 = 15 x 10 counts x (5R + 2R)) can be obtained. ..

"9R Probability Change" (see FIG. 6C) is a total of 9 times including 5 round games that open and close the 2nd prize opening 28 and 4 round games that open and close the 1st prize opening 26. It is a jackpot in which a jackpot game including a round game of is executed. When this "9R probability change" is won, the above-mentioned effective round game using the second large winning opening 28 is executed, and the passage of the game ball is detected by the V winning opening sensor 283 during this effective round game. After the jackpot game is completed, the game is controlled in the "probability change game state". In the case of this "9R probability change", a round game including the above-mentioned effective round game, in which the second major winning opening 28 is opened for a long time (only for the time when 10 game balls can easily win) is executed 5 times. In addition, a long-open round game is executed four times, in which the first large winning opening 26 is opened for a long time (only for a time during which 10 game balls can easily win). Therefore, the "9R probability change" related to the second special symbol determination is a jackpot of 9 rounds (9R) in which 9 rounds of prize balls (1350 = 15 x 10 counts x (5R + 4R)) can be obtained. ..

As illustrated in FIG. 6C, in the present embodiment, when the determination result of the second special symbol determination is a big hit, a random number value for determining the type of the big hit is stored in the main ROM 82. ing. Specifically, 25 random values are stored for "5R probability variation", 30 random values are stored for "7R probability variation", and 45 random values are stored for "9R probability variation". It is remembered.

In the present embodiment, the range in which the symbol random number related to the second special symbol determination can be obtained is the same as the range in which the symbol random number related to the first special symbol determination can be obtained, and the game ball has won a prize in the second starting port 22. When it is determined that the jackpot is a jackpot based on the jackpot random number acquired according to the above, "5R probability variation" is selected at a ratio of 25% (= 25/100 x 100) as the type of jackpot related to the second special symbol determination. , "7R probability variation" is selected at a rate of 30% (= 30/100 x 100), and "9R probability variation" is selected at a rate of 45% (= 45/100 x 100).

Therefore, when the judgment result of the second special symbol determination is a jackpot, the jackpot symbol Y1 indicating "5R probability variation" is selected at a rate of 25% as the jackpot symbol that is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 42. Then, the jackpot symbol Y2 indicating "7R probability variation" is selected at a rate of 30%, and the jackpot symbol Y3 indicating "9R probability variation" is selected at a rate of 45%.

<Processing based on reach random numbers>
When the main CPU 81 determines that the jackpot game is not executed, the reach random number acquired together with the jackpot random number used for the determination is either a random number value corresponding to the effect with reach or a random number value corresponding to the effect without reach. Based on whether it matches the random number value of, it is determined whether to perform the effect with reach or the effect without reach. Here, the effect with reach is an effect of notifying the winner (determination result of the special symbol determination) by the reach effect executed in the state where the reach by the effect symbol is established. On the other hand, the non-reach effect is an effect in which this reach effect is not performed, and basically, the "big hit" is not notified and the "loss" is notified.

In the present embodiment, the main ROM 82 stores 10 random numbers for the effect with reach, and the main CPU 81 determines that the acquired reach random numbers match any of these 10 random numbers. Decided to perform a production with reach. Further, 90 random number values are stored for the non-reach effect, and when the acquired reach random number matches any of these 90 random numbers, the main CPU 81 performs the no-reach effect. decide. In the present embodiment, the range in which the reach random number can be taken is set to "0" to "99", and when it is determined that the jackpot game is not executed, the rate at which the reach effect is performed is 10% (= 10 /). 100 × 100), and the ratio of no reach effect (ratio of non-reach effect) is 90% (= 90/100 × 100).

When the main CPU 81 decides to perform the effect with reach, the main CPU 81 selects a variation pattern in which the variation effect pattern of the effect symbol accompanied by the reach effect is selected by the sub-control board 90 as the variation pattern of the special symbol. On the contrary, when it is decided to perform the non-reach effect, as the variation pattern of the special symbol, the variation pattern in which the variation effect pattern of the effect symbol without the reach effect is selected by the sub-control board 90 is selected.

[About the jackpot game executed according to the first hit]
Hereinafter, with reference to FIG. 7, a jackpot game executed when the determination result of the first special symbol determination is “big hit” when the game is controlled in the normal game state will be described. Here, FIG. 7 is a time chart for explaining the jackpot game.

<Big hit game of 5R probability change A>
When the above-mentioned 5R probability variation A is won based on FIG. 6 (B), a 5R jackpot game using the second big winning opening 28 is executed in the embodiment illustrated in FIG. 7 (A). Specifically, as illustrated in FIG. 7A, in the first round game, the second big winning opening 28 is in an open state for 0.1 seconds, a closed state for 0.1 seconds, and 10 seconds. The operation of the opening / closing member 29 is controlled so that the state changes in the order of the open state. Along with this, the operation of the slide member 285 is controlled so that the V winning opening 287 changes in the order of the open state for 0.1 seconds, the closed state for 0.1 seconds, and the open state for 10 seconds.

In this way, in the 1st round game of the 5R probability variation A, both the second large winning opening 28 and the V winning opening 287 are opened for a long time, so that the player simply hits the right to make the V winning opening. It is possible to easily pass the game ball through the sensor 283. The operation of the opening / closing member 29 and the slide member 285 in the 1R round game exemplified in FIG. 7A is performed after the second large winning opening 28 and the V winning opening 287 are opened for the second time. It is continued until 10 seconds have elapsed or the passage of 10 game balls is detected by the second large winning opening sensor 281 after the first round game is started.

Next, in the 2R round game of the 5R probability change A, as illustrated in FIG. 7A, the second large winning opening 28 changes in the same state as when the 1R round game is performed. As described above, the operation of the opening / closing member 29 is controlled. On the other hand, the operation of the slide member 285 is controlled so that the V winning opening 287 is opened for 0.1 seconds, then returns to the closed state and maintains the closed state. In this way, in the 2nd round game of the 5R probability variation A, the second large winning opening 28 is opened for a long time, while the V winning opening 287 is changed to the open state only for 0.1 seconds, so that the player can play. It is possible to easily make the second big winning opening 28 win the game ball by hitting right, while the game ball enters the second big winning opening 28 until it reaches the V winning opening 287. It is impossible to pass the game ball through the V winning opening sensor 283 because it takes 0.1 seconds or more. The end condition of the 2R round game is the same as the end condition of the 1R round game.

Subsequently, in the 3R round game of the 5R probability variation A, as illustrated in FIG. 7A, the second large winning opening 28 is opened for 0.1 seconds and then returned to the closed state. The operation of the opening / closing member 29 is controlled so as to maintain the state. On the other hand, the operation of the slide member 285 is controlled so that the V winning opening 287 changes in the same state as when the first round game is performed. As described above, in the 3R round game of the 5R probability variation A, the V winning opening 287 is opened for a long time, while the second major winning opening 28 is changed to the open state only for 0.1 seconds. Therefore, it is extremely difficult for the player to win the game ball in the second large winning opening 28 even if he / she hits right.

Subsequently, in the 3R round game of the 5R probability variation A, as illustrated in FIG. 7A, the second large winning opening 28 is opened for 0.1 seconds and then returned to the closed state. The operation of the opening / closing member 29 is controlled so as to maintain the state. On the other hand, the slide member 285 does not operate, and the V winning opening 287 does not shift to the open state. In this way, in the 3R round game of the 5R probability change A, the second big winning opening 28 changes to the open state only for 0.1 seconds, so that the player makes a right-handed hit, but the second big winning opening It is extremely difficult to get 28 to win a game ball.

In the game machine 1 of the present embodiment, regardless of the type of jackpot related to the first special symbol determination, a game ball for the V winning opening 287 during the 1R round game and the 3R round game. The validity period for which the V prize is valid is set (see FIGS. 7 (A) to 7 (D)), and during other round games (during the 2nd round game, during the 4th round game, and the 5th round game). The validity period is not set for (during a round game). Therefore, even if the passage of the game ball is detected by the V winning opening sensor 283 during another round game, the game is controlled in the "probability changing game state" after the jackpot game is completed based on this detection. There is no.

In the jackpot game related to the 5R probability variation A, the 1st round game is the above-mentioned effective round game. In the 2nd round game, the 2nd big winning opening 28 is opened for a long time, but the V winning opening 287 is opened only for 0.1 seconds and is not in the valid period, so it is inside the 2nd big winning opening 28. The entered game ball does not win a V prize. In addition, during the 3R round game, although the V prize is valid for a valid period, the second big prize opening 28 is opened only for 0.1 seconds, so that the game ball enters the second big prize opening 28. The possibility is extremely low, and since the V winning opening 287 is temporarily blocked almost at the same time as the second winning opening 28 is closed, even if the game ball enters the second major winning opening 28, The game ball does not win a V prize. Further, in the 4th round game and the 5th round game, the second big winning opening 28 is opened only for 0.1 seconds, and the V winning opening 287 does not change to the open state, so that the game ball Will not win a V prize.

<Big hit game of 5R probability change B>
When the above-mentioned 5R probability variation B is won based on FIG. 6 (B), a 5R jackpot game using the second big winning opening 28 is executed in the embodiment illustrated in FIG. 7 (B). Specifically, as illustrated in FIG. 7B, in the first round game, the second big winning opening 28 shifts to the open state for 0.1 seconds, then returns to the closed state, and the closed state is restored. The operation of the opening / closing member 29 is controlled so as to maintain the state. Along with this, the V winning opening 287 changes in the order of 0.1 second open state, 0.1 second closed state, and 10 second open state, as in the 1R round game of 5R probability change A. As described above, the operation of the slide member 285 is controlled.

In the 1st round game of 5R probability change B, the V winning opening 287 is opened for a long time and the valid period is set for the V winning opening to be valid, but the second major winning opening 28 is opened only for 0.1 seconds. Therefore, it is extremely unlikely that the game ball will enter the second prize opening 28. Further, since the V winning opening 287 is temporarily blocked almost at the same time as the second major winning opening 28 is blocked, even if the game ball enters the second major winning opening 28, the game ball wins the V prize. There is nothing to do.

Next, in the 2R round game of the 5R probability variation B, as illustrated in FIG. 7B, the second big winning opening 28 is maintained in the open state for 10 seconds and then returns to the closed state. , The operation of the opening / closing member 29 is controlled. On the other hand, the operation of the slide member 285 is controlled so that the V winning opening 287 is opened for 0.1 seconds, then returns to the closed state and maintains the closed state. In this way, in the 2nd round game of the 5R probability variation B, the second large winning opening 28 is opened for a long time, while the V winning opening 287 is changed to the open state only for 0.1 seconds, so that the player can play. It is possible to easily make the second big winning opening 28 win the game ball by hitting right, but it is impossible to let the V winning opening sensor 283 pass the game ball. In this 2R round game, the number of game balls detected by the 2nd big winning opening sensor 281 is 10 before 10 seconds have passed since the 2nd big winning opening 28 was changed to the open state. When the score reaches, the second round game ends at that point, and the opening / closing member 29 returns to the initial posture of closing the second winning opening 28.

Subsequently, in the 3R round game of the 5R probability variation B, the opening / closing member 29 and the slide member 285 are controlled in the same manner as in the 1R round game of the 5R probability variation A, and the V prize of the game ball becomes effective. It is a valid round game set for a period. Therefore, the player can easily pass the game ball through the V winning opening sensor 283 by simply hitting the right side. The end condition of the 3R round game of the 5R probability variation B is the same as the end condition of the 1R round game of the 5R probability variation A (see FIG. 7A).

In the jackpot game related to the 5R probability variation B (see FIG. 7B), the 3rd round game is the above-mentioned effective round game, and the game ball that has entered the second large winning opening 28 can easily win a V prize. During the 1st round game, the V winning opening 287 is opened for a long time, and although the validity period is set, the second major winning opening 28 is opened only for 0.1 seconds, so that the game ball is V. There is no prize. Further, in the 2nd round game, although the second large winning opening 28 is opened for a long time, the V winning opening 287 is opened only for 0.1 seconds, and since it is not in the valid period, the game ball wins a V prize. There is no such thing. Further, in the 4th round game and the 5th round game, the second big winning opening 28 is opened only for 0.1 seconds, and the V winning opening 287 does not change to the open state, so that the game ball Will not win a V prize.

<5R Normal A jackpot game>
When the above-mentioned 5R normal A is won based on FIG. 6 (B), a 5R jackpot game using the second big winning opening 28 is executed in the embodiment illustrated in FIG. 7 (C). Specifically, as illustrated in FIG. 7 (C), in the first round game, the second big winning opening 28 changes to the open state for 0.1 seconds, then returns to the closed state, and the closed state is restored. The operation of the opening / closing member 29 is controlled so as to maintain the state. Along with this, the operation of the slide member 285 is controlled so that the V winning opening 287 changes to the open state for 0.1 seconds, then returns to the closed state and maintains the closed state.

During the 1st round game of the 5R normal A, the V prize of the game ball is valid during the valid period as in the 1R round game of the 5R probability variation A and the 1R round game of the 5R probability variation B. However, during the 1st round game of 5R normal A, both the second large winning opening 28 and the V winning opening 287 are opened for only 0.1 seconds, so that the game ball does not win a V prize.

Next, in the 2R round game of 5R normal A, as illustrated in FIG. 7C, after the second large winning opening 28 (and V winning opening 287) is maintained in the open state for 10 seconds. The operation of the opening / closing member 29 (and the slide member 285) is controlled so as to return to the closed state. Therefore, although the player can easily make the second large winning opening 28 win the game ball by hitting right, in this second round game, the V winning of the game ball is effective. Since it is the above-mentioned ineffective round game, the passage of the game ball is detected by the V winning opening sensor 283, but the game is not controlled in the "probability changing game state" after the jackpot game is completed.

Subsequently, in the 3R round game of 5R normal A, as illustrated in FIG. 7C, the second big winning opening 28 changes to the open state for 0.1 seconds and then returns to the closed state. The operation of the opening / closing member 29 is controlled so as to maintain the state. Along with this, the operation of the slide member 285 is controlled so that the V winning opening 287 changes in the order of the open state for 0.1 seconds, the closed state for 0.1 seconds, and the open state for 0.1 seconds. NS. During this 3R round game, although the V prize of the game ball is valid during the valid period, the second big prize opening 28 is opened only for 0.1 seconds, so that the game ball is the second big prize opening 28. The possibility of entering the inside is extremely low, and even if the player enters the second large winning opening 28, the game ball does not pass through the V winning opening 287.

Subsequently, in the 4R round game of the 5R normal A, as illustrated in FIG. 7C, the operations of the opening / closing member 29 and the slide member 285 are controlled as in the 2R round game of the 5R normal A. Will be done.

Subsequently, in the 5R round game of 5R normal A, as illustrated in FIG. 7C, the second big winning opening 28 is in an open state for 0.1 seconds, a closed state for 0.1 seconds, and so on. The operation of the opening / closing member 29 is controlled so that the state changes in the order of the open state for 0.1 seconds, the closed state for 0.1 seconds, and the open state for 0.1 seconds. Then, during the 5R round game of the 5R normal A, the game ball is not in the valid period during which the V prize of the game ball becomes valid, and the V prize opening 287 does not change to the open state. There is no V prize.

As is clear from the explanation so far, the jackpot game of 5R normal A does not include the effective round game. Therefore, the game ball does not win a V prize during the big hit game of 5R normal A, and after the big hit game is completed, the game is controlled in the "normal game state".

<5R normal B jackpot game>
When the above-mentioned 5R normal B is won based on FIG. 6 (B), the 5R jackpot game using the second big winning opening 28 is executed in the embodiment illustrated in FIG. 7 (D). Specifically, as illustrated in FIG. 7 (D), in the round game of the 1st to 4Rth of the 5R normal B, the opening / closing member 29 is the same as the round game of the 1R to 4R of the 5R normal A. And the operation of the slide member 285 is controlled. Then, in the 5R round game, the opening / closing member 29 and the slide member 285 operate in the same manner as in the 5R normal A 5R round game, except that the number of times the opening / closing member 29 changes to the open state is one less. Be controlled. Therefore, the 5R normal B jackpot game does not include the effective round game, and the game ball does not win a V prize during the 5R normal B jackpot game, and after the jackpot game is completed, "normal" The game is controlled in the "game state".

[Structure to make it difficult to understand whether or not there is a V prize]
By the way, during the jackpot game performed in response to winning the "5R probability variation A" or "5R probability variation B", the player can play the jackpot game by notifying that when the game ball wins a V prize. It is possible to clearly recognize that the game is controlled in the "probability changing game state" after the end. On the other hand, even if the game ball wins a V prize, that fact is not notified (the effect image for notifying the V prize is displayed on the display screen 70, or the effect sound for notifying the V prize is output from the speaker 38. In addition, after the jackpot game is completed, the game is controlled in the "probability variation game state" or the game is controlled in the "short-time game state". It is conceivable to improve the enjoyment of the game by not knowing whether or not the game has shifted to the "probability changing game state".

However, in this configuration, after recognizing in advance which round game the round game in which both the second large winning opening 28 and the V winning opening 287 are opened for a long time is the round game, the V winning is won during the round game. If the mouth 287 is closely watched, it is possible to easily determine whether or not the game ball has won a V prize, which may rather reduce the interest.

Therefore, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the following configuration is adopted in order to suppress the occurrence of such a problem. That is, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the jackpot game of "5R probability variation A", the jackpot game of "5R probability variation B", the jackpot game of "5R normal A", and the jackpot game of "5R normal B" With respect to, a configuration is adopted in which the number of rounds indicating the number of round games currently being played is not displayed.

By adopting this configuration, even if the round game in which the game ball can win is known in advance, whether or not that round game is currently being performed. It becomes difficult to determine whether or not, and it is possible to easily and effectively suppress the above-mentioned problem. The configuration in which the number of rounds is not displayed during this jackpot game will be described in more detail later based on FIG.

Further, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, for example, a configuration is adopted in which the second major winning opening 28 and the V winning opening 287 are alternately long-opened and short-opened. Specifically, for example, in the case of a big hit game of 5R probability variation A (see FIG. 7 (A)), the first round game in which both the second big winning opening 28 and the V winning opening 287 are short-opened and then long-opened. And, the 2R round game (V winning opening 287 is only one short opening) and the V winning opening 287 are short-opened and then long-opened. The 3rd round game (the second big winning opening 28 is only one short opening) is performed.

As described above, in the game machine 1 of the present embodiment, when a plurality of round games including the effective round game are executed, it is recognized which round game the executed round game is. The opening / closing member 29 and the slide member 285 operate in a difficult manner. Therefore, for example, the short opening of the second big winning opening 28 and the V winning opening 287, which is performed first after the big hit game is started, is the first round game, and is performed first after the big hit game is started. It is possible to make the player feel that the long opening of the second large winning opening 28 and the V winning opening 287 may be the second round game, and it is possible to easily enhance the effect of obscuring the current number of rounds. It is possible.

Further, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, a configuration is adopted in which the V winning of the gaming ball is valid only for a predetermined round game. Specifically, regarding any of the four types of jackpot games that can be executed when the determination result of the first special symbol determination is "big hit", the 1R round game and the 3R round game However, when the game ball passes through the V winning opening 287, the valid period during which the V winning is valid is set (see FIGS. 7A to 7D). For example, when "5R Probability A" or "5R Probability B" is won, both the 2nd prize opening 28 and the V prize opening 287 are opened for a long time in the 1R round game and the 3R round game in the jackpot game. (See FIGS. 7 (A) and 7 (B)). Therefore, the player can easily make the game ball V-win by simply hitting the right side, and after the jackpot game is completed according to the V-win of the game ball, the "probability changing game state" The game will be controlled by.

On the other hand, for any of the above four types of jackpot games, the validity period is not set for the 2R jackpot game, the 4R round game, and the 5R round game (FIGS. 7 (A) to 7 (A) to 5R). (D)). For example, when "5R normal A" or "5R normal B" is won, as illustrated in FIGS. 7 (C) and 7 (D), in the 2R round game and the 4R round game in the jackpot game. Although both the second major winning opening 28 and the V winning opening 287 are open for a long time, they are not valid during these round games. Therefore, even if the game ball passes through the V winning opening 287, the V winning is not obtained, and after the jackpot game is completed, the game is controlled in the "short-time game state".

In this way, in addition to not being notified of the V winning of the game ball and not displaying the current number of rounds, the probability changes regarding the case where both the second major winning opening 28 and the V winning opening 287 are opened for a long time. There are times when the game is controlled in the game state and times when the game is controlled in the time-saving game state. For this reason, it is difficult to clearly determine whether the round game in which both the second major winning opening 28 and the V winning opening 287 are open for a long time is a valid round game or an ineffective round game. Therefore, it is possible to make it more difficult to determine whether or not the game ball has won a V prize.

Further, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, regarding the jackpot game of "5R probability variation A", the jackpot game of "5R probability variation B", the jackpot game of "5R normal A", and the jackpot game of "5R normal B". , The actual number of rounds is set to 2R. Therefore, based on the actual number of rounds, it is determined whether the game is a jackpot game including an effective round game or a round game not including an effective round game, and based on the determination result (V winning opening 287). It is possible to make it difficult to determine whether or not the passage of the game ball against) is a V prize.

Further, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, a jackpot game (see FIGS. 7C and 7D) composed of a plurality of round games not including an effective round game may be executed, and the game machine 1 may be executed a plurality of times. In the ineffective round game of the round games, the opening / closing member 29 and the slide member 285 can be operated. Specifically, regarding the jackpot game of "5R normal A" and the jackpot game of "5R normal B", the second big winning opening 28 is opened for a long time in the 2R round game and the 4R round game. The opening / closing member 29 operates, and the slide member 285 operates so that the V winning opening 287 is opened for a long time. In this way, it is not specified as an effective round game (1R round game of "5R probability variation A": see FIG. 7 (A), 3R round game of "5R probability variation B": see FIG. 7 (B)). Opening and closing member 29 and slide member in both round games (2R round game of "5R normal A": see FIG. 7 (C), 4R round game of "5R normal B": see FIG. 7 (D)) Since the 285 operates, it is difficult to specify whether or not the game is an effective round game based on the movements of the opening / closing member 29 and the slide member 285.

Further, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, although the timings of the jackpot game of 5R probability variation A and the jackpot game of 5R normal A are different from each other, the second big winning opening 28 (and V winning opening 287) is short-opened and long. A configuration is adopted in which the order of opening (opening pattern) is matched. Specifically, in both the big hit game of 5R probability variation A and the big hit game of 5R normal A, the second big winning opening 28 is short open, long open, short open, long open, short open, short open, short. It is opened in the order of opening (see FIGS. 7A and 7C). Further, in both the jackpot game of 5R probability variation A and the jackpot game of 5R normal A, the V winning opening 287 is opened in the order of short opening, long opening, short opening, short opening, and long opening (FIG. 7 (A). ) And (C)).

Further, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, although the timings of the 5R probability variation B jackpot game and the 5R normal B jackpot game are different from each other, the second big winning opening 28 (and V winning opening 287) is short-opened and long. A configuration is adopted in which the order of opening (opening pattern) is matched. Specifically, in both the big hit game of 5R probability variation B and the big hit game of 5R normal B, the second big winning opening 28 is in the order of short opening, long opening, short opening, long opening, short opening, short opening. It is opened (see FIGS. 7B and 7D). Further, in both the 5R probability variation B jackpot game and the 5R normal B jackpot game, the V winning opening 287 is opened in the order of short opening, long opening, short opening, short opening, and long opening (FIG. 7 (A). ) And (C)).

As described above, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the opening patterns of the second big winning opening 28 (and the V winning opening 287) during the jackpot game match with respect to the 5R probability variation A and the 5R normal A, and the 5R probability variation With respect to B and 5R normal B, the opening patterns of the second big winning opening 28 (and V winning opening 287) during the jackpot game match. Therefore, based on the opening pattern of the second large winning opening 28 (and V winning opening 287), the 5R probability variation A and the 5R normal A can be discriminated, or the 5R probability variation B and the 5R normal B can be discriminated. As a result, it is possible to effectively suppress the above-mentioned problem that it is possible to easily determine whether or not the game ball has won a V prize.

[About the flow of the game]
Next, the flow of the game will be described with reference to FIG. Here, FIG. 8 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the flow of the game in the gaming machine 1. Due to the board structure of the game board 2, the game ball launched in the left game area 3L can win a prize in the first starting port 21, while the game ball launched in the right game area 3R wins a prize in the first starting port 21. There is no such thing. Further, in the normal gaming state, it is difficult for the second starting port 22 to be in the open state, and even if it is in the open state, the opening time of the second starting port 22 is extremely short, and the game ball is placed in the second starting port 22. The chances of winning are extremely low. Therefore, there is no merit for the player to hit right in the normal gaming state. As is clear from these facts, in the normal game state, it is easier to hit the jackpot when the game ball is launched into the left game area 3L than when it is launched into the right game area 3R (special symbol determination is easier to be executed). Is. For this reason, the player strikes left in the normal gaming state.

When the left-handed game ball wins the first starting port 21 in the normal game state, the first special symbol determination is executed, and after the first special symbol is variablely displayed on the first special symbol display 41. , The first special symbol indicating the determination result of the first special symbol determination is stopped and displayed. Here, when the determination result of the first special symbol determination is "missing", the lost symbol is stopped and displayed as the first special symbol. On the other hand, when the determination result of the first special symbol determination is "big hit", one of the jackpot symbols X1 to X4 (see FIG. 6B) is stopped and displayed as the jackpot symbol, and the stopped and displayed jackpot symbol is displayed. The jackpot game corresponding to is executed.

When the judgment result of the first special symbol determination is "big hit", when the jackpot symbol for notifying the probability variation jackpot is stopped and displayed (see FIG. 8 (A)), the jackpot symbol for notifying the normal jackpot is stopped and displayed. (See FIG. 8 (E)).

Here, when the jackpot symbol X1 for notifying the probability variation jackpot is stopped and displayed, the above-mentioned jackpot game (including the effective round game) is executed based on FIG. 7A, and the jackpot symbol for notifying the probability variation jackpot is also executed. When X2 is stopped and displayed, the above-mentioned jackpot game (including the effective round game) is executed based on FIG. 7B. When a jackpot game including these valid round games is executed, the second special if no jackpot occurs in the middle after the jackpot game is completed, provided that the game ball wins a V during the valid round game. The game is controlled in a probabilistic game state in which the symbol determination (or the first special symbol determination) is executed 80 times (see FIG. 8B). On the other hand, if the game ball does not win a V prize because the player did not make a right-handed hit during the effective round game even though the effective round game was executed, the jackpot hits in the middle at the end of the game. If is not generated, the game shifts to a time-saving game state in which the second special symbol determination (or the first special symbol determination) is executed 80 times (see FIG. 8 (G)).

Here, the probability variation game state is set to a probability that the winning probability of the normal symbol determination performed on the condition that the game ball has passed through the gate 25 is relatively high (11/11 in the present embodiment), and is also normal. The opening time of the second starting port 22 when the symbol determination is won is set to a relatively long time (1.5 seconds x 3 times in this embodiment). Therefore, in the probabilistic gaming state, it is easier to draw a big hit (a special symbol determination is easier to be executed) when the game ball is launched into the right gaming area 3R than when it is launched into the left gaming area 3L. Therefore, when the game is controlled in the probabilistic game state, the player strikes right. This also applies when the game is controlled in the normal game state.

When the right-handed game ball wins the second starting port 22 while the game is controlled in the probabilistic game state, the second special symbol determination is executed, and the second special symbol display 42 displays the second special symbol. Is displayed in a variable manner, and then the second special symbol indicating the determination result of the second special symbol determination is stopped and displayed. Here, when the determination result of the second special symbol determination is "missing", the lost symbol is stopped and displayed as the second special symbol. On the other hand, when the determination result of the second special symbol determination is "big hit", one of the jackpot symbols Y1 to Y3 (see FIG. 6C) is stopped and displayed as the jackpot symbol, and the stopped and displayed jackpot symbol is displayed. The jackpot game corresponding to is executed.

When the judgment result of the second special symbol determination is "big hit", the jackpot symbol that notifies the probability variation jackpot is stopped and displayed (see FIG. 8C), while the jackpot symbol that notifies the normal jackpot is stopped and displayed. There is no such thing (see FIG. 6 (C)). Here, when any of the jackpot symbols Y1 to Y3 for notifying the probability variation jackpot is stopped and displayed, a jackpot game including an effective round game using the second big winning opening 28 is executed, and a game ball is executed during this effective round game. After the jackpot game is completed, the game is controlled again in the probabilistic game state (see FIGS. 8C and 8B), provided that the player wins the V prize. On the other hand, if the game ball does not win a V prize during the effective round game even though the effective round game is executed, the game shifts to the time-saving game state at the end of the jackpot game (see FIG. 8 (G)).

If the judgment results of the 80th second special symbol judgment (or the first special symbol judgment) performed in the probabilistic game state are all "missing", the game state is changed from the probabilistic game state to the normal game. It will be returned to the state (see FIG. 8 (D)).

On the other hand, when the jackpot symbol X3 (or jackpot symbol X4) is stopped and displayed as the jackpot symbol that notifies the jackpot in the normal game state (see FIG. 8 (E)), if the jackpot does not occur at the end of the jackpot game. It shifts to a time-saving gaming state that continues until the second special symbol determination (or the first special symbol determination) is executed 80 times (see FIG. 8 (F)).

When the right-handed game ball wins the second starting port 22 while the game is controlled in the time-saving game state, the second special symbol determination is executed, and the second special symbol display 42 displays the second special symbol. Is displayed in a variable manner, and then the second special symbol indicating the determination result of the second special symbol determination is stopped and displayed. Here, when the determination result of the second special symbol determination is "missing", the lost symbol is stopped and displayed as the second special symbol. On the other hand, when the determination result of the second special symbol determination is "big hit", one of the jackpot symbols Y1 to Y3 (see FIG. 6C) is stopped and displayed as the jackpot symbol for notifying the probability variation jackpot. The jackpot game corresponding to the displayed jackpot symbol is executed (see FIG. 8 (H)). This jackpot game is a jackpot game including an effective round game, and the game state shifts to a probabilistic game state at the end of the jackpot game on condition that the game ball wins a V during this effective round game (FIG. 8 (Fig. 8). I) See). On the other hand, if the game ball does not win a V prize during the effective round game even though the effective round game is executed, the game shifts to the time-saving game state at the end of the jackpot game (see FIG. 8 (J)).

If the judgment results of the 80th second special symbol judgment (or the first special symbol judgment) performed in the time-saving game state are all "missing", the game state is changed from the time-saving game state to the normal game. It will be returned to the state (see FIG. 8 (K)).

[About variable production]
In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, various effects are performed on the display screen 70 as the first special symbol (or the second special symbol) is variablely displayed and then stopped and displayed. The variation effect performed on the display screen 70 with the variation display of the first special symbol will be described.

In the game machine 1, when the game ball wins a prize in the first starting port 21 and the first special symbol determination is executed, the first special symbol is changed and displayed on the first special symbol display 41, and then the first special symbol is displayed. The first special symbol indicating the determination result of the symbol determination is stopped and displayed. The display screen 70 is provided with an effect symbol display area 73 (see FIG. 2) in which an effect symbol for notifying the determination result of the first special symbol determination (or the second special symbol determination) is displayed, and the display screen 70 is provided. Then, along with the variable display of the first special symbol, a variable effect including the variable display of the effect symbol is performed (see FIG. 2). Then, when the first special symbol is fluctuated and displayed for the fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern selected when the first special symbol determination is executed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed. The effect symbol is stopped and displayed in a mode showing the determination result of the first special symbol determination.

A so-called reach effect may be performed during such a variable display of the effect symbol. Specifically, in the effect symbol display area 73 of the display screen 70, for example, a part of the effect symbol symbol sequence in which the numbers 1 to 9 are continuously written in the vertical direction from the bottom to the top is in the horizontal direction. Three columns are displayed, and when the variable display of the first special symbol is started, the variable display (scroll display) is performed so that these symbol columns scroll from top to bottom. On the other hand, when the reach effect is performed, for example, the left column effect symbol (left symbol) and the right column effect symbol (right symbol) are displayed before all the effect symbols are stopped and displayed. Pseudo-stop so that they do not stop completely in order or at the same time. FIG. 2 illustrates a state in which three symbols are pseudo-stopped as the left symbol, the same three symbols are pseudo-stopped as the right symbol, and the symbol row in the middle row continues the scroll display. In addition, the pseudo stop is an effect of swinging the effect symbol on the spot with almost no movement, and in the following description, the main stop (sometimes referred to simply as "stop display") in which the effect symbol is completely stopped. ), It may be called a pseudo stop.

When the same effect symbol as the left symbol and the right symbol is pseudo-stopped on the effective line, the reach is established, and the reach effect is performed to expect the player to have three identical effect symbols. In this reach effect, the effect symbols (middle symbols) constituting the middle row symbol row are scrolled at a low speed so that the player can identify them in a state where the reach symbols (left symbol and right symbol) are pseudo-stopped, and finally. , A medium symbol common to the reach symbol, or a medium symbol different from the reach symbol is stopped on the effective line to notify the winner.

Although detailed description is omitted, other display objects such as characters and items are used for such a reach effect in addition to the effect symbol. Further, in the following description, in the variable effect in which the reach effect is performed, the effect performed until the reach is established may be referred to as "pre-reach effect".

The types of reach effects will be described in detail later, but when the determination result of the first special symbol determination is "loss", three effect symbols indicating reach loss eyes (for example, "323") are pseudo-stopped in order to notify the loss. Then, as the lost symbol is stopped and displayed as the first special symbol, these three effect symbols are stopped. On the other hand, when the reach effect is not performed, the three effect symbols indicating the disjointed eyes (for example, "629") are pseudo-stopped in order to notify the loss, and the loss symbol is stopped and displayed as the first special symbol. Along with this, these three production symbols are finally stopped. In this way, when it is determined that the jackpot game is not executed, the three effect symbols are pseudo-stopped at the reach loss eye or the loose eye indicating the loss, and then the main stop is performed to notify the loss (the jackpot game is not executed). Loss notification effect is executed.

When this loss notification effect is executed, the jackpot game is not executed, and if the right to determine the first special symbol is reserved, the first special symbol and the effect symbol are used for a predetermined fixed time (for example, 0.5 seconds). Is stopped and displayed, the first special symbol is determined, and the next variation display of the first special symbol is started.

On the other hand, when the determination result of the first special symbol determination is "big hit", the reach effect is usually executed during the variable display of the first special symbol, and doublets (for example, "333") are shown to notify the jackpot. As the three effect symbols are pseudo-stopped and the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed as the first special symbol, these three effect symbols are finally stopped. In this way, when it is determined that the jackpot game is to be executed, the hit notification effect for notifying the jackpot (the jackpot game is executed) is performed by pseudo-stopping the three effect symbols in a manner indicating the jackpot and then stopping the game. Will be executed. When this hit notification effect is executed, the jackpot game is executed.

[Screen configuration of display screen 70]
FIG. 2 illustrates the screen configuration of the display screen 70 in the normal gaming state. When the game is controlled in the normal game state, the hold icon display area 71, the icon display area 72, and the effect symbol display area 73 are formed on the display screen 70, as illustrated in FIG. As described above, the effect symbol display area 73 displays the left symbol constituting the symbol row in the left column, the middle symbol constituting the symbol row in the middle row, and the right symbol constituting the symbol row in the right column. Display area.

<Hold icon display area 71>
The hold icon display area 71 is a display area in which a hold icon indicating that the first special symbol determination is held is displayed. In the game machine 1, when the game ball wins a prize in the first starting port 21 in a situation where the special symbol determination and the variable display of the special symbol cannot be started immediately, such as during the variable display of the special symbol or the big hit game, the first special The right to judge the symbol is reserved up to a predetermined number (4 in this embodiment).

In this way, when the right of the first special symbol determination is reserved, the same number of hold icons as the number of hold icons for the first special symbol determination indicated by the first special symbol hold indicator 44 are displayed in the hold icon display area 71. Will be done. FIG. 2 illustrates a state in which two hold icons are displayed in the hold icon display area 71 in order to suggest that the number of holds for the first special symbol determination is “2”.

If the hold icon is displayed in the hold icon display area 71 when a highly reliable reach effect such as SPSP reach, which will be described later, is being performed, not only the display area used for the reach effect is limited, but also the hold icon is held. The display of the icon may reduce the interest of the reach production. Therefore, in the game machine 1 of the present embodiment, the display objects (the pedestal of the hold icon) and the hold icon constituting the hold icon display area 71 are displayed during the normal reach and the SP reach, while the normal reach and the SP are displayed. As the reach effect develops from reach to SPSP reach, the display objects and hold icons that make up the hold icon display area 71 are deleted from the display screen 70, and after the SPSP reach is completed, the hold icon display area 71 is configured. A configuration is adopted in which the display object to be displayed and the hold icon are displayed again.

Further, when the game is controlled in the normal game state, basically, the game ball does not win a prize in the second starting port 22. Therefore, in the normal game state, basically, the right of the second special symbol determination is not reserved, and the hold icon related to the second special symbol determination is displayed on the display screen 70, or this hold icon is displayed. A display area for display is not formed.

<The icon display area 72>
The icon display area 72 is a display area for displaying the icon as a variation suggestion image suggesting that the first special symbol is variablely displayed. The icon is displayed in the icon display area 72 with the start of the variable display of the first special symbol. For example, at the timing when the first special symbol is stopped and displayed (the timing when the fluctuating effect symbol is stopped). It is erased from the icon display area 72. However, the erasure timing of the icon is not limited to this, and the icon may be erased during the variable display of the first special symbol. You may want to erase the icon.

By the way, when the game ball wins the first starting port 21 in a state where the variable display of the special symbol is not performed and the right of the special symbol determination is not reserved, the variable display of the first special symbol is started. As a result, the icon is displayed in the icon display area 72. On the other hand, when the hold icon is displayed in the hold icon display area 71 and the variation display of the symbol corresponding to the icon displayed in the icon display area 72 is completed, the hold icon is displayed in the hold icon display area 71. The first special symbol determination corresponding to the earliest hold icon (hold icon displayed at the position closest to the icon display area 72) is executed. Then, as the variable display of the first special symbol is started in response to the execution of the first special symbol determination, the earliest hold icon shifts from the hold icon display area 71 to the icon display area 72. It will be displayed as a new icon. In this way, the hold icon (here, the icon) shifted to the icon display area 72 is displayed larger than when it is displayed in the hold icon display area 71 (see FIG. 2). Therefore, it is possible to make the player pay more attention to the icon displayed in the icon display area 72 than to the hold icon displayed in the hold icon display area 71.

When another hold icon different from the earliest hold icon is displayed in the hold icon display area 71, the hold icon display area 71 is accompanied by the shift of the earliest hold icon to the icon display area 72. In, the other hold icon shifts toward the icon display area 72. As is clear from the above description, in the gaming machine 1, the icon corresponding to the hold icon displayed in the hold icon display area 71 may be displayed in the icon display area 72, and thus the following description will be given. Then, when the hold icon and the icon are not distinguished, they may be collectively referred to as "icon".

(About icon change production)
By the way, the hold icon is usually displayed as a white hold icon (default hold icon: white icon) (see FIG. 21 (A)). On the other hand, when the hold icon is displayed in the hold icon display area 71, an icon change effect may be performed in which the display mode of the hold icon changes. In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the display color of the hold icon may change or the display color and shape of the hold icon may change depending on the icon change effect. When this icon change effect is performed, the white hold icon changes to a hold icon in a color suggesting jackpot reliability such as blue, green, red, and rainbow. The colors suggesting the jackpot reliability illustrated here are arranged in order from the one with the lowest jackpot reliability to the one with the highest jackpot reliability. The rainbow color is selected only when the determination result of the reserved first special symbol determination is "big hit", and is not selected when the determination result is "missing". Red is when the judgment result of the first special symbol judgment corresponding to the red hold icon is "big hit" or when the fluctuation time of the special symbol is set to a relatively long time although it is "missing". (As a reach effect, it is easy to be selected when it develops into a reach effect with a relatively high jackpot reliability such as SP reach or SPSP reach). Green is easy to select when it is a "big hit" or when it is a "miss" but the fluctuation time of the special symbol is set to a medium time. Blue is easy to be selected when it becomes "missing" or when it is "missing" and the fluctuation time of the special symbol is set to a relatively short time, and it is difficult to select it when it becomes "big hit". In this embodiment, the jackpot reliability of the blue hold icon is set to about 3%, the jackpot reliability of the green hold icon is set to about 15%, and the jackpot reliability of the red hold icon is set to about 45%. It is set and the jackpot reliability of the rainbow-colored hold icon is set to 100%.

Although the case where the icon change effect in which the display color changes only once is performed when the hold icon is displayed in the hold icon display area 71 has been described here as an example, the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment has been described. Then, other icon change effects may be performed. That is, for example, when a white hold icon is displayed in the hold icon display area 71, it changes to a blue hold icon and then to a green hold icon. In some cases, an icon change effect is performed in which the display color of the hold icon changes a plurality of times. Further, when the white hold icon shifted from the hold icon display area 71 to the icon display area 72 is displayed as the icon, an icon change effect in which the display color changes may be performed.

Further, the display color of the hold icon displayed in the hold icon display area 71 changes, and then the display color changes when the hold icon shifts to the icon display area 72 and is displayed as the icon. In some cases, an icon change effect is performed in which the display color of the icon changes in both the hold icon display area 71 and the icon display area 72. In addition, there may be an icon change effect in which the hold icon is displayed in a display color other than white (for example, blue) from the beginning, or an icon change effect in which the display color of the hold icon whose initial color is other than white is changed. .. Further, for example, when the game ball wins the first starting port 21 in a state where the right to determine the first special symbol is not reserved and the first special symbol is not displayed in a variable manner, it is white at the winning timing. An icon change effect in which the icon having a display color other than (for example, green) is displayed, or an icon change effect in which the display color of the icon changes to another display color (for example, red) may be performed.

As described above, the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment can display the hold information indicating that the right to determine the special symbol is held on the display screen 70, and change the display mode of the hold information. .. In the following description, a hold icon or the icon whose display color is a color other than white may be referred to as a "special icon" to distinguish it from a normal hold icon or the icon whose display color is white.

[Modification example of display control of pending information]
The display control of the reserved information is not limited to the one illustrated in this embodiment, and may be as follows. That is, in the present embodiment, for convenience of explanation, the case where the display colors of the icons (holding icon and the icon) are five colors of white, blue, green, red, and rainbow color will be described as an example, but other embodiments will be described. In the form, a gold color suggesting that the jackpot reliability is higher than red but the jackpot reliability is lower than the rainbow color may be prepared.

Further, in the present embodiment, in addition to the icon change effect targeting the hold icon displayed in the hold icon display area 71, the icon change effect targeting the icon displayed in the icon display area 72 can be executed. However, in another embodiment, a configuration in which only the former icon change effect can be executed may be adopted without providing the icon display area 72 (without displaying the icon).

Further, in the present embodiment, a case where a hold icon as hold information is displayed on the display screen 70 and the display color of the hold icon is changed will be described as an example. On the other hand, in another embodiment, for example, four color LEDs whose emission colors can be changed are provided, and the same number of LEDs as the number of pending numbers of the first special symbol determination are turned on, and the emission color of any of the LEDs is set. By changing it, the display mode of the reserved information may be changed.

[Flow of production accompanying the variable display of the first special symbol]
FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the flow of the reach effect. When the first special symbol determination is executed, the first special symbol is displayed in a variable manner, and then the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a manner showing the determination result of the first special symbol determination. On the other hand, on the display screen 70, as the variable display of the first special symbol is started, the scroll display of the three symbol strings in the effect symbol display area 73 is started (see FIG. 9A). ..

Here, when the determination result of the first special symbol determination is "missing", for example, different effect symbols as the left symbol and the right symbol are pseudo-stopped on the effective line, and the symbol rows in the middle row in this non-reach mode. A non-reach effect (see FIG. 9B) that scrolls only the display may be performed. When this non-reach effect is performed, the three effect symbols showing the disparity are pseudo-stopped at the end of the variable display of the first special symbol, and these are stopped and displayed as the first special symbol is lost. A loss notification effect (see FIG. 9C) that actually stops the three effect symbols will be performed.

On the other hand, when the judgment result of the first special symbol determination is "big hit", or when it is decided to perform the effect with reach even though it is "missing", for example, during the variable display of the first special symbol, for example, Pre-reach effect in which a predetermined left symbol is pseudo-stopped on the effective line of the effect symbol display area 73, and then the right symbol, which is the same effect symbol as the left symbol, is moved onto the effective line (see FIG. 9 (D)). Is done. Then, when the same left symbol and right symbol are pseudo-stopped on the effective line, reach is established (see FIG. 9E). Then, when the reach is established in this way, a predetermined reach that makes the player expect that the middle symbol, which is the same effect symbol as the reach symbol (left symbol and right symbol), stops on the effective line and becomes the same symbol. The production is done.

In the present embodiment, three types of reach effects, normal reach, SP reach, and SPSP reach, are prepared as reach effects that can be executed in association with the variable display of the first special symbol (see FIG. 9).

The normal reach (see FIG. 9F) is a reach effect in which the jackpot reliability is relatively low (for example, the jackpot reliability: about 2%). When the reach is established, the normal reach is performed first, and during the normal reach, the scroll speed of the middle row symbol row, which was displayed by scrolling at high speed between the two reach symbols (left symbol and right symbol), gradually decreases. go.

Here, the determination result of the first special symbol determination is "missing", and for example, the variation pattern E (see FIG. 10B) in which the variation time is 30 seconds at the start of the variation display of the first special symbol is selected. If it is, the effect symbols of the reach loss eyes (for example, "434") are displayed by pseudo-stopping the middle symbols different from the reach symbols on the effective line, and the loss notification effect (figure) that stops these effect symbols. 9 (G)) is performed.

On the other hand, the determination result of the first special symbol determination is "big hit", and for example, the variation pattern A (see FIG. 10 (A)) in which the variation time is 30 seconds at the start of the variation display of the first special symbol is selected. If so, the same medium symbol as the reach symbol is pseudo-stopped on the effective line to display doublet (for example, "444") effect symbols, and the hit notification effect (FIG. 9 (FIG. 9) G)) is performed.

In addition, when a fluctuation pattern with a relatively long fluctuation time of the first special symbol is selected, the medium symbol, which is the same effect symbol as the reach symbol, is effective without performing the hit notification effect or the loss notification effect in the normal reach. After passing on the line, the scroll speed of the symbol row in the middle row increases to develop into SP reach (see FIG. 9 (H)) or SPSP reach (see FIG. 9 (I)).

Although not shown in the figure, when developing into a highly reliable reach effect such as SP reach or SPSP reach, the left symbol that has been pseudo-stopped moves to the upper left position on the display screen 70 while shrinking. At the same time, the right symbol that had been pseudo-stopped moved to the upper right position on the display screen 70 while shrinking, and these left and right symbols were pseudo-stopped at the position after the movement, and the symbol row in the middle row , It will be hidden until the end of the high-reliability reach effect (see, for example, FIGS. 12A to 12E). Then, the display object and the hold icon forming the hold icon display area 71 are also hidden. As a result, it is possible to perform a highly reliable reach effect in a display area wider than the effect symbol display area 73, and it is possible to improve the interest of the highly reliable reach effect.

SP reach and SPSP reach are configured as, for example, a battle production in which your character fights against an enemy character, SP reach is positioned as the first half of the battle, SPSP reach is positioned as the second half of the battle, and the first half of the battle and the second half of the battle. Then, the enemy characters that fight are common. That is, for example, if a battle production that fights against enemy character A is performed in the SP reach in the first half of the battle and then develops into SPSP reach in the latter half of the battle, a battle production that fights against enemy character A is also performed in SPSP reach. ..

When comparing these SP reach and SPSP reach, SPSP reach has higher jackpot reliability than SP reach, and it is better to develop to SPSP reach than to develop only to SP reach. There is a feature that the notification effect is easy to be executed.

In the game machine 1, the normal reach (see FIG. 9 (F)) evolves into the SP reach in the first half of the battle (see FIG. 9 (H)), and this SP reach is used to produce a hit notification or lose in FIG. 7 (G). Notification effects may be performed. In addition, there are cases where the normal reach develops into the SPSP reach via the SP reach (see FIG. 7 (I)), and there are cases where the normal reach develops directly into the SPSP reach without passing through the SP reach. In this case, the hit notification effect or the loss notification effect shown in FIG. 9 (G) will be performed in this SPSP reach.

The type of reach effect and the method of developing the reach effect illustrated in FIG. 9 are merely examples, and the type of reach effect and the method of development may be other.

[Variable pattern selection table used in normal game state]
Next, with reference to FIG. 10, a process of selecting a variation pattern of a special symbol in a normal gaming state will be described. Here, FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a variation pattern selection table used in a process of selecting a variation pattern of a special symbol in a normal gaming state.

The main ROM 82 has a jackpot variation pattern selection table (see FIG. 10A) as a variation pattern selection table to be referred to when selecting a variation pattern of a special symbol (here, the first special symbol) in a normal gaming state. ), The variation pattern selection table for reach loss (see FIG. 10B), and the variation pattern selection table for loss without reach (see FIG. 10C) are stored. The jackpot variation pattern selection table is a table that is referred to for selecting the variation pattern of the first special symbol when the determination result of the first special symbol determination in the normal game state is "big hit". The variation pattern selection table for reach loss is the first special symbol when the determination result of the first special symbol determination in the normal game state is "miss" and it is determined to perform the effect with reach (based on the reach random number). It is a table referred to for selecting the fluctuation pattern of. The variable pattern selection table for loss without reach is the first when the judgment result of the first special symbol determination in the normal gaming state is "loss" and it is determined to perform the effect without reach (based on the reach random number). It is a table referred to for selecting a variation pattern of a special symbol.

(Variable pattern selection table for jackpot)
In the jackpot variation pattern selection table (see FIG. 10A), the variation pattern of the first special symbol is associated with the random number value to be compared with the variation pattern random number. In FIG. 10, for convenience of explanation, in addition to the fluctuation pattern and the number of random numbers associated with each fluctuation pattern, the fluctuation time of the first special symbol and each fluctuation pattern are selected by the sub CPU 91. The type of the variation effect pattern, the specific effect content of the variation effect pattern, the range in which the variation pattern random number can be taken, and the ratio at which each variation pattern is selected are also described.

When the main CPU 81 determines to execute the jackpot game based on the jackpot random number acquired in response to the winning of the game ball in the first starting port 21 in the normal game state, the variation acquired together with the jackpot random number. The variation pattern of the first special symbol is selected by reading the variation pattern to which the same random number value as the pattern random number is associated from the jackpot variation pattern selection table (see FIG. 10A).

As illustrated in FIGS. 10A and 10B, the range in which the variation pattern random number for selecting the variation pattern of the first special symbol can be taken is set to "0" to "99" in the present embodiment. It is set. In the jackpot variation pattern selection table, as illustrated in FIG. 10A, two random numbers are associated with the variation pattern A, and 18 random values are associated with the variation pattern B. 35 random values are associated with the variation pattern C, and 45 random values are associated with the variation pattern D.

Therefore, when the determination result of the first special symbol determination is "big hit", the fluctuation pattern A is selected at a rate of 2% (= 2/100 × 100), and 18% (= 18/100 × 100). The variation pattern B is selected at a rate, the variation pattern C is selected at a rate of 35% (= 35/100 × 100), and the variation pattern D is selected at a rate of 45% (= 45/100 × 100). Then, for example, when the variation pattern A is selected, the variation effect pattern A is selected by the sub CPU 91, and the variation effect for performing the hit notification effect in the normal reach is performed. Further, for example, when the variation pattern D is selected, the variation effect pattern D is selected by the sub CPU 91, and the variation effect for performing the hit notification effect is performed by the SPSP reach developed from the normal reach via the SP reach. become.

(Variable pattern selection table for reach loss)
When the main CPU 81 determines in the first special symbol determination that the jackpot game is not executed, whether or not to perform the effect with reach based on the reach random number acquired together with the jackpot random number, the symbol random number, and the fluctuation pattern random number. To determine. Specifically, which variation pattern is selected from the variation pattern group in which the reach effect is performed (see FIG. 10B), or the variation in which the reach effect is not performed (the reachless effect is performed). It is determined whether to select one of the fluctuation patterns from the pattern group (see FIG. 10C). Here, when it is decided to perform the effect with reach, the variation pattern of the first special symbol is selected with reference to the variation pattern selection table for reach loss.

In the variation pattern selection table for reach loss (see FIG. 10B), the variation pattern of the first special symbol is associated with the random number value to be compared with the variation pattern random number. In the normal game state, the main CPU 81 determines that the jackpot game is not executed based on the jackpot random number acquired in response to the winning of the game ball in the first starting port 21, and the reach random number acquired together with the jackpot random number. When it is decided to perform the effect with reach based on the above, the variation pattern to which the same random number value as the variation pattern random number acquired together with these random numbers is associated is the variation pattern selection table for reach loss (see FIG. 10B). ) To select the variation pattern of the first special symbol.

In the variation pattern selection table for reach loss, as illustrated in FIG. 10B, 40 random values are associated with the variation pattern E, and 30 random values are associated with the variation pattern F. 20 random values are associated with the variation pattern G, and 10 random values are associated with the variation pattern H.

Therefore, when the judgment result of the first special symbol judgment is "missing" and it is decided to perform the effect with reach, the fluctuation pattern E is selected at a rate of 40% (= 40/100 x 100), and 30 The variation pattern F is selected at a rate of% (= 30/100 × 100), the variation pattern G is selected at a rate of 20% (= 20/100 × 100), and 10% (= 10/100 × 100). The variation pattern H is selected in proportion. Then, for example, when the variation pattern F is selected, the variation effect pattern F is selected by the sub CPU 91, and the variation effect for performing the loss notification effect is performed by the SP reach developed from the normal reach. Further, for example, when the variation pattern H is selected, the variation effect pattern H is selected by the sub CPU 91, and the variation effect for performing the loss notification effect is performed by the SPSP reach developed from the normal reach via the SP reach. become.

(Variable pattern selection table for loss without reach)
When the main CPU 81 determines that the jackpot game is not executed based on the jackpot random number and decides to perform the no-reach effect based on the reach random number acquired together with the jackpot random number, the variable pattern selection table for the no-reach loss is displayed. Refer to it and select the variation pattern of the first special symbol.

In the variation pattern selection table for loss without reach (see FIG. 10C), the variation pattern of the special symbol and the number of pending first special symbol determinations when the variation display of the first special symbol is started this time are displayed. It is associated.

When the number of pending first special symbol determinations becomes "0" or "1" with the start of the variation display of the first special symbol, the main CPU 81 has a variation time of the first special symbol of 13 seconds. A certain fluctuation pattern J is selected, and when the number of pending first special symbol determinations is "2", the fluctuation pattern K in which the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is 8 seconds is selected. Further, the main CPU 81 determines the first special symbol with the start of the variation display of the first special symbol this time, because the number of pending first special symbol determinations becomes "4", which is the upper limit during the variation display of the first special symbol. When the number of holdings is "3", the fluctuation pattern L in which the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is 4 seconds is selected.

As described above, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, when it is determined not to execute the jackpot game and it is determined to perform the non-reach effect, it is the number of reserved rights for the first special symbol determination. If the number of holdings is relatively large, the holding time of the first special symbol having a relatively short fluctuation time can be newly accumulated so that the holding of the first special symbol determination can be newly accumulated according to the new winning of the game ball for the first starting port 21. The variation pattern is selected. On the other hand, if the number of reserved symbols is relatively small, the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol having a relatively long fluctuation time is suppressed in order to prevent the first special symbol and the effect symbol from fluctuating and the progress of the game from stopping. Is selected.

The following can be said from the description of the two fluctuation pattern selection tables illustrated in FIGS. 10A and 10B. That is, when the determination result of the first special symbol determination is "big hit", it tends to be easy to select a fluctuation pattern with a long fluctuation time, and conversely, it is difficult to select a fluctuation pattern with a short fluctuation time (FIG. 10). See (A)). Further, when the judgment result of the first special symbol determination is "missing" and the reach effect is performed, it is difficult to select the fluctuation pattern having a long fluctuation time, and conversely, it is easy to select the fluctuation pattern having a short fluctuation time. There is a tendency (see FIG. 10 (B)).

From these facts, it can be said that the longer the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is, the easier it is to execute the hit notification effect, and conversely, the shorter the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is, the easier it is to execute the loss notification effect. In other words, when the reach effect is performed over a relatively long time, such as developing from the normal reach to the SPSP reach via the SP reach, the hit notification effect is likely to be executed, and the reach is such that only the normal reach is performed. When the time required for the production is relatively short, it can be said that the loss notification effect is likely to be executed. That is, the winning is not notified by the normal reach production, but it develops from the normal reach to the SP reach or the SPSP reach, or from the normal reach via the SP reach (or directly without the SP reach). It can be said that the jackpot reliability is higher when it develops into.

[Preliminary judgment processing]
In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the right of the first special symbol determination is reserved, whether or not to execute the jackpot game before the first special symbol determination is performed for the right. Judgment Pre-judgment processing may be performed. Specifically, the main CPU 81 acquires a jackpot random number according to the winning of the game ball in the first starting port 21, and based on the acquired jackpot random number, the first is performed at the start of the variable display of the first special symbol. 1 Whether or not a jackpot determination process in the special symbol determination is performed prior to the jackpot determination process (see step S308 in FIG. 42), and when the first special symbol determination is executed, a “big hit” is determined. Is determined in advance. Further, based on the fluctuation pattern random number acquired together with the jackpot random number, the same processing as the above-mentioned fluctuation pattern selection process (see step S309 in FIG. 42) is performed based on FIGS. 10 (A) and 10 (B). 1 It is determined in advance which fluctuation pattern will be selected when the special symbol determination is executed.

In this way, when the main CPU 81 performs the pre-determination process in response to the suspension of the right to determine the first special symbol, the main CPU 81 sends a hold command including the pre-determination information indicating the pre-determination result to the sub-control board 90. Send. On the other hand, the sub CPU 91 determines whether or not to execute the above-mentioned icon change effect based on the prior determination information included in the hold command. Then, when it is decided to execute the icon change effect, it is determined in what change pattern the display mode (the color of the icon in the present embodiment) of the icon (holding icon or the icon) is changed, and the decision result is obtained. The image / sound control board 100 is made to execute the icon change effect based on the above.

[About production mode]
If the game ball wins the first starting port 21 while the game is controlled in the normal game state, the first special symbol determination is executed. When this first special symbol determination is executed, the first special symbol display 41 displays the first special symbol in a variable manner, and then the first special symbol indicating the determination result of the first special symbol determination is stopped and displayed. NS. On the other hand, on the display screen 70, a variable effect of varyingly displaying the effect symbol is executed according to the variable display of the first special symbol, and the determination result of the first special symbol determination is performed with the stop display of the first special symbol. The effect symbol is stopped and displayed in a manner of notifying. Although not shown in the figure, the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment has three types of effect modes when the variable effect is performed in this normal game state: a normal mode, a chance mode, and an intense heat mode. Has been done.

When these three effect modes are compared, the composition of the effect symbol, the variation mode of the effect symbol, the background image displayed on the display screen 70 during the variation effect, the effect sound output from the speaker 38 during the variation effect, and the variation effect. There is a feature that the type of the advance notice effect executed in the process, the light emission pattern of the frame lamp 37 and the board lamp 5 during the variable effect, and the like may be different from each other. In addition, the chance mode is a production mode that suggests that the jackpot reliability is higher than the normal mode, and the intense heat mode is a production mode that suggests that the jackpot reliability is higher than the chance mode. In addition, the jackpot reliability differs depending on the production mode.

In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, it varies even when the jackpot reliability is relatively high, that is, when the judgment result of the first special symbol determination in the normal gaming state is "big hit" or even if it is "missing". When the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol with a relatively long time is selected, the production mode shifts from the normal mode to the chance mode and the fluctuation production is performed in the chance mode, or the production mode is heated from the normal mode. It is possible to shift to a mode and perform a variable effect in the intense heat mode, or to shift the effect mode from the normal mode to the intense heat mode via the chance mode and perform a variable effect in the intense heat mode. be.

Further, when the right of the first special symbol determination is reserved, the above-mentioned pre-determination process (see FIG. 41) may be executed by the main CPU 81. When this pre-judgment process is executed, based on the pre-judgment result, "look-ahead" which is a variable display of the first special symbol (and the effect symbol) corresponding to the first special symbol determination that is the target of the pre-judgment process. Before the "target fluctuation" starts, the production mode shifts from the normal mode to the chance mode, shifts from the normal mode to the intense heat mode, or shifts from the normal mode to the intense heat mode via the chance mode. I sometimes do it. In addition, the effect mode may shift from the normal mode to the chance mode before the look-ahead target change starts, and the effect mode may shift from the chance mode to the intense heat mode after the look-ahead target change starts.

The normal mode includes a first normal mode, a second normal mode, and a third normal mode, and when these normal modes are compared, the composition of the effect symbol, the variation mode of the effect symbol, and the variation effect The background image displayed on the display screen 70, the effect sound output from the speaker 38 during the variation effect, the type of advance notice effect executed during the variation effect, and the light emission of the frame lamp 37 and the board lamp 5 during the variation effect. Although the patterns and the like are different from each other, there is no difference in the jackpot reliability.

[Specific example of production in the first normal mode in the normal game state]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 11 and 12, a specific example of the effect in the first normal mode in the normal game state will be described. FIGS. 11 and 12 are screen views illustrating the production in the first normal mode in the normal game state, and here, as a variation pattern of the first special symbol in the normal game state, a hit notification in the SPSP reach developed from the normal reach The effect executed when the variation pattern C (see FIG. 10A) on which the effect will be performed is selected will be described. Further, here, as a notice effect for notifying that the jackpot symbol may be executed during the variable display of the first special symbol in the normal gaming state, the first notice, the second notice, the third notice, and A case where four types of notice effects of the fourth notice are executed will be described as an example.

In the first normal mode, the effect symbols composed of numbers to which the character image is not added are displayed on the display screen 70, and each effect symbol scrolls downward. Further, during the variation effect in the first normal mode, the background image dedicated to the first normal mode is displayed on the display screen 70, and the BGM dedicated to the first normal mode is output from the speaker 38.

In FIG. 11A, on the display screen 70, one hold icon (for example, a red hold icon) is displayed in the hold icon display area 71, and the icon displayed in the icon display area 72 is displayed. In order to notify that the judgment result of the corresponding first special symbol determination is "missing", as the lost symbol is stopped and displayed as the first special symbol, the effect symbol showing the disparity of "526" is displayed. The state in which the stop is displayed is illustrated. In this way, when a predetermined fixed time (0.5 seconds in the present embodiment) elapses after the lost symbol is stopped and displayed as the first special symbol, the earliest hold displayed in the hold icon display area 71 is held. The first special symbol determination corresponding to the icon (here, the red hold icon) is executed. Then, when the determination result of the first special symbol determination is "big hit" and the variation pattern C is selected as the variation pattern of the first special symbol, the following effect is performed.

That is, as the variable display of the first special symbol is started in response to the execution of the first special symbol determination corresponding to the earliest hold icon, the earliest displayed in the hold icon display area 71. The hold icon of is shifted to the icon display area 72, and the scroll display of the three symbol columns is started (see FIGS. 11A and 11B). The first notice may be executed when a predetermined time elapses after the scroll display of the three symbol columns is started (see FIG. 11C). For example, as the first notice, the display mode of the effect image (first notice effect image) related to the step-up notice displayed in the central area of the display screen 70 is changed stepwise, and the effect sound related to the step-up notice is produced. The step-up notice output from the speaker 38 is executed.

Following the above-mentioned first notice, a pseudo continuous effect may be executed. Here, the pseudo continuous effect means that the effect symbol displayed in the effect symbol display area 73 is varied and displayed a plurality of times during the variable display of one special symbol (here, the first special symbol). It is a pretending production. Regarding this pseudo continuous effect, the following effect display is performed.

That is, the scroll speed of the symbol row in the left column is reduced and the left symbol (for example, 6 symbols) is pseudo-stopped, and then the scroll speed of the symbol row in the right column is reduced (the left symbol that is pseudo-stopped earlier). The right symbol (for example, 4 symbols) is pseudo-stopped, and then the scroll speed of the symbol row in the middle row is reduced, and 7 symbols are pseudo-stopped as the middle symbol that notifies the execution of the pseudo-continuous effect (FIG. 11). (D)).

In this way, when seven symbols are pseudo-stopped in the middle row after the effect symbols that are different from each other as the left symbol and the right symbol are pseudo-stopped, the pseudo-second variation effect following the pseudo-first variation effect is started. .. Specifically, after the character "x2" suggesting the start of the pseudo-second variation effect is displayed large in the central area of the display screen 70, the character "x2" is displayed on the upper left of the display screen 70. It is displayed smaller in one area, and accordingly, the scroll display of the three symbol strings is restarted in the effect symbol display area 73 (see FIGS. 11D and 11E).

When this pseudo-second variation effect is being performed, for example, a dialogue notice is executed as the second notice. Specifically, as illustrated in FIG. 11 (F), an effect image (second notice effect image) showing how a predetermined character emits a line is displayed in the central area of the display screen 70, and the line is displayed. The effect sound (for example, the voice of the character) related to the advance notice is output from the speaker 38.

As described above, when the dialogue notice is executed as the second notice during the change effect of the pseudo second series, the second pseudo continuous effect is executed during the change display of the first special symbol this time (FIG. 11). (G)). Specifically, as illustrated in FIG. 11 (G), the scroll speed of the symbol row in the left column is reduced, the left symbol (for example, two symbols) is pseudo-stopped, and then the symbol row in the right column is displayed. The scroll speed is reduced and the right symbol (for example, 5 symbols) is pseudo-stopped, and then the scroll speed of the symbol row in the middle row is reduced and 7 symbols are pseudo-stopped as the middle symbol.

When the second pseudo-continuous effect is executed during the variation display of the first special symbol, the pseudo-third consecutive variation effect following the pseudo-second variation effect is started. Specifically, after the character "x3" suggesting the start of the pseudo-third series of variation effects is displayed large in the central area of the display screen 70, the character "x3" is displayed on the upper left of the display screen 70. It is displayed smaller in one area, and accordingly, the scroll display of the three symbol strings is restarted in the effect symbol display area 73 (see FIGS. 11 (G) and 11 (H)).

Then, when a predetermined time elapses after the pseudo-third consecutive variation effect is started in this way, the scroll speed of the symbol row in the left column decreases, the left symbol (for example, three symbols) is pseudo-stopped, and then. , The scroll speed of the symbol row in the right column decreases (same as the symbol on the left), the right symbol (here, 3 symbols) is pseudo-stopped, and reach is established (see FIG. 11 (I)).

In this case, the case where the "pre-reach pseudo-ream" that restarts the scroll display of each symbol string (pseudo-stopped) is executed before the reach is established has been described as an example, but after the reach is established (pseudo-stopped). In some cases, "pseudo-reach after reach" is executed to restart the scroll display of each symbol string. In addition, the pseudo-continuous production may be executed both before the reach is established and after the reach is established.

As described above, when the same effect symbols as the left symbol and the right symbol are pseudo-stopped and the reach is established, the normal reach is executed (see FIG. 12A). Specifically, after the reach is established, the scroll speed of the middle row symbol row gradually decreases, and the same middle symbol (here, the middle 3 symbols) as the reach symbol (here, the left 3 symbols and the right 3 symbols) reaches. An effect display is performed to show how the effective line is approached as defined by the symbol.

Here, when developing from normal reach to SPSP reach, the following effect display is performed. That is, when the scroll display of the symbol row in the middle row is performed, the same middle symbol (3 symbols in this case) as the reach symbol passes on the effective line, and the scroll speed of the symbol row in the middle row is accompanied by this. Will rise, making it difficult to identify the middle symbol, and a development effect will be performed that suggests that it will develop into SPSP reach (see FIG. 12 (B)). Specifically, as illustrated in FIG. 12B, in the process of moving to the area toward the upper left of the display screen 70 while the three symbols on the left are reduced, one rotation is made clockwise with the scroll direction as the axial direction. After that, it moves to the upper left area, and at the same time, in the process of moving to the upper right area of the display screen 70 while the three symbols on the right are reduced, it makes one rotation clockwise with the scroll direction as the axial direction, and then the upper right. Move to one area. After that, until the end of the variation display of the first special symbol this time, the left three symbols are pseudo-stop displayed in the upper left area, and the right three symbols are pseudo-stop displayed in the upper right area (FIGS. 12 (C) to 12 (C) to (H)).

Next, when the development effect (see FIG. 12 (B)) suggesting the development to SPSP reach is performed as described above, the player announces that the above-mentioned third notice (see FIG. 12 (A)) occurs. (See FIG. 12 (C)). Specifically, as illustrated in FIG. 12C, a reach pattern (here) is used for a black background image until a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) elapses after the development effect is performed. Then, the left 3 symbols and the right symbol) and only the icon are superimposed and displayed, and the other effect symbols are hidden.

Following this darkening effect, for example, a group notice may be given as a third notice (see FIG. 12 (D)). Specifically, as illustrated in FIG. 12D, an effect display showing how a large number of characters move from right to left on the display screen 70 is performed.

It should be noted that such a third notice is not always executed when the darkening effect is performed, and the SPSP reach is started after the third notice is executed following the darkening effect, and the darkening effect is followed. The SPSP reach may be started without executing the third notice.

In this way, when the SPSP reach is started, the SPSP reach effect image, which is an effect image related to the SPSP reach, is displayed on the display screen 70 (see FIG. 12E). As a result, for example, an effect display showing how the own character and the enemy character develop an offense and defense is performed. Then, when the end of the SPSP reach is approached, a first effect button operation promotion effect is performed that prompts the player to operate the first effect button 35 (see FIG. 12 (F)). Specifically, a first effect button image imitating the first effect button 35 and an effective period gauge indicating the remaining time of the effective period in which the operation of the first effect button 35 is effective are displayed.

In this first effect button operation promotion effect, the fourth notice is given at the timing when the first effect button 35 is operated during the valid period or at the timing when the valid period ends without operating the first effect button 35. For example, a cut-in is performed in which a predetermined cut-in image is superimposed and displayed on the effect image (other than the reach symbol) displayed on the display screen 70 (see FIG. 12 (G)). This cut-in is an effect that suggests the reliability of the jackpot, and when a green cut-in that includes one character and superimposes a cut-in image expressed using green is performed. And, when a red cut-in is performed in which a cut-in image that includes two characters and is expressed using red is superimposed and displayed, and a cut-in image that includes three characters and is expressed using gold is displayed. There are cases where gold cut-ins are superimposed and displayed, and when these cut-ins are arranged in order from the one with the lowest jackpot reliability to the one with the highest jackpot reliability, the order is green cut-in, red cut-in, and gold cut-in. Note that FIG. 12 (G) illustrates how gold cut-in is performed.

When the cut-in is generated in this way and the end of the SPSP reach is reached, the second effect button operation promotion effect for urging the player to operate the second effect button 36 is performed (see FIG. 12 (H)). Specifically, as illustrated in FIG. 12H, during the valid period of the second effect button operation promotion effect, the second effect button image imitating the second effect button 36 and "press!" A character indicating the operation content of the second effect button 36 and a valid period gauge indicating the remaining time of the valid period are displayed.

When the second effect button 36 is operated during the valid period of the second effect button operation promotion effect, the three effect symbols indicating doublets are pseudo-stopped and then the main stop is performed as an operation-corresponding effect according to the operation. A hit notification effect is performed (see FIG. 12 (I)).

Here, since the variation pattern C (see FIG. 10A) is selected at the start of the variation display of the first special symbol this time, the hit notification effect is performed as the operation corresponding effect. When the fluctuation pattern G or the fluctuation pattern H exemplified in FIG. 10 (B) is selected as the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol, the three production symbols showing the reach loss eyes are pseudo-stopped as the operation corresponding effect. After letting it stop, a loss notification effect is performed.

[About the production performed during the jackpot game]
As described above, when the determination result of the first special symbol determination in the normal game state is "big hit", any of the big hit symbols X1 to X4 (see FIG. 6B) is stopped and displayed. Along with this, three effect symbols indicating doublets, such as "222", are stopped on the display screen 70. Here, in the game machine 1 of the present embodiment, the doublet of "777" and the doublet of "333" deterministically notify that the game is controlled in the probabilistic game state after the jackpot game is completed. It is considered as an effect symbol, and for a part when 5R probability variation A or 5R probability variation B is selected as the type of jackpot related to the first special symbol determination, these doublets are used as three effect symbols for notifying the probability variation jackpot. One of the eyes will stop on the display screen 70.

In this way, when the three effect symbols indicating the doublets of "777" or "333" that deterministically notify the probability variation jackpot are stopped, the jackpot game including the effective round game is always executed. Therefore, during the effective round game, a launch promotion effect (see FIGS. 13B and 13C) that prompts the player to launch the game ball aiming at the V winning opening 287 is executed, and during the effective round game. When the game ball passes through the V winning opening 287, a V winning notification effect (see FIGS. 13D and 13E) for notifying that the game ball has won a V prize is executed.

On the other hand, when 5R normal A or 5R normal B is selected and when 5R probability variation A or 5R probability variation B is selected as the type of jackpot related to the first special symbol determination, "777" and "333" are used. Any of the seven types of doublets, "111", "222", "444", "555", "666", "888", and "999", excluding doublets, stop on the display screen 70. Will be. When these 7 types of doublets stop, when 5R probability variation A is selected, when 5R probability variation B is selected, and when 5R normal A is selected, as the jackpot type, There are times when 5R probability variation B is selected. Then, in order to make it difficult to understand whether or not this jackpot is a probabilistic jackpot and whether or not an effective round game is executed during the jackpot game, the above launch promotion effect is executed during the jackpot game. However, even if the game ball wins a V prize during the effective round game, the above-mentioned V prize notification effect is not executed.

<When V prize is notified>
FIG. 13 is a screen view showing an example of an effect when a V prize is notified during a jackpot game. Here, a case where 5R probability variation A (see FIG. 7A) in which the 1st round game is an effective round game is selected as the type of jackpot related to the first special symbol determination will be described as an example. As the judgment result of the first special symbol determination in the normal game state becomes "big hit" and the jackpot symbol X1 (see FIG. 6B) indicating the 5R probability variation A is stopped and displayed, for example, "777" is doublet. In some cases, the three production symbols indicating the above may be stopped. In this case, the following effects are performed during the jackpot game of 5R probability variation A.

First, during the opening period of the jackpot game of 5R probability variation A, a predetermined opening effect is executed (see FIG. 13 (A)). Specifically, as illustrated in FIG. 13 (A), the characters "RUSH bonus" notifying the type of the jackpot this time are displayed in the central area of the display screen 70, and the player is hit right. The prompting "right-handed" character and a right-pointing arrow are displayed in the upper right area of the display screen 70.

Then, along with the 1st round game (see FIG. 7 (A)) of the 5R probability variation A (which is an effective round game), the effect during the predetermined round is executed (see FIGS. 13 (B) and 13 (C)). .. Specifically, as illustrated in FIGS. 13 (B) and 13 (C), three arrows pointing to the V winning opening 287 (indicated by the letter "right-handed") and "Aim at V" Along with displaying large characters on the display screen 70, a launch promotion effect is executed in which the voice "Aim for V" is output from the speaker 38. In addition, the three effect symbols of "777", which were stopped before the start of this jackpot game, are displayed in the upper left area of the display screen 70, and the upper right area of the display screen 70 is the current jackpot. The total number of prize balls paid out in response to the winning of the game balls is displayed in the second large winning opening 28 after the game is started.

In this way, in the first round game in which the launch promotion effect is performed to encourage the player to launch the game ball aiming at the V winning opening 287, as described above based on FIG. 7 (A), the second major prize is awarded. The mouth 28 and the V winning mouth 287 are opened for 0.1 seconds and then opened for 10 seconds. Therefore, the player can easily win the game ball in the V winning opening 287 by hitting right according to the launch promotion effect. In this embodiment, the case where the launch promotion effect is started with the start of the first round game will be described as an example, but in other embodiments, the launch promotion effect is started from the middle of the opening period. It may be.

Next, when the game ball passes through the V winning opening 287 during the 1st round game, which is an effective round game, a predetermined V winning notification effect for notifying that the game ball has won a V is executed (FIG. 13 (FIG. 13). See D)). Specifically, for example, an effect display showing how two characters lift a star-shaped emblem including the letter "V" and rejoice is performed, and a predetermined V winning notification sound is output from the speaker 38. ..

In this way, when the V winning notification effect for notifying that the game ball has won the V prize is executed during the 1st round game, the star-shaped emblem is displayed on the display screen during the subsequent 2R round game. It is displayed small in the lower left area of 70 (see FIG. 13 (E)). In the 1st round game and the 2nd round game, the 2nd prize opening 28 is opened for a long time, so that the above payout is made every time the passage of the game ball is detected by the 2nd prize opening sensor 281. The total number of prize balls won is updated (see FIGS. 13B to 13E). Although not shown in the figure, the effect display illustrated in FIG. 13 (E) continues during the period in which the 3rd to 5th round games in which the second big winning opening 28 is shortly opened are performed. It is done. Then, when the ending period of the jackpot game comes, "Fierce fight RUSH rushes" to notify that the production in the production mode named "Fierce fight RUSH" that definitely notifies that it is in the "probability change game state" is started. The characters "!" Are displayed large in the central area of the display screen 70, and the voice "Fierce fight RUSH rushes!" Is output from the speaker 38.

<When V prize is not notified>
FIG. 14 is a screen view showing an example of the effect when the V prize is not notified during the jackpot game. Here, a case where 5R probability variation A (see FIG. 7A) in which the 1st round game is an effective round game is selected as the type of jackpot related to the first special symbol determination will be described as an example. The determination result of the first special symbol determination in the normal game state becomes "big hit", and as the jackpot symbol X1 (see FIG. 6B) indicating the 5R probability variation A is stopped and displayed, for example, "444" doublets. In some cases, the three production symbols indicating the above may be stopped. In this case, the following effects are performed during the jackpot game of 5R probability variation A.

First, during the opening period of the jackpot game of 5R probability variation A, a predetermined opening effect is executed (see FIG. 14 (A)). Specifically, as illustrated in FIG. 14 (A), the characters "Challenge Bonus" that informs the type of the jackpot this time are displayed in the central area of the display screen 70, and the player is hit right. The urging "right-handed" character and the right-pointing arrow are displayed in the upper right area of the display screen 70. In addition, the same opening effect is performed during the opening period in the jackpot game of 5R normal A and 5R normal B.

Next, when a predetermined time elapses from the start of the opening period, the opening effect is switched to the opening effect that functions as the right-handed promotion effect (see FIGS. 14A to 14C). Specifically, as illustrated in FIGS. 14 (A) to 14 (C), instead of the letters "challenge bonus", the letters "Aim to the right!" And the letters "Store energy". An arrow that draws an arc is displayed on the display screen 70, and when a predetermined time elapses after the opening effect is switched, the characters "store energy" are switched to the characters "prepare for the battle!".

By the way, even if the game ball passes through the V winning opening 287 during the ineffective round game in the big hit game of 5R normal A or 5R normal B, the game is controlled in the probabilistic game state after the big hit game is completed on condition of the passage. Never. Therefore, it can be said that there is little need to perform the right-handed promotion effect illustrated in FIGS. 14 (B) and 14 (C). However, if the right-handed promotion effect is not performed during the effective round game in the jackpot game of 5R probability change A or 5R probability change B, the player does not make a right-handed hit, so that the game is controlled in the probability change game state. May be unintentionally missed.

Therefore, in order to suppress the occurrence of such a problem, it is conceivable to perform the above-mentioned launch promotion effect (see FIGS. 13B and 13C) during the round game, but this is during the effective round game. It will be clearly notified that the game ball has won a V prize, and it may be difficult to tell whether or not the game ball has won a V prize.

Therefore, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the above-mentioned launching is performed during the round game in the jackpot game executed in response to the fact that the three effect symbols indicating any of the above seven types of doublets are stopped. In the opening period in which the second major winning opening 28 and the V winning opening 287 are both closed without performing the promotion effect (see FIGS. 13B and 13C), FIGS. 14B and 14C are shown. The example right-handed promotion effect is to be performed.

Next, when the first round game is started, the right-handed promotion effect ends, and the effect during a predetermined round is performed (see FIGS. 14 (D) and 14 (E)). Specifically, three effect symbols of, for example, "444", which were stopped before the start of this jackpot game, are displayed in the upper left area of the display screen 70, and in the upper right area of the display screen 70. , The total number of prize balls paid out in response to the winning of the game balls is displayed in the second big prize opening 28 since the start of this big hit game. Further, in the central area of the display screen 70, a gauge image in which the black area expands to the right as the number of paid out prize balls increases is displayed, and the game ball is placed in the second prize opening 28. Each time you win, it will be updated with the total number of prize balls.

The first round game in which the effect display illustrated in FIGS. 14 (D) and 14 (E) is performed is an effective round game, and if the player normally strikes right, the game ball wins a V prize. The mouth 287 easily wins a V, but even if the game ball wins a V, that fact is not notified (see FIGS. 14 (D) and 14 (E)).

This gauge image is continuously displayed until the second round game (see FIG. 7 (A)) is completed (see FIG. 14 (F)). Then, when 10 game balls win the second big prize opening 28 in both the 1R round game and the 2R round game, the gauge image is filled with the black area and the second big winning opening 28 is short. During the 3rd to 4th round games that are released, the text "Charge completed!" Is displayed in the center area of the display screen 70 to notify that the gauge image is full of the black area ( See FIG. 14 (G)). In addition, during the subsequent round game of the 5th round (the second big winning opening 28 is opened for a short time), the characters "Battle victory is a fierce battle RUSH rush !!" are displayed in the center area of the display screen 70 ( See FIG. 14 (H)).

Further, as illustrated in FIG. 14, although the number of rounds indicating the number of round games currently being performed is not displayed, each time the game ball wins the second major winning opening 28, The black area in the gauge image increases. Therefore, the player can grasp the progress of the jackpot game based on the accumulation condition of the black region in the gauge image.

In this way, when the 5R round game in the jackpot game of 5R probability variation A is completed, the "challenge mode" that does not notify whether the game is in the "probability variation game state" or the "time saving game state" in the ending period of the jackpot game. In order to notify that the production in the production mode named "" will be started, the characters "Challenge mode rush!" Will be displayed large in the center area of the display screen 70, and the voice "Challenge mode rush!" Will be heard. It is output from the speaker 38.

As is clear from the above description based on FIG. 14, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the gaming ball passes through the V winning opening 287 during the effective round game, a notification to that effect is given (FIG. 14). 13 (D)) and there are cases where that fact is not notified. For this reason, it may be possible to effectively increase the expectation of the player who recognizes that the game is controlled in the "probability changing game state" after the jackpot game is completed, and the "probability changing game state". Even if it does not shift to "", it is possible to expect the player to shift to the "probability changing game state", and it is possible to improve the game interest.

Further, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, when a plurality of round games including the effective round game are executed (see FIGS. 7A and 7B), the round game being executed can be identified. The number is not displayed (see Figure 14). For this reason, it becomes difficult to confirm whether or not the game ball has won a V prize by paying close attention to the V winning opening 287 after identifying that the round game being executed is an effective round game. It can be effectively improved.

[About stage suggestion production]
Next, the stage suggestion effect executed by the gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. Here, FIG. 15 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the stage suggestion effect. FIG. 16 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a table used in the process of determining the number of effects of the effect during the period suggested by the stage suggestion effect. FIG. 17 is a detailed flowchart of the stage suggestion effect pattern setting process in step S172 of FIG. 57. FIG. 18 is a screen view showing a specific example of the stage suggestion effect. FIG. 19 is a screen view illustrating an effect performed after the stage suggestion effect is completed.

In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the stepwise suggestion effect is performed during the period from the start of the variable display of the first special symbol and the effect symbol in the normal gaming state until a predetermined time (for example, a suggestion period of 3 seconds) elapses. May be executed. This stage suggestion effect is an effect that continues up to any of the following stages (“3” in this embodiment), and the effect that is executed in the same symbol variation as the stage suggestion effect is executed in advance. It is a production that can be suggested to.

<Stage suggestion production that ends in the first stage>
FIG. 15A is an explanatory diagram for explaining the stage suggestion effect ending in the first stage. The stage suggestion effect that ends in the first stage is an effect that suggests an effect that is executed during the first period (effect during the first period) during the suggestion period, as illustrated in FIG. 15 (A). Here, the suggestion period is a period from the start of the symbol variation in which the step suggestion effect is executed until a predetermined time (3 seconds in the present embodiment) elapses. The first period is the period from the end of this suggestion period to the end of the symbol change. For example, when the fluctuation pattern E (see FIG. 10B) having a fluctuation time of 30 seconds is selected as the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol, the first 3 seconds is the suggestion period, and the remaining 27 seconds (= 30). Seconds-3 seconds) is the first period.

When such a stage suggestion effect ending in the first stage is executed, a success effect or a failure effect is executed as illustrated in FIG. 15A. Here, when the success effect is executed after the stage suggestion effect ending in the first stage, the effect suggested by the stage suggestion effect ending in the first stage is executed during the first period, while the first stage. When the failure effect is executed after the stage suggestion effect that ends in the stage, the effect suggested by the stage suggestion effect that ends in the first stage is not executed in the first period. That is, the stage suggestion effect and the failure effect that end in the first stage function as so-called ghost effects.

<Stage suggestion production that ends in the second stage>
FIG. 15B is an explanatory diagram for explaining the stage suggestion effect ending in the second stage. As illustrated in FIG. 15B, the stage suggestion effects that end in the second stage include an effect that is executed during the first period (effect during the first period) and an effect that is executed during the second period. (Direction during the second period) is a production that suggests during the suggestion period. The production of the first stage suggests the production during the first period, and the production of the second stage suggests the production during the second period. .. Here, the suggestion period is the same period as described above based on FIG. 15 (A). The first period is the period from the end of this suggestion period to the start of the second period, and the second period is the period from the end of the first period to the end of the symbol change. For example, when the fluctuation pattern B (see FIG. 10 (A)) having a fluctuation time of 55 seconds is selected as the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol, the first 3 seconds is the suggestion period, and the subsequent 26 seconds (=). (55-3) ÷ 2) is the first period, and the remaining 26 seconds (= (55-3) ÷ 2) seconds is the second period.

When such a stage suggestion effect ending in the second stage is executed, as in the case where the stage suggestion effect ending in the first stage is executed, as illustrated in FIG. 15B, a success effect or a success effect or The failure effect is executed. Here, when the success effect is executed after the stage suggestion effect ending in the second stage, the effect suggested by the first stage effect of the stage suggestion effect is executed during the first period, and the stage suggestion effect is performed. The effect suggested by the second stage effect is performed during the second period. On the other hand, when the failure effect is executed after the stage suggestion effect ending in the second stage, the two effects suggested by the stage suggestion effect ending in the second stage are executed in the first period and the second period, respectively. It has the characteristic that it is never done. That is, the stage suggestion effect and the failure effect ending in the second stage function as a ghost effect in the same manner as the stage suggestion effect and the failure effect ending in the first stage.

<Stage suggestion production that ends in the third stage>
FIG. 15C is an explanatory diagram for explaining the stage suggestion effect ending in the third stage. As illustrated in FIG. 15C, the stage suggestion effects that end in the third stage include an effect that is executed during the first period (effect during the first period) and an effect that is executed during the second period. It is a production that suggests (the production during the second period) and the production that is executed during the third period (the production during the third period) during the suggestion period, and the production during the first period is performed by the production of the first stage. It is suggested that the production of the second stage suggests the production during the second period, and the production of the third stage suggests the production during the third period. Here, the suggestion period is the same period as described above based on FIG. 15 (A). The first period is the period from the end of this suggestion period to the start of the second period, and the second period is the period from the end of the first period to the start of the third period, and the third period. The period is the period from the end of the second period to the end of the symbol change. For example, when the fluctuation pattern D (see FIG. 10 (A)) having a fluctuation time of 90 seconds is selected as the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol, the first 3 seconds is the suggestion period, and the subsequent 29 seconds (=). (90-3) ÷ 3) is the first period, and 29 seconds (= (90-3) ÷ 3) following this first period is the second period, and 29 seconds (= (90) ÷ 3) following this second period. -3) ÷ 3) is the third period.

When such a stage suggestion effect ending in the third stage is executed, the stage suggestion effect ending in the first stage and the stage suggestion effect ending in the second stage are executed, as in the case of executing FIG. 15C. As illustrated in, a success or failure effect is performed. Here, when the success effect is executed after the stage suggestion effect ending in the third stage, the effect suggested by the first stage effect of the stage suggestion effect is executed during the first period, and the stage suggestion effect is performed. The effect suggested by the second stage effect is executed during the second period, and the effect suggested by the third stage effect of the stage suggestion effect is executed during the third period. On the other hand, if the failure effect is executed after the stage suggestion effect that ends in the third stage, the three effects suggested by the stage suggestion effect that ends in the third stage are executed in each of the first to third periods. It has the characteristic that it is never done. That is, the stage suggestion effect and the failure effect ending in the third stage are the same as the stage suggestion effect and the failure effect ending in the first stage and the stage suggestion effect and the failure effect ending in the second stage. Functions as.

By the way, if the reach effect is executed during the variable display of the first special symbol in the normal game state, there is a possibility of a big hit. It is not preferable to produce. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the above-mentioned fluctuation pattern for jackpots and the above-mentioned fluctuation pattern for reach loss are selected based on FIG. 10 (A), the above-mentioned three types are selected. When executing any of the stage suggestion effects, the success effect is always executed without executing the failure effect after the stage effect. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to make the stage suggestion effect and the success effect that end in any of the first to third stages function as the reach confirmation effect, and the player can make a big hit. It is possible to effectively improve the sense of expectation.

On the other hand, when the above-mentioned variation pattern for non-reach loss is selected based on FIG. 10C, the reach effect is not executed. Therefore, in such a case, the success effect is performed after the step suggestion effect. It is not preferable, and the stage suggestion effect and the success effect cannot function as the reach confirmation effect. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the variation pattern for loss without reach is selected, the failure effect is always executed without executing the success effect after the stage suggestion effect.

When the variation pattern L (see FIG. 10C) in which the variation time of the first special symbol is 4 seconds is selected and the step suggestion effect and the failure effect are executed, a disparity is shown immediately after the failure effect. The effect design will be stopped and displayed, which is not preferable as an effect. Further, a variation pattern J (see FIG. 10C) in which the variation time of the first special symbol is 13 seconds is selected, and a variation pattern K (see FIG. 10) in which the variation time of the first special symbol is 8 seconds. If (see (C)) is selected and both the stage suggestion effect and the failure effect are executed, the appearance rate of the stage suggestion effect and the failure effect that function as the ghost effect becomes higher than necessary. , There is a possibility that the effect of the stage suggestion effect will be reduced.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the step suggestion effect and the failure effect are executed in a part of the case where the variation pattern J (see FIG. 10C) in which the variation time of the first special symbol is 13 seconds is selected, and the variation is performed. When the pattern K or the variation pattern L is selected, the step suggestion effect and the failure effect are not executed. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to effectively suppress the problem that the stage suggestion effect and the failure effect occur frequently, resulting in discomfort to the player.

<Selection of the number of productions during the period>
The sub ROM 92 is used as a jackpot as a table referred to by the sub CPU 91 when determining the number of effects during the period suggested by the stage suggestion effect, in other words, to what stage the stage suggestion effect is finally continued. A production number selection table during the period (see FIG. 16A), a production number selection table during the reach loss period (see FIG. 16B), and a production number selection table during the non-reach loss period (see FIG. 16C). See) and is remembered. When the sub CPU 91 receives the variation start command related to the first special symbol determination transmitted from the main control board 80, the sub CPU 91 includes information indicating the determination result of the first special symbol determination included in the variation start command, and information indicating the determination result. The number of effects during the period is determined based on the information indicating the variation pattern of the selected first special symbol and the above-mentioned three types of tables for selecting the number of effects during the period.

(About the selection of the number of productions during the period when it is a big hit)
The production number selection table during the jackpot period illustrated in FIG. 16A is referred to when the determination result of the first special symbol determination is "jacket" and the sub CPU 91 determines that the stage suggestion effect is executed. It is a production number selection table during the period to be performed. When the sub CPU 91 receives a fluctuation start command including information indicating that the determination result of the first special symbol determination is "big hit", the sub CPU 91 is appropriately updated every time the random number update process of step S46 of FIG. 49 is performed. With respect to the random number for determining the number of effects during the period, the value of the timing at which the fluctuation start command is received is acquired and stored in a predetermined area of the sub RAM 93. Then, the effect number selection table during the jackpot period is read from the sub ROM 92 and set in the sub RAM 93, and the number of effects during the period to which the random number corresponding to the acquired random number for determining the effect number is associated is set during the jackpot period. The number of effects during the period is determined by reading from the selection table for the number of medium effects.

In the present embodiment, the range in which the random number for determining the number of effects can be taken during the period is set to "0" to "99". On the other hand, in the jackpot production number selection table, 15 random values are associated with the production number "1" during the period, and 35 random values are associated with the production number "2" during the period. Are associated with each other, and 50 random values are associated with the number of effects "3" during the period. Therefore, the ratio that the number of effects is determined to be "1" during the period is 15% (= 15/100 x 100), and the ratio that the number of effects is determined to be "2" during the period is 35% (= 35 /). It is 100 × 100), and the ratio that the number of effects is determined to be “3” during the period is 50% (= 50/100 × 100).

(About the selection of the number of productions during the period when there is a reach loss)
In the effect number selection table for reach loss during the period illustrated in FIG. 16B, the determination result of the first special symbol determination is "loss", the variation pattern for reach loss is selected, and when the step suggestion effect is executed, it is sub. It is a production number selection table during a period referred to when it is determined by CPU 91. When the sub CPU 91 receives the fluctuation start command including the information indicating that the determination result of the first special symbol determination is "loss" and the variation pattern for reach loss is selected, the sub CPU 91 is the above-mentioned "big hit". Similarly, a random number for determining the number of effects during the period is acquired and stored in a predetermined area of the sub RAM 93. Then, the effect number selection table during the reach loss period is read from the sub ROM 92 and set in the sub RAM 93, and the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol is associated with the random number value corresponding to the acquired random number for determining the effect number during the period. The number of effects during the period is determined by reading the number of effects during the period from the number of effects during the reach loss selection table.

In the reach loss period effect number selection table, as illustrated in FIG. 16 (B), the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol, the period effect number, and (compared with the random number for determining the effect number during the period). It is associated with a random number value. For example, with respect to the fluctuation pattern E (see FIG. 10B), which is a fluctuation pattern for reach loss, 70 random values are associated with the number of effects “1” during the period, and the number of effects “2” during the period is set. On the other hand, 20 random values are associated with each other, and 10 random values are associated with the number of effects "3" during the period (see FIG. 16B). Therefore, when the sub CPU 91 receives the variation start command related to the first special symbol determination including the information indicating that the variation pattern E is selected by the main CPU 81, the ratio of the number of effects during the period is determined to be "1". Is 70% (= 70/100 x 100), the ratio at which the number of productions is determined to be "2" during the period is 20% (= 20/100 x 100), and the number of productions during the period is "3". The determined ratio is 10% (= 50/100 × 100).

On the other hand, for example, with respect to the fluctuation pattern H (see FIG. 10B), which is a fluctuation pattern for reach loss, 20 random values are associated with the number of effects “1” during the period, and the number of effects during the period “1”. 20 random values are associated with "2", and 10 random values are associated with the number of effects "3" during the period (see FIG. 16B). Therefore, when the sub CPU 91 receives the variation start command related to the first special symbol determination including the information indicating that the variation pattern H is selected by the main CPU 81, the ratio of the number of effects during the period is determined to be "1". Is 20% (= 20/100 x 100), the ratio at which the number of productions is determined to be "2" during the period is 30% (= 30/100 x 100), and the number of productions during the period is "3". The determined ratio is 50% (= 50/100 × 100).

The following can be said about the tendency to determine the number of productions during the period. That is, when the judgment result of the first special symbol determination is "big hit", it is easy to select a large value as the number of effects during the period (see FIG. 16 (A)), and the judgment result of the first special symbol determination is When the variation pattern for reach loss is selected as “loss”, a large value is likely to be selected as the number of effects during the period as the variation time becomes longer. From this, it can be said that when the jackpot reliability is relatively high, it is easy to select a large value as the number of effects during the period, in other words, it is easy for the stage suggestion effect to continue to a higher stage.

Therefore, instead of the stage suggestion effect that ends in the first stage (see FIG. 15 (A)), the stage suggestion effect that ends in the second stage (see FIG. 15 (B)) and the stage suggestion effect that ends in the third stage. By executing (see FIG. 15C), it is possible to effectively improve the player's expectation for the jackpot.

(Regarding the selection of the number of productions during the period when there is no reach loss)
In the effect number selection table for non-reach loss during the period illustrated in FIG. 16 (C), the determination result of the first special symbol determination is "loss", and the variation pattern for non-reach loss is selected, and the stage suggestion effect is produced. Is a period production number selection table that is referred to when determined by the sub CPU 91. When the sub CPU 91 receives a fluctuation start command including information indicating that the determination result of the first special symbol determination is "loss" and the variation pattern for loss without reach is selected, the above "big hit" is performed. Similar to a certain case, a random number for determining the number of effects is acquired during the period and stored in a predetermined area of the sub RAM 93. Then, the effect number selection table during the non-reach loss period is read from the sub ROM 92 and set in the sub RAM 93, and the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol corresponds to the random number value corresponding to the acquired random number for determining the effect number during the period. The number of effects during the period is determined by reading the number of effects during the attached period from the number of effects during the period selection table for no reach loss.

In the effect number selection table during the period without reach loss, as illustrated in FIG. 16C, the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol, the number of effects during the period, and (the random number for determining the number of effects during the period) are compared. It is associated with a random number value. For example, with respect to the fluctuation pattern J (see FIG. 10C), which is a fluctuation pattern for loss without reach, 55 random values are associated with the number of effects “1” during the period, and the number of effects “2” during the period. Is associated with 35 random values, and 10 random values are associated with the number of effects “3” during the period (see FIG. 16C). Therefore, when the sub CPU 91 receives the variation start command related to the first special symbol determination including the information indicating that the variation pattern J is selected by the main CPU 81, the ratio of the number of effects during the period is determined to be "1". Is 55% (= 55/100 x 100), the ratio at which the number of effects is determined to be "2" during the period is 35% (= 35/100 x 100), and the number of effects during the period is "3". The determined ratio is 10% (= 50/100 × 100).

On the other hand, with respect to the fluctuation pattern K and the fluctuation pattern L, which are the fluctuation patterns for the loss without reach, the random value is not associated with the number of effects during any period, and the number of effects during the period is not selected. , Stage suggestion effect and failure effect are not executed.

(About the stage suggestion effect pattern selection process)
Next, the stage suggestion effect pattern selection process executed by the sub CPU 91 will be described with reference to FIG. Here, FIG. 17 is a detailed flowchart of the step suggestion effect pattern setting process in step S172 of FIG. 57, which will be described later. The sub CPU 91 executes the following processing following the advance notice effect pattern setting process in step S164, which will be described later.

That is, as illustrated in FIG. 17, the sub CPU 91 acquires and stores the stage suggestion effect random numbers used in the process of determining whether or not to execute the stage suggestion effect (step S1721). Specifically, with respect to the step suggestion effect random number that is updated every time the random number update process of step S46 in FIG. 49 is performed, the value of the timing at which the fluctuation start command from the main control board 80 is received is acquired, and the sub RAM 93 Store in a predetermined area of.

Next, the sub CPU 91 determines whether or not to execute the stage suggestion effect based on whether or not the acquired step suggestion effect random number matches the random number value stored in advance in the sub ROM 92 (step S1722). .. Here, when it is determined that the stage suggestion effect is not executed (step S1722: NO), the stage suggestion effect pattern setting process is completed, and the process proceeds to step S174 of FIG. 57.

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 91 determines that the stage suggestion effect is to be executed (step S1722: YES), the sub CPU 91 acquires a random number for determining the number of effects during the period and stores it in the sub RAM 93 (step S1723). Then, it is determined whether or not the determination result of the first special symbol determination specified based on the information included in the fluctuation start command received from the main control board 80 is a "big hit" (step S1724), and ". When it is determined that the hit is "big hit" (step S1724: YES), the above-mentioned production number selection table during the big hit period (see FIG. 16A) is read from the sub ROM 92 and set in the sub RAM 93 (step S1725).

On the contrary, when the sub CPU 91 determines that the determination result of the first special symbol determination is not "big hit" (step S1724: NO), the sub CPU 91 is based on the information included in the fluctuation start command received from the main control board 80. Then, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol selected by the main CPU 81 is the fluctuation pattern for reach loss (step S1726). Here, when it is determined that the variation pattern is for reach loss (step S1726: YES), the effect number selection table (see FIG. 16B) during the reach loss period is read from the sub ROM 92 and set in the sub RAM 93 (step). S1727), when it is determined that the fluctuation pattern is not for reach loss (step S1726: NO), that is, when the fluctuation pattern is for reachless loss, the number of effects selection table during the reachless loss period (FIG. 16 (C)). (See) is read from the sub ROM 92 and set in the sub RAM 93 (step S1728).

When the sub CPU 91 executes the process of step S1725, the process of step S1727, or the process of step S1728, the sub CPU 91 executes the effect number determination process during the period (step S1729). The production number determination process during this period is as described above based on FIGS. 16A to 16C.

Subsequently, the sub CPU 91 executes the effect selection process during the period (step S1730). Specifically, when the number of effects during the period is determined to be "1" in the process of step S1729, the above-mentioned first effect during the period is selected based on FIG. 15 (A). When the number of effects during the period is determined to be "2", the above-mentioned first period effect and second period effect are selected based on FIG. 15B. When the number of effects during the period is determined to be "3", the above-mentioned first period effect, second period effect, and third period effect are selected based on FIG. 15 (C).

As will be described in detail later, by the variation effect pattern setting process in step S163 of FIG. 57, the variation mode of the effect symbol, the presence / absence of the reach effect, the presence / absence of the pseudo continuous effect, the type of the effect symbol constituting the reach symbol, and the reach effect. The type and content of the pattern, the content of the pseudo-continuous production, the type of the production symbol to be stopped and displayed, etc. are determined. Similarly, by the advance notice effect pattern setting process in step S164 of FIG. 57, various effect patterns of the advance notice effect to be executed when the effect symbols are variablely displayed in the variable effect pattern set in the process of step S163 are set. NS. Therefore, the sub CPU 91 is based on the variation effect pattern set in the process of step S163 and the advance notice effect pattern set in the process of step S164, and which effect is at which timing according to the variation display of the first special symbol. It is possible to specify whether it is done in.

When the sub CPU 91 executes the stage suggestion effect (see FIG. 15A) that ends in the first stage, the sub CPU 91 refers to the above-mentioned variable effect pattern and the advance notice effect pattern, and performs the effect executed during the first period. Specify and select any of the specified effects as the effects during the first period (for example, by performing a lottery using random numbers).

Further, when the sub CPU 91 executes the stage suggestion effect (see FIG. 15B) that ends in the second stage, the sub CPU 91 is executed during the first period with reference to the above-mentioned variable effect pattern and advance notice effect pattern. Identify the production and the production to be performed during the second period. Then, one of the effects executed during the first period is selected as the effect during the first period (for example, by performing a lottery using random numbers), and any of the effects executed during the second period (for example, by performing a lottery) is selected. Select as an effect during the second period (by performing a lottery using random numbers).

Further, when the sub CPU 91 executes the stage suggestion effect (see FIG. 15C) that ends in the third stage, the sub CPU 91 is executed during the first period with reference to the above-mentioned variable effect pattern and advance notice effect pattern. The effect, the effect executed during the second period, and the effect executed during the third period are specified. Then, one of the effects executed during the first period is selected as the effect during the first period (for example, by performing a lottery using random numbers), and any of the effects executed during the second period (for example, by performing a lottery) is selected. Select as the effect during the second period (by performing a lottery using random numbers), and select any effect executed during the third period as the effect during the third period (for example, by performing a lottery using random numbers). ..

When the sub CPU 91 selects one or a plurality of effects during the period in this way, the sub CPU 91 sets the information indicating the selection result as the stage suggestion effect pattern, and stores the setting information in the sub RAM 93 (step S1731). When the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol is a fluctuation pattern for big hits or a fluctuation pattern for reach loss, setting information indicating that a success effect is executed after the stage suggestion effect is stored, and for loss without reach. In the case of the fluctuation pattern of, the setting information indicating that the failure effect is executed after the stage suggestion effect is stored.

The setting information related to the stage suggestion effect stored in the sub RAM 93 in this way is included in the variable effect start command set in the sub RAM 93 by the process of step S174 of FIG. 57, and is included in the image / sound control board 100 and the lamp control. The above-mentioned stage suggestion effect is realized based on FIG. 15 by transmitting to the substrate 120 and performing the effect control based on the variation start command by the image / sound control CPU 101 and the lamp CPU 121.

Although not shown in FIG. 17, even if the processing proceeds from step S1728 to step S1729, the fluctuation pattern K or the fluctuation pattern L, which is a fluctuation pattern for loss without reach, is present as the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol. If it is selected, since the number of effects is not determined during the period in the process of step S1729, the process of step S1730 and the process of step S1731 are not executed, and the series of step suggestion effect pattern setting processes ends.

(Specific example of stage suggestion production that ends in the third stage)
Next, with reference to FIGS. 18 and 19, a stage suggestion effect that ends in the third stage (see FIG. 15C) and an effect that is performed after this stage suggestion effect ends (effects during the first period to the third). A specific example of (such as production during the period) will be described. Here, FIG. 18 is a screen view showing a specific example of the stage suggestion effect ending in the third stage, and FIG. 19 is a screen view illustrating the effect performed after the stage suggestion effect is completed.

Here, a case where the stage suggestion effect ending in the third stage described above is performed based on FIG. 15C and the like while the effect is controlled in the second normal mode will be described as an example. In the first normal mode described above, the effect symbol composed of numbers to which the character image is not added is displayed on the display screen 70, whereas in the second normal mode, the effect symbol is distinguished from other effect symbols. An effect symbol composed of a possible number and a character image peculiar to the number is displayed on the display screen 70. Specifically, by scrolling and displaying each symbol sequence, one symbol in which the character image of the character A is added to the number "1" and the character image of the character B are added to the number "2". 2 symbols, 3 symbols with character C character image added to number "3", 4 symbols with character D character image added to number "4", character E character image added to number "5" 5 symbols with the addition of, 6 symbols with the character image of the character F added to the number "6", 7 symbols with the character image of the character G added to the number "7", and the character with the number "8" The effect symbols of each symbol sequence are displayed on the display screen 70 so that the 8 symbols to which the character image of H is added and the 9 symbols to which the character image of the character I is added to the number "9" are displayed in order. NS.

Further, in the second normal mode, as in the first normal mode, each symbol row is scrolled downward so that the effect symbols arranged vertically are displayed in order on the display screen 70. Further, although not shown in FIGS. 19 and 20, during the variation effect in the second normal mode, the background image dedicated to the second normal mode is displayed on the display screen 70, and the BGM dedicated to the second normal mode is displayed. It is output from the speaker 38.

In FIG. 18A, one hold icon (for example, a red hold icon: see FIG. 21 (A)) is displayed in the hold icon display area 71 on the display screen 70, and the icon display area 72 is displayed. In order to notify that the determination result of the first special symbol determination corresponding to the displayed icon is "missing", the lost symbol is stopped and displayed as the first special symbol, and the "251" is displayed. An example is a state in which the effect symbols indicating the disjointed eyes are stopped and displayed. In this way, when a predetermined fixed time (0.5 seconds in the present embodiment) elapses after the lost symbol is stopped and displayed as the first special symbol, the earliest hold displayed in the hold icon display area 71 is held. The first special symbol determination corresponding to the icon (here, the red hold icon) is executed. Then, for example, the determination result of the first special symbol determination is "big hit", and the variation pattern D of the first special symbol (the reach effect develops in the order of normal reach, SP reach, and SPSP reach). (See FIG. 10 (A)) is selected, and further, when it is decided to execute the stage suggestion effect ending in the third stage in the symbol variation in which the first special symbol is varied and displayed in this variation pattern D, The following productions are performed.

That is, the hold icon is displayed as the variable display of the first special symbol is started in response to the execution of the first special symbol determination corresponding to the earliest hold icon (here, the red hold icon). The earliest hold icon displayed in the area 71 shifts to the icon display area 72, and the scroll display of the three symbol columns is started (see FIGS. 18A and 18B). Then, during the suggestion period from the start of scrolling of these three symbol rows to the elapse of a predetermined time (3 seconds in the present embodiment), the first stage effect and the second stage effect of the stage suggestion effect The production and the third stage production are executed in order.

In the first stage production (see FIG. 18C), the same character G as shown by the character image added to the number "7" constituting the 7 symbols is arranged side by side and "7". An effect image (first stage effect image) in which the characters "Ten?" Are arranged below these characters G is displayed in the center of the display screen 70.

In this embodiment, even if the stage suggestion effect is performed, the reach is not actually established unless the success effect is performed after that. Therefore, at least the success effect is performed. Until this is done, scrolling of the three symbol sequences is continuously executed, for example, in the lower right region of the display screen 70 (see FIGS. 18C to 18H).

Further, to explain the first stage production as an example, even if a stage suggestion production including the first stage production suggesting that the reach is established is performed, if the success production is not performed after that, the reach is actually achieved. Is never established. For this reason, in the first stage production, instead of the characters such as "7 ten!" The first stage production image composed of characters including the "?" Mark such as "7 ten?", Which suggests that the reach may be established by the design, is displayed (FIG. 18 (C)). )reference).

In the first-stage effect illustrated in FIG. 18C, although the 7 symbols themselves are not displayed, they represent the same character image G that is added to the number "7" that constitutes the 7 symbols, and 7 Since the first-stage effect image representing the characters "7 ten?", Which suggests that the reach may be established with the symbols, is displayed, the player can perform the effect that the reach is established with the 7 symbols during the first period. It is possible to easily recognize that it may be executed as a medium effect.

By the way, for example, if a configuration such as displaying a first-stage effect image representing the 7 symbols themselves is adopted, it is considered that the player can more clearly recognize that the reach may be established with the 7 symbols. Be done. However, if such a configuration is easily adopted, the player mistakenly recognizes the first stage effect as the reach establishment effect, and as a result, there arises a problem that the effect of the stage suggestion effect is significantly reduced. there is a possibility.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the first stage effect suggesting that the reach establishment effect may be executed as the effect during the first period, the effect pattern that may form the reach may be formed. The first stage effect image representing a part of the constituent elements (here, the character image among the numbers and the character image) is displayed.

Further, in order to further reduce the possibility that the above problem occurs, in the present embodiment, while displaying the effect symbol to which the color character image is added, the first stage effect image in which the character image is expressed in monochrome is displayed. Is also adopted in the configuration such as displaying.

Further, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the determination result of the first special symbol determination in the normal gaming state is "big hit", that is, when the hit notification effect is executed in the reach effect, the effect of forming the reach is formed. The probability that 7 symbols are selected as the symbol (reach symbol) is the highest, the probability that 3 symbols are selected as the reach symbol is the next highest, and the probability that another effect symbol is selected as the reach symbol is set to a low value. ing. Further, regarding the case where the determination result of the first special symbol determination in the normal game state is "loss" and the loss notification effect is executed in the reach effect, contrary to the case of "big hit", other effect symbols ( 7 symbols and production symbols other than 3 symbols) are most likely to be selected as reach symbols, 3 symbols are most likely to be selected as reach symbols, and 7 symbols are less likely to be selected as reach symbols. Is set to.

For this reason, the jackpot reliability of the reach establishment effect that establishes the reach with the 7 symbols is relatively high, and the first stage effect suggesting that the reach may be established with the 7 symbols (FIG. 18 (FIG. 18 (Fig. 18)). By executing (C)), it is possible to effectively improve the player's expectation for the jackpot.

Up to this point, there is a possibility that the reach establishment effect is executed as the effect during the first period, and the case where the first stage effect suggesting the reach establishment effect is executed has been described as an example, but the effect during the first period is It is not limited to the reach establishment effect, for example, the first stage effect suggesting the execution of the pseudo continuous effect as the effect during the first period is executed, or the step-up notice as the effect during the first period is executed. The first stage of the production, which suggests the execution of the production, may be executed.

After the first stage production is performed, the second stage production (suggesting the production during the second period) is subsequently performed (see FIG. 18 (D)). In FIG. 18 (D), since there is a possibility that SP reach will be performed as an effect during the second period in the second period of the symbol change this time (see FIG. 15 (C)), the characters “SP?” A state in which a second stage effect of displaying a second stage effect image representing the above is being performed is illustrated.

Also here, since it is not certain that the SP reach will be executed as the effect during the second period until the success effect is executed after the stage suggestion effect is completed, the SP reach such as "SP!" Is executed. A second-stage effect image containing characters suggesting that SP reach may be executed, such as "SP?", Is displayed instead of characters categorically suggesting that.

Further, during the second stage production (see FIG. 18 (D)), during the third stage production (see FIG. 18 (E)), and after the stage suggestion production is completed (see FIGS. 18 (F) to (H)). Also includes characters that are common to the characters shown in the first stage production image (here, "7 ten?") So that the player can easily recognize the production during the first period suggested by the first stage production. The one-step corresponding image is displayed small in the upper left area of the display screen 70.

Therefore, the player can easily recognize the effect during the first period suggested by the effect of the first stage based on the image corresponding to the first stage even after the effect of the first stage is completed. be.

Further, here, the case of executing the second stage effect suggesting that the SP reach may be executed as the effect during the second period has been described as an example, but the effect during the second period is the SP reach. It is not limited, and for example, the second stage production suggesting the execution of the reach development production as the production during the second period (for example, the production notifying the development of the reach production from the normal reach to the SP reach). It may be executed, or a second stage effect suggesting the execution of the icon change effect as the effect during the second period may be executed.

When the second stage production is performed in this way, the third stage production (suggesting the production during the third period) is subsequently performed (see FIG. 18E). In FIG. 18 (E), there is a possibility that a group notice (see FIG. 12 (D)) will be performed as an effect during the third period in the third period (see FIG. 15 (C)) of the symbol change this time. Therefore, it is illustrated that a third stage effect of displaying a part of a plurality of characters appearing in the group notice and a third stage effect image representing the characters "group?" Is being performed.

Also here, since it is not certain that the group notice will be executed as the effect during the third period until the success effect is executed after the stage suggestion effect is completed, the group notice such as "group!" Is executed. A third-stage production image containing characters suggesting that a group notice such as "group?" May be executed is displayed instead of characters categorically suggesting that.

Further, during the production of the third stage (see FIG. 18 (E)), and after the end of the stage suggestion effect (see FIGS. 18 (F) to (H)), the production during the second period suggested by the second stage production is also performed. In order for the player to easily recognize Will be done.

Therefore, the player can easily recognize the effect during the second period suggested by the effect of the second stage based on the image corresponding to the second stage even after the effect of the second stage is completed. be.

In addition, even after the stage suggestion effect is completed (see FIGS. 18 (F) to 18 (H)), the third stage effect is provided so that the player can easily recognize the effect during the third period suggested by the third stage effect. A third-stage corresponding image including characters common to the characters indicated by the image (here, “group?”) Is displayed small in the upper left area of the display screen 70.

Therefore, the player can easily recognize the effect during the third period suggested by the effect of the third stage based on the image corresponding to the third stage even after the effect of the third stage is completed. be.

Further, in the examples shown in FIGS. 18 (F) to 18 (H), a first-stage compatible image showing the characters "7 ten?", A second-stage compatible image showing the characters "SP?", And a "group?" Since the three stage-compatible images of the third-stage compatible image indicating the characters of "" are displayed, the player is based on the fact that the three stage-compatible images displayed immediately after the stage suggestion effect is completed. Therefore, it is possible to continue to recognize that the stage suggestion effect has continued up to the third stage, which is the upper limit, even after the stage suggestion effect is completed.

Here, in order to continue the stage suggestion effect to the third stage, the case where three stage corresponding images are displayed has been described as an example, but when the stage suggestion effect ending in the first stage is executed, the stage suggestion effect is described. When only the first stage compatible image is displayed in the upper left area of the display screen 70 and the stage suggestion effect ending in the second stage is executed, there are two images, the first stage compatible image and the second stage compatible image. The stage-corresponding image is displayed in the upper left area of the display screen 70.

Further, here, the case of executing the third stage effect suggesting that the group notice may be executed as the effect during the third period has been described as an example, but the effect during the third period is the group notice. It is not limited, and suggests, for example, the execution of a cut-in (see FIG. 12 (G)) as an effect during the third period (occurs in the latter half of the SPSP reach and does not occur during other reach effects). The third stage effect is executed, or the second effect button operation promotion effect (executed in the latter half of SPSP reach and not executed during other reach effects) as the effect during the third period (see FIG. 12 (H)). ) Is executed, or the third stage effect suggesting the execution of the hit notification effect (see FIG. 12 (I)) as the effect during the third period is executed. Sometimes.

When the third stage effect is performed in this way, the character appearance effect that functions as the introduction effect of the success effect and the failure effect described above is performed (see FIG. 18 (F)). In this character appearance production, the success production notifies that the production during the period suggested by the stage suggestion production is actually performed, or the production during the period suggested by the stage suggestion production is not actually performed. This is an effect showing how a character having a role of notifying a failure effect appears on the display screen 70.

FIGS. 18 (G) to 18 (H) illustrate how the characters appearing in this character appearance effect perform a judge effect (successful effect). Specifically, in this judge production, the first stage compatible image is displayed asking whether or not the reach by the seven symbols is established, and the second stage compatible image is displayed asking whether or not it develops into SP reach. Is displayed and the image corresponding to the third stage is displayed so as to ask whether or not a group notice will occur, and it is configured as an effect to display how the character lifts the placard with the letters "YES" written on it. Has been done.

In this way, when the effect display showing how the character lifts the placard on which the character "YES" is written is performed, the character changes the placard to the sword, and the character indicated by the first stage corresponding image is "7". The characters indicated by the second stage compatible image change from "SP?" To "SP!", And the characters indicated by the third stage compatible image change from "group?" To "group?" The effect is changed to "Group!", And the effect display is performed to indicate that the characters "Get !!" indicating that the character has acquired these effects are displayed.

In addition, in FIGS. 18 (G) and 18 (H), a judge effect (as a success effect) is performed in a state where three image corresponding to the first stage to the image corresponding to the third stage are displayed. As illustrated, if a stage suggestion effect that ends in the second stage is performed, or if a stage suggestion effect that ends in the first stage is performed, only the number of stage-corresponding images displayed is different. , The same judge effect as illustrated in FIGS. 18 (G) and 18 (H) is performed.

On the other hand, when the effect suggested by each stage corresponding effect (effect during the period) is not actually performed, the character appearance effect illustrated in FIG. 18 (F) is shown, although it is not shown in the figure. Then, a judge production as a failure production is performed. Specifically, an effect display is performed to show how the character appearing in the character appearance effect lifts the placard on which the character "NO" is written, and along with this, the first character indicating the character "7 ten?" Is displayed. An effect display is performed to show how the stage-compatible image, the second-stage compatible image showing the characters "SP?", And the third-stage compatible image showing the characters "group?" Are shattered. Such a series of effect display is also performed when a judge effect as a failure effect is performed after the stage suggestion effect ending in the first stage or the stage suggestion effect ending in the second stage is performed.

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 18, when the judge effect as a success effect is performed, it is illustrated in the first stage effect (see FIG. 18 (C)) and the first stage corresponding image (FIGS. 18 (D) to (G)). As the effect during the first period suggested by "7 ten?"), A reach establishment effect showing how the reach is established with 7 symbols is performed (see FIG. 18 (I)). It should be noted that FIG. 18 (I) succeeds after the first stage effect (see FIG. 18C) for displaying the first stage effect image including the character "7 ten?" And the character G is performed. An example is shown in which a reach establishment effect is performed, which indicates that a reach is established with 7 symbols because the effect is performed. For example, the first character including the character "3 ten?" And the character C is included. Displaying the stage effect image If the success effect is performed after the first stage effect is performed, the reach establishment effect indicating how the reach is established with the three symbols is performed.

When the reach establishment effect is performed in this way, the normal reach (see FIG. 19A) is first performed. Since this normal reach is performed in the same manner as the above-mentioned normal reach based on FIG. 12A except for the configuration of the effect symbol, detailed description here will be omitted.

Next, since it is suggested in advance that the SP reach will be executed by the second stage effect and the success effect of the stage suggestion effect, the reach effect will develop from the normal reach to the SP reach (FIG. 19). (A) and (B)). The period during which the SP reach is performed is a period included in the second period exemplified in FIG. 15C, and the SP reach is executed as suggested by the production of the second stage. After that, for example, at the end of the SP reach, after a pseudo-loss effect (see FIG. 19 (C)) is performed in which the three effect symbols indicating the reach loss of "787" are pseudo-stopped to make them appear to be lost. As an effect for developing the reach effect from SP reach to SPSP reach, the same development effect as described above is performed based on FIG. 12 (B) (see FIG. 19 (D)).

The period during which the SPSP reach is performed via this development effect is a period included in the third period exemplified in FIG. 15 (C), and the group notice is executed by the third stage effect and the success effect. Since it is suggested in advance, a group notice will be generated during the SPSP reach as a production during the third period (see FIG. 19 (F)). Since this group notice is the same effect as the group notice described above based on FIG. 12 (D) except that the generation timing is different, detailed description here will be omitted.

After that, when the final stage of the SPSP reach is approached, a first effect button operation promotion effect (see FIG. 19 (G)) that prompts the player to operate the first effect button 35 is performed, and this first effect button operation promotion effect is performed. When the first effect button 35 is operated during the valid period according to the above, a cut-in occurs (see FIG. 19 (H)). Then, at the end of the SPSP reach, a second effect button operation promotion effect (see FIG. 19 (I)) that prompts the player to operate the second effect button 36 is performed, and is related to this second effect button operation promotion effect. When the second effect button 36 is operated during the valid period, the hit notification effect (or the loss notification effect) is executed (see FIG. 19 (J)). Here, since the determination result of the first special symbol determination performed at the start of the symbol variation this time is a "big hit", it corresponds to the operation of the second effect button 36 for the second effect button operation promotion effect. , The hit notification effect is executed.

Up to this point, a series of productions from the end of the SPSP reach has been briefly described with reference to FIGS. 19 (G) to 19 (J), but these productions are shown in FIGS. 12 (F) to 12 (I). Is performed in the same manner as described above.

(About the gaming machine 1 that can execute the stage suggestion effect)
Up to this point, the stage suggestion effect executed by the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment and the effect performed within the same fluctuation after the stage suggestion effect has been performed have been described, but such a game machine 1 is as follows. It can be regarded as a game machine.

A determination means for determining whether or not to execute a special game (for example, a jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player (for example, the main CPU 81 that executes the jackpot determination process in step S308 of FIG. 42, which will be described later).
When the determination is made, the symbol display means (for example, the first special symbol display 41) is made to display the special symbol (for example, the first special symbol) in a variable manner, and then the special symbol indicating the result of the determination is stopped and displayed. The symbol display control means (for example, the main CPU 81 that controls the first special symbol display 41) and
The effect control means (for example, sub CPU 91, image / sound control CPU 101, lamp CPU 121) for controlling the execution of the effect is provided.
The effect control means
The effect symbol is variablely displayed according to the variable display of the special symbol, and the effect symbol that notifies the result of the determination is stopped and displayed along with the stop display of the special symbol.
During the variable display of the special symbol, it is possible to establish a reach by the effect symbol and execute a predetermined reach effect (for example, the normal reach exemplified in FIG. 19A).
From the start of the variable display of the effect symbol to the establishment of the reach by the effect symbol, the effect display in which the effect symbol that establishes the reach can be specified (for example, the stage illustrated in FIG. 18C). Execute the first stage production of the suggestion production),
When the effect display is executed, the reach by the effect symbol suggested by the effect display is established, and then the predetermined reach effect is executed (see FIGS. 18 (I) and 19 (A)).
The case where the reach by the first effect symbol (for example, 7 symbols) is established is larger than the case where the reach by the second effect symbol (for example, any of 1 symbol to 6 symbols, 8 symbols, and 9 symbols) is established. A gaming machine characterized in that the special gaming is likely to be executed.

According to the gaming machine 1 having such a configuration, before the reach is established, the effect display that can specify the effect symbol that establishes the reach (for example, the first stage effect of the stage suggestion effect: FIG. 18C). (See) is executed, and the case where the reach by the first effect symbol (for example, 7 symbols) is established is more than the case where the reach by the second effect symbol (for example, the effect symbol other than the 7 symbols) is established. Is likely to be executed. Therefore, the player can enjoy the game while expecting that the effect display that can specify the first effect symbol is executed rather than the second effect symbol.

(Other configurations related to stage suggestion production)
The following configuration may be adopted for the stage suggestion effect.
That is, in the present embodiment, a part of the effect symbol displayed as the reach symbol when the reach is established by the first stage effect of the stage suggestion effect (in the present embodiment, the character image constituting the effect symbol) is displayed. The case of displaying is described as an example. On the other hand, in another embodiment, the first stage effect image representing the effect symbol itself (that is, the entire effect symbol) to be displayed as the reach symbol may be displayed. However, in this case, in order to prevent the player from misunderstanding that the first stage effect is a reach establishment effect, for example, a first stage effect image expressing the effect symbol displayed in color as the reach symbol in monochrome is displayed. Alternatively, it is preferable to adopt a configuration such as displaying a first-stage effect image showing a state in which the numbers and character images constituting the effect symbol to be displayed as the reach symbol are separated.

Further, in FIG. 18, an example is taken in the case where the player can identify the effect symbol in the first stage under the situation where the reach by the effect symbol composed of the numbers and the character image may be established. I gave an explanation. On the other hand, for example, there is a possibility that a reach by an effect symbol composed of a number, a character image added to the number, and a panel image functioning as a background of the number and the character image may be established. Below, the player may perform a first-stage effect that allows the player to identify the reach pattern.

In this case, as the first-stage effect, for example, it is conceivable to display a first-stage effect image similar to the one in which only the numbers are removed from the effect image. With this configuration, since the first stage effect image shows the character image and the panel image common to the reach symbol, the player can easily identify the reach symbol based on the first stage effect image. Is. Further, since this first stage effect image does not include the numbers constituting the effect symbol as the reach symbol, the display content is different from the actual reach symbol, and the effect of displaying the first stage effect image is the reach establishment effect. It is also possible to easily suppress the problem that the player misidentifies the above.

Further, when the effect symbol displayed as the reach symbol is composed of a number, a character image, and a panel image, the first stage effect that represents the number and the character image but does not represent the panel image. An image may be displayed, or a first-stage effect image that represents a number and a panel image but does not represent a character image may be displayed. In addition, a first-stage effect image representing any one of the three components (numbers, character image, panel image) constituting the effect image may be displayed.

Further, in the present embodiment, there is a possibility that a reach can be established with a predetermined effect symbol by the first stage effect (see FIG. 18C) in a state where scroll display is performed for all three symbol sequences. An example was given in which it was suggested that there was a case where the reach was established (in the production pattern suggested by the first stage production) by the subsequent success production. On the other hand, in another embodiment, for example, in a situation where the seven symbols included in the left column are pseudo-stopped on the display screen 70 and the scroll display of the symbol columns in the right column and the middle column is continued. When the first-stage effect suggesting the seven symbols is performed, a configuration may be adopted in which the reach establishment with the seven symbols is confirmed at the time when the first-stage effect is performed.

Further, in the present embodiment, a case where the stage suggestion effect (and success effect) is executed during the suggestion period from the start of the symbol variation in which the stage suggestion effect is performed until a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) elapses will be described. bottom. On the other hand, in other embodiments, the period from the start of the symbol variation in which the stage suggestion effect is performed to the establishment of the reach by the effect symbol is set as the suggestion period, and the stage suggestion effect (and success) is performed during this suggestion period. The production) may be executed.

Further, in the present embodiment, for example, in the case where the stage suggestion effect ending in the third stage suggests the effect during the first period, the effect during the second period, and the effect during the third period in the same order as the actual execution order. explained. On the other hand, in another embodiment, for example, the first stage production suggests the production during the third period, the second stage production suggests the production during the first period, and the third stage production suggests the third stage production. It is also possible to suggest the production during the period in an order different from the actual execution order, such as suggesting the production during the period.

Further, in the present embodiment, the case where the upper limit of the number of stages of the stage suggestion effect is "3" has been described as an example, but the upper limit of the number of stages of the stage suggestion effect is not limited to "3", but is "2" or ". It may be 4 ”or more. Further, the upper limit of the number of stages may be set to "1" so that the stage suggestion effect is not continued step by step.

Further, in the present embodiment, the success effect or the failure effect is executed after the stage suggestion effect is executed, and the effect is actually executed during the period suggested by the stage suggestion effect only when the success effect is executed. The case was explained. On the other hand, in other embodiments, when the stage suggestion effect is executed as a configuration in which the success effect or the failure effect is not performed, the effect during the period suggested by the stage suggestion effect is always within the same fluctuation. A configuration such as being executed may be adopted.

Further, here, the case where the stage suggestion effect is executed when the effect is controlled in the second effect mode has been described as an example, but the stage suggestion effect is executed when the effect is controlled in the first effect mode. You may try to do it. In this case, in the first effect mode, since the effect symbol composed of the numbers to which the character image is not added is displayed, the numbers (for example, "3") constituting the effect symbol are displayed in color. On the other hand, a first-stage production image that expresses the numbers in monochrome is displayed, or a first-stage production image that expresses the above numbers in another form, such as "Is it possible to reach with three?" Is displayed. You can do it.

Further, in the present embodiment, the case where the stage suggestion effect is executed based on the determination result of the first special symbol determination has been described as an example, but in other embodiments, the reserved right of the first special symbol determination is supported. Based on the pre-judgment result to be performed, the stage suggestion effect is performed before the pre-reading target variation (variation display of the first special symbol that is started in response to the execution of the reserved first special symbol determination) is started. May be executed. Further, the stage suggestion effect may be executed by using both the period until the look-ahead target change is started and the period from the start of the look-ahead target change until a predetermined time elapses.

[About finalized notification production]
Next, with reference to FIG. 20, the definite notification effect executed by the gaming machine 1 will be described. Here, FIG. 20 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the features of each definite notification effect that can be executed by the gaming machine 1. The effect effect means used in FIG. 20 is an effect means used for each definite notification effect described in the effect type column, "image display" means the display screen 70, and "speaker" is a speaker. 38 means, "ramp" means frame lamp 37 and board surface lamp 5, and "vibration" means vibration motor 128. Further, "○" in these "image display", "speaker", "lamp", and "vibration" means that the effect means is used, and "-" means that the effect means is not used. Means. For example, if the "image display" and "speaker" fields are "○" and the "lamp" and "vibration" fields are "-", the frame lamp 37, the board lamp 5, and the vibration motor 128 are used. This means that the definite notification effect using the display screen 70 and the speaker 38 is executed without doing so.

As described above, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the main CPU 81 determines that the jackpot game is to be executed, the sub CPU 91 executes the hit notification effect (see FIG. 12 (I)). In addition, when the main CPU 81 determines that the sub CPU 91 executes the jackpot game, the jackpot game is executed prior to the above-mentioned hit notification effect (in other words, the hit notification effect is executed). May be executed. As described above, since the final notification effect is an effect of notifying in advance that the hit notification effect will be executed, it is characterized in that it is not executed when the hit notification effect is not performed.

As illustrated in FIG. 20, this definite notification effect is a definite notification effect executed when the game is controlled in the normal game state, and when the game is controlled in the probabilistic game state or the time-saving game state. It is classified into a definite notification effect that is executed in and a definite notification effect that is executed during the execution of the jackpot game.

<Confirmed notification effect in normal game state>
As illustrated in FIG. 20, the definite notification effect executed when the game is controlled in the normal game state includes an icon display effect of the definite notification mode, a notice effect of the definite notification mode, and a definite notification mode. There are a title display effect, a cut-in during a specific reach, a first announcement effect, a second announcement effect, a confirmation button effect, a special character appearance effect, and a button strong vibration effect.

When the game is controlled in the normal game state, it is difficult for the second starting port 22 to win the game ball, so the player makes a left-handed strike aimed at the first starting port 21. Therefore, when the game is controlled in the normal game state, the second special symbol determination is not executed, and basically, the first special symbol determination is executed. The final notification effect in the normal game state is the determination result of the first special symbol determination executed on the condition that the game ball wins in the first start port 21 when the game is controlled in the normal game state. Is a "big hit" and is executed on condition that the effect lottery executed by the sub CPU 91 is won by using the definite notification effect random number (see step S1662 in FIG. 61). In other words, the execution condition of the definite notification effect in the normal game state is that the determination result of the first special symbol determination in the normal game state is "big hit" and the effect lottery using the definite notification effect random number is won. be.

However, there is a definite notification effect in the normal game state that definitively notifies that it is a probabilistic jackpot, and one of the execution conditions for this definite notification effect is that the type of jackpot is a probabilistic jackpot. Become.

(Icon display effect of confirmed notification mode)
The icon display effect of the definite notification mode is a definite notification effect performed by using the display screen 70 and the speaker 38 without using the frame lamp 37, the board lamp 5, and the vibration motor 128. Specifically, the icon display effect of this definite notification mode is a display effect of displaying the rainbow-colored hold icon (or the rainbow-colored icon), and the start of the variable display of the first special symbol (and the effect symbol). It is performed at times or during the variable display of the first special symbol (and the effect symbol).

As described above, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the hold icon or the icon change effect targeting the icon is performed, and the icon of the definite notification mode is performed by any of the five icon change effects illustrated below. Display effect is realized. The first icon change effect changes the display color of the hold icon (rainbow) as the hold icon shifts in the hold icon display area 71 at the start of the variable display of the first special symbol (and the effect symbol). It is an icon change effect that changes from a display color other than color to rainbow color. Since the second icon change effect is in the variable display of the first special symbol (and the effect symbol) corresponding to the icon displayed in the icon display area 72, the second icon change effect is set at a predetermined position in the hold icon display area 71. Regarding the displayed hold icon, it is an icon change effect that changes the display color of the hold icon to rainbow color (from a display color other than rainbow color).

In the third icon change effect, the game ball won a prize in the first starting port 21 in a state where the variation display of the first special symbol is not performed and the right to judge the first special symbol is not reserved. Accordingly, this is an icon change effect in which the rainbow-colored icon is newly displayed in the icon display area 72. In the fourth icon change effect, as the hold icon shifts from the hold icon display area 71 to the icon display area 72 and is displayed as a new icon, the display color of the icon (other than rainbow color) is changed. It is an icon change effect that changes from the display color of (from the display color of) to rainbow color. The fifth icon change effect is during the pre-reach effect, when the reach is established, at the timing when the reach effect develops from one reach effect to another, at a predetermined timing during the predetermined reach effect (for example, SPSP reach), etc. , This is an icon change effect that changes the display color of the icon displayed in the icon display area 72 to a rainbow color (from a display color other than the rainbow color).

In the game machine 1 of the present embodiment, the icon change effect is produced by the icon change effect pattern setting process (see FIG. 50) of step S517, which is executed when the sub CPU 91 receives the hold command from the main control board 80. In this icon change effect pattern setting process, the rainbow color is selected as the final display color of the icon, so that the icon display effect of the final notification mode is realized.

Further, in the present embodiment, when such an icon display effect of the definite notification mode is performed on the display screen 70, a case where a special effect sound dedicated to the icon display effect of the definite notification mode is output from the speaker 38 is taken as an example. In addition to this, for example, during the period from when the display color of the icon changes to rainbow color until a predetermined time (for example, 1 second) elapses, both the frame lamp 37 and the board lamp 5 or any of them One of them may emit light in rainbow colors, or the vibration motor 128 may be driven to vibrate the first effect button 35.

Further, in the present embodiment, the case where the icon display effect of the definite notification mode can be executed regardless of whether the type of the jackpot related to the first special symbol determination in the normal gaming state is "probability variation jackpot" or "normal jackpot". As described above, in another embodiment, the icon display effect of the definite notification mode is executed for a part of the case of the "probability change jackpot", while the icon display effect of the definite notification mode is performed in the case of the "normal jackpot". A configuration such as not executing may be adopted.

(Preliminary production of final notification mode)
The notice effect of the definite notification mode is a definite notification effect performed by using the display screen 70, the speaker 38, the frame lamp 37, and the board lamp 5 without using the vibration motor 128. There are a plurality of advance notice effects that function as advance notice effects of this definite notification mode, for example, an effect of displaying a cut-in image expressed using rainbow colors, an effect of displaying a button image expressed using rainbow colors, and an effect of displaying a button image expressed using rainbow colors. Examples include an effect of displaying the number of steps expressed using rainbow colors and an effect of displaying a background image expressed using rainbow colors.

The effect of displaying the cut-in image expressed using rainbow colors is as follows.
That is, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, as described above, the first effect button operation promotion effect (see FIG. 12F) is executed when the end of the SPSP reach is approached, and the first effect button operation promotion is performed. In response to the operation of the first effect button 35 for the effect, a cut-in is generated in which a predetermined cut-in image is superimposed and displayed on the effect image displayed on the display screen 70 (see FIG. 12 (G)). In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, although not shown in the figure, as this cut-in, a cut-in image including five characters and expressed using rainbow colors is displayed on the display screen 70. A rainbow cut-in that is superimposed on the effect image may occur.

As described above based on FIG. 12 (G) and the like, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, any one of three types of cut-ins, green cut-in, red cut-in, and gold cut-in, occurs. These cut-ins may occur in both the case where the determination result of the first special symbol determination in the normal gaming state is "big hit" and the case where the determination result is "missing". On the other hand, in order to make the above rainbow cut-in function as a notice effect (a notice effect having a jackpot reliability of 100%) that functions as a definite notification effect, the determination result of the first special symbol determination in the normal gaming state is "big hit". It has a feature different from the above three types of cut-in that it occurs in a part of the case of "" and does not occur in the case of "loss".

Further, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the first effect button operation promotion effect illustrated in FIG. 12 (G) is executed only at the timing approaching the final stage of the SPSP reach, and is performed during the pre-reach effect or during the normal reach. , Not executed during SP reach. Further, if the first effect button 35 is not operated during the valid period in which the first effect button operation promotion effect is performed, the cut-in does not occur. Therefore, the rainbow cut-in is in the variable display of the first special symbol in which the SPSP reach is executed, and at the timing when the first effect button 35 is operated during the valid period related to the first effect button operation promotion effect. It has the characteristic that it is only executed. Therefore, for example, the rainbow cut-in does not occur immediately after the start of the variable display of the first special symbol in the normal game state or during the variable display of the first special symbol in which the SPSP reach is not performed. This also applies to the above three types of cut-ins.

In the present embodiment, a case where the cut-in does not occur unless the first effect button 35 is operated during the valid period related to the above-mentioned first effect button operation promotion effect will be described as an example, but in other embodiments, the case will be described. , Even if the first effect button 35 is not operated during the valid period, a cut-in (one of the above three types of cut-in and a rainbow cut-in) is generated at the timing when the valid period ends. good.

The effect of displaying the button image expressed using rainbow colors is as follows.
In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the first effect button operation promotion effect (for example, FIG. 12F) that prompts the player to operate the first effect button 35 during the variable display of the first special symbol in the normal gaming state. (See) and the second effect button operation promotion effect (see, for example, FIG. 12 (H)) that prompts the player to operate the second effect button 36, and the first effect button image expressed using rainbow colors is the first. 1 The effect button operation promotion effect may be displayed during the effect, or the second effect button image expressed using rainbow colors may be displayed during the second effect button operation promotion effect.

In the game machine 1 of the present embodiment, the first effect button image expressed using the same color (normal color) as the actual color of the first effect button 35 during the valid period related to the first effect button operation promotion effect. Is displayed, the first effect button image expressing the first effect button 35 using red is displayed, and the first effect button image expressing the first effect button 35 using rainbow colors is displayed. It may be displayed. The color of these first effect button images represents the reliability of the jackpot, and when the red first effect button image is displayed, the jackpot is higher than when the normal color first effect button image is displayed. High reliability. Further, the jackpot reliability is higher when the rainbow-colored first effect button image is displayed than when the red first effect button image is displayed.

The normal color first effect button image and the red first effect button image are the determination results of the first special symbol determination performed at the start of the variable display of the first special symbol accompanied by the first effect button operation promotion effect. Is displayed regardless of whether is a "big hit" or a "miss". On the other hand, the rainbow-colored first effect button image is displayed in a part of the case of "big hit" in order to function as a notice effect (notice effect having a jackpot reliability of 100%) that functions as a final notification effect. , It has a feature different from the normal color first effect button image and the red first effect button image that it is not displayed when it is "missing".

Further, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the second effect expressed by using the same color (normal color) as the actual color of the second effect button 36 during the valid period related to the second effect button operation promotion effect. The case where the button image is displayed, the case where the second effect button image expressing the second effect button 36 using red color is displayed, and the case where the second effect button 36 expressing the second effect button 36 using rainbow colors is displayed. Images may be displayed. The color of these second effect button images represents the reliability of the jackpot, and when the red second effect button image is displayed, the jackpot is higher than when the normal color second effect button image is displayed. High reliability. Further, the jackpot reliability is higher when the rainbow-colored second effect button image is displayed than when the red second effect button image is displayed.

The normal color second effect button image and the red second effect button image are the determination results of the first special symbol determination performed at the start of the variable display of the first special symbol accompanied by the second effect button operation promotion effect. Is displayed regardless of whether is a "big hit" or a "miss". On the other hand, the rainbow-colored second effect button image is displayed in a part of the case of "big hit" in order to function as a notice effect (notice effect having a jackpot reliability of 100%) that functions as a final notification effect. , It has a feature different from the normal color second effect button image and the red second effect button image that it is not displayed when it is "missing".

It should be noted that the effect of displaying the first effect button image (or the second effect button image) in rainbow colors prompts the player to operate the first effect button 35 (or the second effect button 36). , The first effect button operation promotion effect (or the first effect button operation promotion effect) is performed during the valid period, but is not performed outside the valid period (for example, immediately after the start of the variation display of the first special symbol). There is a feature.

Further, although not shown in the figure, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the operation of the first effect button is promoted even during the SPSP reach such as during the pre-reach effect and the normal reach, and the first effect button is performed. A predetermined effect is performed according to the operation of 35. For example, when the first effect button 35 is operated in response to the promotion of the operation of the first effect button performed during the pre-reach effect, a notice effect called a dialogue notice in which a predetermined character emits a dialogue may be performed. Therefore, regarding the promotion of the operation of the first effect button other than during the SPSP reach, the effect of displaying the first effect button image in rainbow colors may be performed.

Further, in the present embodiment, as a notice effect that functions as a final notification effect, a case where the first effect button image and the second effect button image are displayed in rainbow colors will be described as an example, but the same as these effect button images. As the effect button image to be performed, for example, the first effect button image expressing the first effect button 35 using gold and the second effect button image expressing the second effect button 36 using gold may be further displayed. good.

The effect of displaying the number of steps expressed using rainbow colors is as follows.
In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the above-mentioned step-up notice may be executed based on FIG. 11C or the like during the variable display of the first special symbol in the normal gaming state. This step-up notice is, for example, a notice effect performed during the pre-reach effect, and the display mode of the effect image related to the step-up notice is changed stepwise, and the effect sound related to the step-up notice is output from the speaker 38. It is a production.

In this step-up notice, the characters "STEP 1" are displayed during the production of step 1 and the characters "STEP 2" are displayed during the production of step 2 in order to inform the stage of the production in an easy-to-understand manner. Is displayed, and characters indicating the current number of stages are displayed, such that the characters "STEP 3" are displayed during the production of step 3.

When such a step-up notice is given, the characters indicating the current number of steps are usually displayed in black. On the other hand, the current number of stages is shown for a part of the case where the judgment result of the first special symbol judgment performed at the start of the variation display of the first special symbol for which the step-up notice is given is "big hit". The characters are displayed in rainbow colors.

Here, in the effect of displaying the characters indicating the current number of stages in black, the judgment result of the first special symbol judgment performed at the start of the variable display of the first special symbol in which the step-up notice is given is "big hit". It is feasible in both some cases and in the case of "missing". On the other hand, the effect of displaying the characters indicating the current number of steps in rainbow color (the effect of displaying the number of steps expressed using rainbow color) is an effect that functions as a definite notification effect. There is a feature that it is executed in some cases of "big hit", but not executed in the case of "missing".

In the present embodiment, for example, the characters "STEP1", "STEP2", and "STEP3", which are displayed as the step-up notice changes from step 1 to step 3, are all displayed. The case of displaying in rainbow colors will be described as an example, but in other embodiments, for example, the characters "STEP1" are displayed in black, the characters "STEP2" are displayed in black, and the characters "STEP3" are displayed in rainbow colors. Only the characters indicating the final number of steps may be displayed in rainbow colors, such as displaying in color.

The effect of displaying the background image expressed using rainbow colors is as follows.
In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, whether the determination result of the first special symbol determination performed at the start of the variation display of the first special symbol in the normal gaming state is "big hit" or "missing". Even so, basically, when the effect is controlled in the first normal mode, the background image dedicated to the first normal mode is displayed on the display screen 70, and when the effect is controlled in the second normal mode. The background image dedicated to the second normal mode is displayed on the display screen 70, and when the effect is controlled in the third normal mode, the background image dedicated to the third normal mode is displayed on the display screen 70.

On the other hand, in some cases where the determination result of the first special symbol determination is "big hit", a special background image expressed using rainbow colors is displayed instead of the background image dedicated to each normal mode. It is displayed on the screen 70. Specifically, the first background change in which the dedicated background image of any of the normal modes (for example, the background image dedicated to the first normal mode) changes to the special background image with the start of the variable display of the first special symbol. Or, in the middle of the variable display of the first special symbol, a second background change is performed in which the dedicated background image in any of the normal modes is changed to the special background image.

Since the effect of displaying the special background image in this way is an effect that functions as a definite notification effect, the determination result of the first special symbol determination performed at the start of the variable display of the first special symbol in the normal gaming state. When is "missing", the above-mentioned first background change is not performed at the start of the symbol change, or the above-mentioned second background change is not performed during the symbol change.

Up to this point, as the advance notice effect of the definite notification mode, the effect of displaying the cut-in image expressed using the rainbow color, the effect of displaying the button image expressed using the rainbow color, and the effect of displaying the button image expressed using the rainbow color have been expressed. The effect of displaying the number of steps and the effect of displaying a background image expressed using rainbow colors have been described, but in the advance notice effect of these definite notification modes, the sub CPU 91 receives a fluctuation start command from the main control board 80. In the advance notice effect pattern setting process (see FIG. 57) of step S164 to be executed in response to the selection, an effect pattern for displaying an effect image expressed using rainbow colors is selected, and a variation including information indicating the selection result is included. This is realized by transmitting the effect start command to the image / sound control board 100 and the lamp control board 120.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the notice effect of the definite notification mode is performed using the display screen 70, a special effect sound dedicated to the notice effect of the definite notification mode is output from the speaker 38, and the notice effect of the definite notification mode is output. A case where the frame lamp 37 and the board lamp 5 are made to emit light with a dedicated light emitting pattern will be described as an example, but in addition to this, in another embodiment, the vibration motor 128 is driven at the execution timing of the advance notice effect of the definite notification mode. The first effect button 35 may be vibrated.

Further, in the present embodiment, a case where the advance notice effect of the definite notification mode can be executed regardless of whether the type of the jackpot related to the first special symbol determination in the normal gaming state is "probability variation jackpot" or "normal jackpot" will be described. However, in other embodiments, the advance notice effect of the definite notification mode is executed for a part of the case of "probability change jackpot", while the advance notice effect of the definite notification mode is not executed in the case of "normal jackpot". The configuration may be adopted.

(Title display effect of final notification mode)
In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, at the start of the SPSP reach, for example, as the content of the SPSP reach, a title such as "VS enemy character X" indicating that the main character fights with the enemy character X during the SPSP reach is displayed. Will be done. This title may be displayed in black or red, and the jackpot reliability of the effect of displaying the black title (black title) is set to about 20%, and the red title (red). The jackpot reliability of the effect of displaying the title) is set to about 45%.

On the other hand, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the determination result of the first special symbol determination performed at the start of the variation display of the first special symbol in the normal gaming state in which the SPSP reach is performed is "big hit". In some of the above titles, the above titles may be displayed in rainbow colors at the start of SPSP reach. The jackpot reliability of the effect of displaying this rainbow title is 100%, and as described above, it is executed in a part of the case of "big hit", but it is not executed in the case of "missing". ..

In the present embodiment, the title display effect (effect of displaying the rainbow title) in the final notification mode uses only the display screen 70 without using the speaker 38, the frame lamp 37, the board lamp 5, and the vibration motor 128. However, in another embodiment, at least one of the speaker 38, the frame lamp 37, the board lamp 5, and the vibration motor 128 is further used to form a definite notification mode. The title display effect may be executed.

(Cut-in during specific reach)
In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, as described above, a cut-in occurs in response to the operation of the first effect button 35 with respect to the effect of promoting the operation of the first effect button during SPSP reach. On the other hand, a cut representing a special character (special character) during normal reach or SP reach, regardless of the player's operation on the first effect button 35, without the first effect button operation promotion effect being performed. A special character cut-in may occur in which the in-image is superimposed on the displayed production image.

This special character cut-in basically occurs during SP reach, and if a special character cut-in occurs during SP reach, it is more reliable than when a special character cut-in does not occur during SP reach. It has the characteristic of increasing the degree. That is, the special character cut-in functions as a chance-up effect during SP reach.

On the other hand, when normal reach is performed along with the variation display of the first special symbol in the normal game state, regarding a part of the case where the determination result of the first special symbol determination performed at the start of this symbol variation is "big hit". , A special character cut-in occurs during normal reach. Since this special character cut-in is an effect that functions as a definite notification effect, if the determination result of the first special symbol determination is "missing", a special character cut-in will occur during SP reach. However, it does not occur during normal reach.

In this way, since the special character cut-in during the normal reach functions as a definite notification effect, the player can enjoy the game while expecting that the special character cut-in will occur during the normal reach.

In the present embodiment, the case where the special effect sound dedicated to the special character cut-in is output from the speaker 38 as the effect image related to the special character cut-in is displayed on the display screen 70 will be described. The effect means used for the special character cut-in is not limited to the display screen 70 and the speaker 38, and for example, at least one of the frame lamp 37, the board lamp 5, and the vibration motor 128 is further used. You may also execute a special character cut-in.

(1st announcement production)
The first notification effect is performed when the determination result of the first special symbol determination in the normal game state is "big hit" and the first special symbol determination is executed. Immediately after the start of the variation display of the above, or when the reach is established during the variation display of the first special symbol, it is an effect that deterministically notifies that the hit notification effect is executed. Specifically, the first notification effect is an effect of emitting a part of the color LEDs constituting the board lamp 5 in rainbow colors and outputting a predetermined one notification sound from the speaker 38.

Since this first notification effect is an effect of definitively notifying the "big hit" prior to the hit notification effect, as with the other final notification effects, the above-mentioned first special symbol determination determination result Is executed in some cases when it is a "big hit", but it is not executed when it is a "miss".

(2nd announcement production)
The second first notification effect is performed in response to the execution of the first special symbol determination when the determination result of the first special symbol determination in the normal game state is "big hit". This is an effect that deterministically notifies that the hit notification effect will be executed at the end of a predetermined reach effect (for example, SP reach or SPSP reach) during the variable display of. Specifically, in this second first notification effect, a one-issue notification effect image expressed using rainbow colors is displayed on the display screen 70, the frame lamp 37 is made to emit light in rainbow colors, and the first This is an effect of outputting a one-shot notification sound different from the one-shot notification sound output during the one-shot notification effect from the speaker 38.

Although the production mode of this second notification production is different from that of the first notification production as described above, the execution conditions are the same, and it is decided by the sub CPU 91 to execute the one notification production. If so, for example, one of the one-shot notification effects is selected by a production lottery, and the one-shot notification effect is executed. Therefore, both the first notification effect and the second notification effect are not executed within the same fluctuation.

(Confirm button production)
The confirmation button effect is a confirmation notification effect that deterministically notifies that the hit notification effect will be performed by using the frame lamp 37 and the vibration motor 128 around the first effect button 35.

In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the jackpot reliability is suggested by the combination of the emission color of the frame lamp 37 around the first effect button 35 and the strength of the vibration of the first effect button 35 (the drive pattern of the vibration motor 128). Button production is executed. In the present embodiment, this button effect may occur as a chance-up effect during the valid period related to the second effect button operation promotion effect at the end of the SPSP reach. That is, there are cases where the button effect occurs and cases where it does not occur, and there is a feature that the jackpot reliability is higher when it occurs than when it does not occur. There are the following types of button effects.

For example, a first button effect may be performed in which the frame lamp 37 around the first effect button 35 emits blue light and the first effect button 35 vibrates weakly, and the jackpot reliability of this first button effect is about 12%. Is set to. For example, a second button effect may be performed in which the frame lamp 37 around the first effect button 35 emits green light and the first effect button 35 vibrates strongly, and the jackpot reliability of this second button effect is about 56%. Is set to.

Further, for example, a third button effect may be performed in which the frame lamp 37 around the first effect button 35 emits red light and the first effect button 35 vibrates strongly, and this third button effect has a jackpot reliability. Is set to 100%, and functions as the above-mentioned confirmation button effect. This third button effect is not executed unless the determination result of the first special symbol determination in the normal game state is "big hit", and the big hit becomes rich when the third button effect is executed.

Further, for example, a fourth button effect may be performed in which the frame lamp 37 around the first effect button 35 emits rainbow colors and the first effect button 35 vibrates strongly, and this fourth button effect is a jackpot reliability. The degree is set to 100%, and it functions as the above-mentioned confirmation button effect. This 4th button effect is not executed unless the determination result of the 1st special symbol determination in the normal game state is "big hit" and the type of the big hit is "probability change big hit", and the 4th button effect is When it is executed, it becomes a probable change jackpot rich. That is, when the fourth button effect occurs during the variation display of the first special symbol, the hit notification effect for notifying the probability variation jackpot is always executed at the end of the variation display of the first special symbol.

During the valid period related to the second effect button operation promotion effect in which the first button effect to the fourth button effect occur, the operation of the second effect button 36 instead of the first effect button 35 is an effective period. Therefore, in another embodiment, a vibration motor for vibrating the second effect button 36 is provided, and the vibration motor and the frame lamp 37 around the second effect button 36 are used to produce the first button effect to the fourth button effect. May be executed. In addition, the player can operate one effect button, and the vibration motor that vibrates the effect button and the frame lamp 37 around the effect button are used to execute the first button effect to the fourth button effect. You may try to do it.

Further, in the present embodiment, the case where the first button effect to the fourth button effect are executed by using the frame lamp 37 and the vibration motor 128 without using the display screen 70, the speaker 38, and the board surface lamp 5. As will be described, in other embodiments, at least one of the display screen 70, the speaker 38, and the board lamp 5 may be further used to perform these button effects.

(Special character appearance production)
The special character appearance effect in the normal game state is a definite notification effect that deterministically notifies that a hit notification effect for notifying the probability variation jackpot is performed by using the display screen 70 and the speaker 38, and is a special character (special). The effect display showing the appearance of the character) is displayed on the display screen 70, and the sound of the special character such as "It's a certain change!" Is output from the speaker 38. In this special character appearance effect, this first special symbol determination is performed in a part when the determination result of the first special symbol determination in the normal game state is "big hit" and the probability variation jackpot is selected as the type of the jackpot. It is executed during the variable display of the first special symbol corresponding to. In the present embodiment, the special character appearance effect is executed at various timings such as during the pre-reach effect, when the reach is established, during the normal reach, during the SP reach, and during the SPSP reach.

In this embodiment, a case where the special character appearance effect in the normal game state is executed by using the display screen 70 and the speaker 38 without using the frame lamp 37, the board lamp 5, and the vibration motor 128 will be described. However, in other embodiments, at least one of the frame lamp 37, the board lamp 5, and the vibration motor 128 may be further used to perform the special character appearance effect.

(Button strong vibration production)
The button strong vibration effect is a definite notification effect that deterministically notifies that a hit notification effect will be performed by controlling the drive of the vibration motor 128 and vibrating the first effect button 35 strongly. This button strong vibration effect differs from the above-mentioned first button effect to fourth button effect in the following points.

That is, while the first button effect to the fourth button effect are executed using the frame lamp 37 and the vibration motor 128 as described above, the button strong vibration effect does not use the frame lamp 37. It differs from the first button effect to the fourth button effect in that it is executed using only the vibration motor 128. Further, while the first button effect to the fourth button effect are executed during the valid period related to the second effect button operation promotion effect at the end of the SPSP reach, the button strong vibration effect is the first in the normal gaming state. It differs from the 1st button effect to the 4th button effect in that it is executed immediately after the start of the variable display of the special symbol or when a cut-in occurs during SPSP reach.

In this embodiment, a configuration is adopted in which a strong button vibration effect is performed using only the vibration motor 128 so that only the player playing the game machine 1 can recognize that the jackpot is rich. ing. On the other hand, in another embodiment, at least one of the display screen 70, the speaker 38, the frame lamp 37, and the board lamp 5 may be further used to execute the button strong vibration effect. ..

Up to this point, various definite notification effects that are executed when the game is controlled in the normal game state have been described, but in the game machine 1 of the present embodiment, the variable display of the first special symbol in the normal game state starts. The definite notification effect may be executed a plurality of times between the time when the sound is generated and the time when the product is finished. In this way, when the definite notification effect is executed a plurality of times within the same fluctuation, the same definite notification effect is executed a plurality of times, and two or more definite notification effects different from each other are executed in order as a result. There are times when the final notification effect is executed multiple times within the same fluctuation.

<Definite notification effect in the probabilistic game state (or time-saving game state)>
As illustrated in FIG. 20, the definite notification effect executed when the game is controlled in the normal game state (or the time-saving game state) includes a special character appearance effect, a one-shot notification effect, and a rainbow color. There are production, 7 design tempai, and reach voice production.

When the game is controlled in the probabilistic game state (or the time-saving game state), it is easy for the second start port 22 to win the game ball, so that the player strikes right at the second start port 22. Is done. Further, when both the first special symbol determination and the second special symbol determination are suspended, the second special symbol determination is executed with priority over the first special symbol determination, so that the probabilistic gaming state ( Or, when the game is controlled in the time-saving game state), the second special symbol determination is basically executed.

In each of the definite notification effects in the probabilistic game state (or time-saving game state), it is a condition that the game ball wins in the second starting port 22 when the game is controlled in the probabilistic game state (or time-saving game state). On the condition that the determination result of the second special symbol determination executed as is "big hit" and the effect lottery executed by the sub CPU 91 is won by using the definite notification effect random number (see step S1662 in FIG. 61). Will be executed. In other words, the execution condition of the definite notification effect in the probabilistic game state (or time-saving game state) is that the determination result of the second special symbol determination in the probabilistic game state (or time-saving game state) is "big hit" and the definite notification. Winning a production lottery using production random numbers.

In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the jackpot related to the first special symbol determination may be a "probability variation jackpot" or a "normal jackpot" (see FIG. 6B), so that the normal game When the definite notification effect is executed while the game is controlled in the state, the hit notification effect for notifying the "probability change jackpot" is executed, and the hit notification effect for notifying the "normal jackpot" is executed. It may be executed. On the other hand, since all the jackpots related to the second special symbol determination are "probability variation jackpots" (see FIG. 6C), the definite notification effect is generated when the game is controlled in the probability variation game state (or normal game state). When it is executed, the probability variation jackpot becomes rich when the definite notification effect is executed, except when the first special symbol determination is digested.

(Special character appearance production)
The special character appearance effect in the probabilistic game state (or time-saving game state) is a definite notification effect that deterministically notifies that a hit notification effect will be performed using the display screen 70, and is a special character (special character). This is an effect on the display screen 70 to display an effect indicating the appearance of. This special character appearance effect is a second special corresponding to this second special symbol judgment in a part of the case where the judgment result of the second special symbol judgment in the probabilistic game state (or the time saving game state) is "big hit". Executed during the variable display of the symbol. In the present embodiment, the special character appearance effect is executed at various timings such as immediately after the variable display of the second special symbol is started and when the reach is established.

In this embodiment, the speaker 38, the frame lamp 37, the board lamp 5, and the vibration motor 128 are not used, and only the display screen 70 is used to produce a special character appearance in the probabilistic game state (or time-saving game state). The case where it is executed will be described, but in another embodiment, at least one of the speaker 38, the frame lamp 37, the board lamp 5, and the vibration motor 128 is further used to execute the special character appearance effect. It may be.

(One-shot announcement production)
The one-shot notification effect in the probabilistic game state (or time-saving game state) is the second special symbol judgment when the judgment result of the second special symbol judgment in the probabilistic game state (or time-saving game state) is "big hit". Is deterministically notified that the hit notification effect will be executed immediately after the start of the variation display of the second special symbol performed in response to the execution of, or when the reach is established during the variation display of the second special symbol. It is a production. Specifically, this one-shot notification effect is an effect in which the frame lamp 37 and the board lamp 5 are made to emit light in rainbow colors, and a predetermined one-shot notification sound is output from the speaker 38.

It should be noted that the one-shot notification effect in this probabilistic game state (or time-saving game state) is an effect of definitively notifying the "big hit" prior to the hit notification effect, as in the other definite notification effects. There is a feature that it is executed in a part when the judgment result of the second special symbol determination is "big hit", but it is not executed when it is "missing".

(Rainbow color production)
The rainbow-colored effect is a variation of the second special symbol performed in response to the second special symbol determination when the determination result of the second special symbol determination in the probabilistic game state (or time-saving game state) is "big hit". This is an effect of displaying an effect image expressed using rainbow colors on the display screen 70 during display. Since this rainbow-colored effect is an effect of definitively notifying the "big hit" prior to the hit notification effect, the determination result of the above-mentioned second special symbol determination is "big hit", as in the other definite notification effects. There is a feature that it is executed in some cases, but it is not executed in the case of "missing".

(7 design tempai)
The 7-symbol tempai is an effect of establishing a reach with 7 symbols during the variable display of the 2nd special symbol in the probabilistic game state (or the time-saving game state), and the player can win the most prize balls of 9R. A hit notification effect (for example, a hit notification effect that pseudo-stops three effect symbols indicating doublets of "777" and then makes a final stop) is performed to notify that the jackpot game (see FIG. 6C) is executed. It is a definite notification effect that notifies in advance that it will be done.

In this way, since the 7 symbol tempai is an effect of notifying the jackpot (probability variation jackpot) of 9R in advance, the determination result of the second special symbol determination in the probability variation game state (or the time saving game state) becomes the "big hit". Moreover, it is an execution condition that the jackpot symbol Y3 (see FIG. 6C) is selected as the jackpot symbol that is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 42, and even if it is a "big hit", another jackpot It is not executed when a symbol is selected or when it is "missing".

It should be noted that the jackpot reliability of the reach establishment effect of establishing the reach with 7 symbols during the variable display of the 2nd special symbol in the probabilistic game state (or the time-saving gaming state) is 100%, while the reach is established with 3 symbols. The jackpot reliability of the reach establishment effect is set to 50%, and the jackpot reliability of the reach establishment effect that establishes the reach with other effect symbols is set to 20%.

Further, in the present embodiment, the case where the 7 symbol tempai is performed using the display screen 70 and the speaker 38 will be described as an example, but in other embodiments, the frame lamp 37, the board lamp 5, and the vibration motor 128 will be described. At least one of them may be further used to perform the 7-symbol tempai.

(Reach audio production)
In the reach voice effect, during the variable display of the second special symbol in the probabilistic game state (or the time-saving game state), when the reach is established in any of the 1 symbol to the 9 symbol, the voice suggesting the reach establishment is output from the speaker 38. It is a production to output. This reach audio production includes a reach audio production that outputs a voice such as "super hot!" From the speaker 38 and a reach voice production that outputs a voice such as "reach!" From the speaker 38 a little later than the reach establishment timing. Therefore, each reach voice effect functions as a definite notification effect.

In the present embodiment, when the determination result of the second special symbol determination in the probabilistic gaming state (or the time-saving gaming state) is "missing", the variation of the second special symbol corresponding to the second special symbol determination is made. An example is a case where the speaker 38 does not output the sound suggesting that the reach is established even if the reach is established during the display, and the above-mentioned reach sound effect is executed along with the establishment of the reach in some cases of "big hit". I will explain to. On the other hand, in another embodiment, when the reach is established during the variation display of the second special symbol in the probability variation game state (or the time-saving gaming state), the variation display of the second special symbol is started. Regardless of whether the judgment result of the second special symbol judgment is "big hit", a voice (may be a sound effect, etc.) suggesting the establishment of reach is output, and a big hit is made depending on the content and output timing of this voice. A configuration in which the reliability changes may be adopted.

For example, the jackpot reliability when the voice "reach!" Is output when the reach is established is about 15%, and the jackpot reliability when the voice "chance!" Is output when the reach is established. It is about 35%, and if the voice "Gekiatsu!" Is output when the reach is established, the jackpot is rich, and if the voice "Reach!" Is output a little later than the reach is established, the jackpot is rich. An example is a configuration such as "yes".

(Other configurations related to the definite notification effect in the probabilistic game state (or time-saving game state))
In the present embodiment, the case where all the jackpots related to the second special symbol determination are "probability variation jackpots" will be described as an example, but in other embodiments, the type of jackpots related to the second special symbol determination is "probability variation jackpot". "And" normal jackpot "are prepared.

In this case, when the definite notification effect for deterministically notifying the jackpot is executed regardless of whether or not the type of jackpot is "probability variation jackpot", the execution conditions common to those illustrated in the present embodiment are satisfied. In that case, the definite notification effect may be executed. On the other hand, in the case of executing the definite notification effect for deterministically notifying that the jackpot related to the second special symbol determination is the "probability variation jackpot", in addition to the execution conditions exemplified in the present embodiment, the second special symbol determination is performed. The definite notification effect may be executed on condition that the execution condition that the type of jackpot according to the above is "probability variation jackpot" is further satisfied.

<Confirmed notification production during jackpot game>
As illustrated in FIG. 20, the definite notification effect executed during the jackpot game includes a special winning sound output effect and a special V winning notification effect.

(Special prize sound output production)
As is clear from the notation after step S236 in FIG. 63, the special winning sound output effect in the present embodiment is applied to the second large winning opening 28 during the round game of the predetermined round for opening and closing the second large winning opening 28. This is an effect of outputting a special winning sound from the speaker 38 each time the game ball wins a prize. In this special winning sound output production, the right to judge the second special symbol is reserved at the start of the round game of the predetermined round for opening and closing the second special winning opening 28, and the reserved right includes "big hit". ", And it is executed on the condition that the effect lottery for determining whether or not to execute the special winning sound output effect is won. That is, the execution condition of the special winning sound output effect is that the right of the second special symbol determination is reserved at the start of the round game of the predetermined round for opening and closing the second large winning opening 28, and the reserved right. Some of them will be judged as "big hits", and they will win the production lottery to decide whether or not to execute the special winning sound output production.

In the present embodiment, the right to determine the second special symbol, which is reserved at the start of the round game of the predetermined round for opening and closing the second winning opening 28, is determined to be a "big hit". If is not included, a configuration is adopted in which a winning sound is not output even if a game ball wins a prize in the second large winning opening 28 during this round game. Therefore, as described above, the special winning sound is output from the speaker 38 each time the game ball wins the second special winning opening 28 during the round game of the predetermined round, so that the second special symbol determination is held. It is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner that some of them are "big hits".

Further, in another embodiment, if even one execution condition of the special winning sound output effect is not satisfied, it is normal every time a game ball wins a prize in the second large winning opening 28 during the round game of the predetermined round. If the winning sound is output and all the execution conditions for the special winning sound output effect are satisfied, each time the game ball wins the second major winning opening 28 during the round game of the predetermined round (normal winning sound). A configuration such as outputting a special winning sound (different from) may be adopted.

(Special V prize notification production)
In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, regarding the jackpot related to the first special symbol determination, in order to make it difficult to understand whether or not the gaming state after the jackpot game is completed is the probability-changing gaming state, depending on the type of the probability-changing jackpot. A configuration in which the effective round games are different (see FIGS. 7A and 7B) and a configuration in which even if the gaming ball wins a V prize, that fact is not notified are adopted. On the other hand, since all the jackpots related to the second special symbol determination are probabilistic jackpots (see FIG. 6C), it is less necessary to apply the same configuration to the jackpots related to the second special symbol determination. Therefore, in the game machine 1 of the present embodiment, the effective round game in which the V winning of the game ball is valid is fixed to the fifth round game in which the second large winning opening 28 is opened, and this round game When a game ball wins a V prize, a V prize notification effect for notifying the fact is always executed.

The above-mentioned V winning notification effect is an effect executed on the condition that the game ball wins a V during the fifth round game. On the other hand, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the right of the second special symbol determination is reserved at the start of the round game of the fifth round, and the reserved right includes "big hit". A special V prize notification effect may be executed on condition that the item to be determined is included.

As described above based on FIG. 13 (D) and the like, the V prize notification effect is an effect image showing how two characters are happy to lift a (golden) star-shaped emblem containing the letter "V". Along with displaying on the display screen 70, a predetermined V winning notification sound is output from the speaker 38. On the other hand, in the special V prize notification effect, an effect image showing how five characters lift the (rainbow-colored) star-shaped emblem containing the letter "V" and rejoice is displayed on the display screen 70. , The special V winning notification sound different from the above V winning notification sound is output from the speaker 38.

In this way, in the special V prize notification effect, the display color of the star-shaped emblem, the number of characters who lift the star-shaped emblem, and the V prize notification sound output from the speaker 38 are different from the normal V prize notification effect. ing. Therefore, based on these differences, the player easily recognizes that, in addition to the V winning of the game ball, the right of the second special symbol judgment that will be judged as a big hit is reserved. It is possible to do.

The special winning sound output effect and the special V winning notification effect are effects for notifying that some of the reserved rights for the second special symbol determination include those that are determined to be big hits. In that respect, since both are common, it is less necessary to perform both of these effects during one jackpot game. Therefore, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the special winning sound output effect is executed, the normal V winning notification effect is executed without executing the special V winning notification effect, and the special winning sound output effect is executed. If not, a special V prize notification effect will be executed.

(About the gaming machine 1 capable of executing the final notification effect)
Up to this point, various definite notification effects executed by the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment have been described with reference to FIG. 20, but some of these definite notification effects have the same execution timing. Some of them have different execution timings, and when comparing two definite notification effects with different execution timings, at least one of the execution conditions and the effect mode is different, so it is extremely versatile and highly interesting. It is possible to perform the production. The gaming machine 1 capable of executing such a versatile and highly entertaining definite notification effect can be regarded as the following gaming machine.

A determination means for determining whether or not to execute a special game (for example, a jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player (for example, the main CPU 81 that executes the jackpot determination process in step S308 of FIG. 42, which will be described later).
When the determination means determines that the special game is to be executed, the special game execution means for executing the special game (for example, the main CPU 81 that executes the large winning opening opening / closing control process in step S6 of FIG. 39)
The effect control means (for example, sub CPU 91, image / sound control CPU 101, lamp CPU 121) for controlling the execution of the effect is provided.
The effect control means
A hit notification effect (for example, see FIG. 12 (I)) that notifies that the special game is executed is determined by the determination means, and a notification that the special game is executed prior to the hit notification effect. It is possible to execute a definite notification effect (for example, see FIG. 20).
There are a first case in which the definite notification effect is executed at the first execution timing and a second case in which the definite notification effect is executed at the second execution timing (see, for example, FIG. 20).
A gaming machine characterized in that at least one of an execution condition and an effect mode of a definite notification effect is different between the first case and the second case (see, for example, FIG. 20).

According to the gaming machine 1 having such a configuration, the definite notification effect executed at the second execution timing is at least one of the execution conditions and the effect mode as compared with the definite notification effect executed at the first execution timing. One is different. In this way, when comparing the definite notification effects having different execution timings, at least one of the execution conditions and the effect modes of the definite notification effect changes. Since both modes are fixed, the definite notification effect becomes monotonous, and it is possible to effectively suppress the problem that an effective definite notification effect cannot be executed.

[Reliability suggestion pair display effect]
In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, a hold icon (hold suggestion image) suggesting that the right of the first special symbol determination in the normal gaming state is reserved is displayed in a display mode based on the preliminary determination result. In addition, as an expected effect for expecting the jackpot game to be executed, an effect of displaying the expected image in a display mode based on the preliminary determination result may be performed. That is, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, a hold icon other than white, which is the default display color (see FIG. 21 (A)), and an expected image that can change stepwise (see FIG. 21 (B)). Depending on the pair, a reliability suggestion pair display effect that suggests a jackpot reliability may be executed. Hereinafter, the reliability suggestion pair display effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 21 to 23.

(Icon jackpot reliability)
FIG. 21 (A) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the jackpot reliability of the hold icon (and the icon), the hold icon, the type of the icon that the icon can change by the icon change effect, and the display of each icon. The correspondence between the mode and the jackpot reliability of each icon is illustrated. For example, when an icon change effect targeting a white hold icon (white icon: default hold icon) is executed, the white hold icon (white icon) becomes the blue hold icon (blue icon), and the green hold icon. It changes to a hold icon with a display color that suggests jackpot reliability, such as an icon (green icon), a red hold icon (red icon), and a rainbow-colored hold icon (rainbow icon). In the present embodiment, both the display color and the shape of the icon are changed by the icon change effect. Further, in the present embodiment, the white icon does not indicate the jackpot reliability, the jackpot reliability of the blue icon is set to about 3%, the jackpot reliability of the green icon is set to about 15%, and the red icon is set. The jackpot reliability of the rainbow icon is set to about 45%, and the jackpot reliability of the rainbow icon is set to 100%.

As described above, the display mode of the hold icon includes a plurality of display modes in which the degree of expectation that the jackpot game is executed is different from each other.

(Big hit reliability of expected image)
FIG. 21B is an explanatory diagram for explaining the jackpot reliability of the expected image. When the icon change effect is executed and the blue icon, green icon, red icon, or rainbow icon is displayed as the hold icon, the expected image that suggests the jackpot reliability in cooperation with the display hold icon is displayed. It may be displayed.

As this expected image, three types of expected images, a first expected image, a second expected image, and a third expected image, are prepared in the present embodiment. Here, the first expected image is a production image showing a state in which one character accumulating power is wearing a blue aura, and the second expected image is a production image showing two characters accumulating power. It is a production image showing a state of wearing a green aura, and the third expected image is a production image showing a state in which three characters who are accumulating power are wearing a red aura. When these three types of expected images are arranged in order from the one with the lowest jackpot reliability to the one with the highest jackpot reliability, the order is the first expected image, the second expected image, and the third expected image.

As described above, there are a plurality of display modes in which the expected degree of expectation at which the jackpot game is executed is different from each other.

Since these expected images suggest the jackpot reliability in cooperation with the hold icon as a special icon (hold icon of display color other than white), only the default hold icon is displayed in the present embodiment. There is a feature that the expected image is not displayed in the state where it is not displayed. Further, since the expected image cooperates with the hold icon to indicate the jackpot reliability, if the hold icon (special icon) that cooperates with the expected image is not displayed in the hold icon display area 71, the expected image Is not displayed, and as the hold icon cooperating with the expected image shifts from the hold icon display area 71 to the icon display area 72, the expected image is deleted from the display screen 70.

While the expected image is being displayed, an expected image change effect that changes the expected image being displayed may be performed. For example, the expected image change effect is performed while the first expected image is displayed, and the first expected image being displayed is changed to the second expected image, or the expected image change effect is performed while the first expected image is displayed. The first expected image being displayed is changed to the third expected image (without going through the second expected image), or the expected image change effect is performed while the second expected image is being displayed, and the second expected image being displayed is displayed. The image changes to the third expected image. Further, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the change in the display mode of the hold icon and the change in the display mode of the expected image are changed in the sub CPU 91 based on the result of the preliminary determination for the reserved right of the first special symbol determination. Controlled by.

(Reliability suggestion pair jackpot reliability)
When the hold icon and the expected image cooperate to suggest the jackpot reliability and the reliability suggestion pair display effect is performed, the icon change effect targeting the hold icon and the expected image change effect targeting the expected image Is executed individually, so the combination of the hold icon and the expected image will change as appropriate.

FIG. 22 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the jackpot reliability of the combination of the hold icon and the expected image. During the reliability suggestion pair display effect, the icon change effect and the expected image change effect are executed separately, so that the combination of the hold image and the expected image changes, and the first pair to the first pair illustrated in FIG. 22 change. Any of the 9 pairs will be displayed.

Here, the first pair is a pair composed of a blue hold icon and a first expected image (see FIG. 22 (A)). The second pair is a pair composed of a blue hold icon and a second expected image (see FIG. 22B). The third pair is a pair composed of a green hold icon and a first expected image (see FIG. 22C). The fourth pair is a pair composed of a blue hold icon and a third expected image (see FIG. 22 (D)). The fifth pair is a pair composed of a green hold icon and a second expected image (see FIG. 22 (E)).

The sixth pair is a pair composed of a red hold icon and a first expected image (see FIG. 22 (F)). The seventh pair is a pair composed of a green hold icon and a third expected image (see FIG. 22 (G)). The eighth pair is a pair composed of a red hold icon and a second expected image (see FIG. 22 (H)). The ninth pair is a pair composed of a red hold icon and a third expected image (see FIG. 22 (I)).

If the first pair to the ninth pair are arranged in order from the one with the lowest jackpot reliability to the one with the highest jackpot reliability, the first pair, the second pair, the third pair, the fourth pair, the fifth pair, the sixth pair, and the seventh pair are arranged. , 8th pair, 9th pair in that order. Further, for example, when an icon change effect of changing the blue hold icon to the green hold icon is performed while the first pair (see FIG. 22 (A)) is displayed, the first pair becomes the third pair (see FIG. 22 (A)). See C)). Further, for example, when the expected image change effect of changing the first expected image to the third expected image is performed while the third pair (see FIG. 22C) is displayed, the third pair is the seventh pair (see FIG. 22C). (See FIG. 22 (G)). Further, for example, while displaying the second pair (see FIG. 22B), an icon change effect of changing the blue hold icon to a red hold icon and an expected image change of changing the second expected image to the third expected image. When the effect is performed, the second pair changes to the ninth pair (see FIG. 22 (I)).

In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the hold icon (hold suggestion image) is displayed without executing the effect of displaying the expected image (an example of the expected effect), it is illustrated in FIG. 11 (A), for example. As described above, the display mode of the hold icon suggests the degree of expectation that the jackpot game will be executed. On the other hand, when the expected image is displayed while the hold icon is being displayed, that is, when the reliability suggestion pair display effect is being executed, both the display mode of the hold icon and the display mode of the expected image may be used. It suggests the degree of expectation that the jackpot game will be executed.

(Specific example of reliability suggestion pair display effect)
Next, a specific example of the reliability suggestion pair display effect will be described with reference to FIG. 23. Here, FIG. 23 is a screen view showing a specific example of the reliability suggestion pair display effect. In FIG. 23A, a game ball wins a prize in the first starting port 21 during the variable display of the first special symbol (and the effect symbol) corresponding to the icon displayed in the icon display area 72. An example shows that a fourth hold icon (white hold icon) corresponding to the fourth hold related to the first special symbol determination is newly displayed in the hold icon display area 71. Here, a case where the reliability suggestion pair display effect is performed based on the result of the preliminary determination regarding the right of the first special symbol determination corresponding to the fourth hold icon will be described as an example.

If the reach effect is executed during the variable display of the first special symbol corresponding to the hold icon displayed before the hold icon to be read ahead is displayed, the reliability suggestion pair display effect hinders the reach effect. On the contrary, the reach effect may interfere with the reliability suggestion pair display effect. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the fluctuation patterns related to the fluctuation display of the first special symbol corresponding to the hold icon displayed before the hold icon to be read ahead is displayed are the fluctuation patterns for loss without reach. In the case of, the reliability suggestion pair display effect is executed, and when the fluctuation pattern for big hits and the fluctuation pattern for reach loss are included, the reliability suggestion pair display effect is not executed.

FIG. 23 (B) shows the determination result of the first special symbol determination at the final stage of the variation display of the first special symbol corresponding to the icon (see FIG. 23 (A)) displayed in the icon display area 72. In order to notify that is "missing", a state in which three production symbols indicating the disparity of "283" are pseudo-stopped is illustrated. On the other hand, when the variable display of the first special symbol is completed, the lost symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 41 as the first special symbol, and the above three effect symbols are finally stopped on the display screen 70. ..

In this way, when a predetermined fixed time (0.5 seconds in the present embodiment) elapses after the lost symbol is stopped and displayed as the first special symbol, the earliest hold displayed in the hold icon display area 71 is held. The first special symbol determination corresponding to the icon (holding icon at the left end) is executed. Then, as the variable display of the first special symbol is started in response to the execution of the first special symbol determination, the earliest hold icon shifts from the hold icon display area 71 to the icon display area 72. At the same time, the scroll display of the three symbol columns is started (see FIGS. 23 (B) and 23 (C)).

Here, the variable display of the first special symbol (and the effect symbol) that was executed at the timing when the fourth right related to the first special symbol determination to be read ahead was reserved (see FIG. 23 (A)). ) Is set in advance to start the reliability suggestion pair display effect with the start of the next variation display. Then, in the present embodiment, the expected image is displayed in the central area of the display screen 70 (the area above the hold icon display area 71) during the execution of the reliability suggestion pair display effect. Therefore, three symbol rows are displayed in the upper right area of the display screen 70 (see FIG. 23 (C)). In FIG. 23 (C), a blue hold icon is displayed as the third hold icon as the hold icon to be read ahead, and the first expected image (see FIG. 21 (B)) is displayed as the expected image. The situation is illustrated. That is, FIG. 23 (C) illustrates a state in which the above-mentioned first pair is displayed based on FIG. 22 (A).

In the reliability suggestion pair display effect this time, when the display effect of FIG. 23 (C) is performed, the first pair of the first pair to the ninth pair, that is, the blue hold icon and the power are accumulated. A first expected image showing how one character is wearing a blue aura is displayed. Therefore, the player can easily recognize that the jackpot reliability is relatively low at the present time by looking at the first pair.

By the way, if a plurality of special icons are displayed while the expected image is displayed, for example, a blue hold icon and a green hold icon are displayed at the same time, which of the special icons corresponds to the expected image is held. The player may not be able to recognize whether the icon is an icon, and as a result, there is a possibility that a sufficient effect of the reliability suggestion pair display effect cannot be obtained.

Therefore, in the game machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the game ball wins the first starting port 21 during the execution of the reliability suggestion pair display effect, the hold icon corresponding to the winning can be displayed as a special icon. Even if there is, a configuration is adopted in which the icon is displayed as the default hold icon, and the icon change effect for the hold icon is not performed at least until the reliability suggestion pair display effect is completed.

By adopting such a configuration, since only one special icon is displayed while the expected image is displayed, the hold icon corresponding to the expected image is compared with the case where a plurality of special icons are displayed. Is easy to recognize. However, in a state where the expected image, the hold icon as a special icon, and the hold icon that is not a special icon are displayed, the player thinks that the hold icon corresponding to the expected image is the hold icon that is not the special icon. However, there is a possibility that a sufficient effect of the reliability suggestion pair display effect cannot be obtained.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, a connected image connecting the hold icon to be read ahead and the expected image is displayed so that the player can clearly recognize the correspondence between the hold icon to be read ahead and the expected image. (See FIG. 23 (C)).

After the variation display of the first special symbol described above is started based on FIG. 23C, the determination result of the first special symbol determination is "missing" at the end of the variation display of the first special symbol. In order to notify that, the three effect symbols indicating the disparity of "615" are pseudo-stopped (see FIG. 23 (D)). Then, when the variable display of the first special symbol is completed, the lost symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 41 as the first special symbol, and the above three effect symbols are finally stopped on the display screen 70.

In this way, when a predetermined fixed time (0.5 seconds in the present embodiment) elapses after the lost symbol is stopped and displayed as the first special symbol, the earliest hold displayed in the hold icon display area 71 is held. The first special symbol determination corresponding to the icon (holding icon at the left end) is executed. Then, as the variable display of the first special symbol is started in response to the execution of the first special symbol determination, the earliest hold icon shifts from the hold icon display area 71 to the icon display area 72. At the same time, the scroll display of the three symbol strings is started (see FIGS. 23 (D) and 23 (E)). As the earliest hold icon is shifted, the remaining hold icons in the hold icon display area 71 are also shifted to the left, and the hold icon to be read ahead is displayed as the second hold icon (FIG. 23 (E). )reference).

As is clear from the notations of FIGS. 23 (D) and 23 (E), the expected image changes from the first expected image with the start of the variable display of the first special symbol two before the look-ahead target. No. On the other hand, the hold icon of the look-ahead target was a blue hold icon (see FIG. 23 (D)) before the variable display of the first special symbol two before the look-ahead target was started. It changes to a green hold icon (see FIG. 23 (E)) as the variable display of the first special symbol two before the target is started.

In FIGS. 23 (D) and 23 (E), the expected image remains the first expected image, and the hold icon to be read ahead changes from the blue hold image to the green hold icon, which relates to the reliability suggestion pair display effect. It is illustrated how the pair changes from the first pair (see FIG. 22 (A)) to the third pair (see FIG. 22 (C)). In addition, since the display position of the hold icon to be read ahead has changed from the display position of the third hold icon to the display position of the second hold icon, the hold icon to be read ahead and the expected image It is also illustrated how the shape of the connected image connecting the two is changed.

After the above-mentioned variation display of the first special symbol (variation display of the first special symbol two before the look-ahead target) is started based on FIG. 23 (E), at the end of the variation display of the first special symbol. Then, in order to notify that the determination result of the first special symbol determination is "missing", the three effect symbols indicating the disparity of "243" are pseudo-stopped (see FIG. 23 (F)). Then, when the variable display of the first special symbol is completed, the lost symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 41 as the first special symbol, and the above three effect symbols are finally stopped on the display screen 70.

In this way, when a predetermined fixed time (0.5 seconds in the present embodiment) elapses after the lost symbol is stopped and displayed as the first special symbol, the earliest hold displayed in the hold icon display area 71 is held. The first special symbol determination corresponding to the icon (holding icon at the left end) is executed. Then, as the variable display of the first special symbol is started in response to the execution of the first special symbol determination, the earliest hold icon shifts from the hold icon display area 71 to the icon display area 72. At the same time, the scroll display of the three symbol columns is started (see FIGS. 23 (F) and 23 (G)). As the earliest hold icon is shifted, the remaining hold icons in the hold icon display area 71 are also shifted to the left, and the hold icon to be read ahead is displayed as the first hold icon (FIG. 23 (G). )reference).

As is clear from the notations of FIGS. 23 (F) and 23 (G), the expected image changes from the first expected image to the third expected image with the start of the variable display of the first special symbol immediately before the look-ahead target. It has changed to an image. On the other hand, the hold icon to be read ahead remains the green hold icon. Therefore, in FIGS. 23 (F) and 23 (G), the pairs related to the reliability suggestion pair display effect are the third pair (see FIG. 22 (C)) to the seventh pair (see FIG. 22 (G)). It can be said that the state of change to is illustrated. Further, since the display position of the hold icon to be read ahead has changed from the display position of the second hold icon to the display position of the first (earliest) hold icon, the hold icon to be read ahead has changed. It is also illustrated how the shape of the connected image connecting the image and the expected image changes.

After the above-mentioned variation display of the first special symbol (variation display of the first special symbol immediately before the look-ahead target) is started based on FIG. 23 (G), at the end of the variation display of the first special symbol. Then, in order to notify that the determination result of the first special symbol determination is "missing", the three effect symbols indicating the disparity of "156" are pseudo-stopped (see FIG. 23 (H)). Then, when the variable display of the first special symbol is completed, the lost symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 41 as the first special symbol, and the above three effect symbols are finally stopped on the display screen 70.

In this way, when a predetermined fixed time (0.5 seconds in the present embodiment) elapses after the lost symbol is stopped and displayed as the first special symbol, the earliest hold displayed in the hold icon display area 71 is held. The first special symbol determination corresponding to the icon (holding icon to be read ahead) is executed. Then, as the variable display of the first special symbol is started in response to the execution of the first special symbol determination, the earliest hold icon (hold icon to be read ahead) is moved from the hold icon display area 71. The icon display area 72 is shifted, and the scroll display of the three symbol columns is started (see FIGS. 23 (H) and 23 (I)). Here, as the hold icon to be read ahead shifts from the hold icon display area 71 to the icon display area 72, the green hold icon changes to the red icon.

At the start of the variable display of the first special symbol to be read ahead, the expected image is not displayed on the display screen 70 (see FIGS. 23 (H) and 23 (I)), and FIGS. 23 (H) and (I) Can be said to exemplify a state in which the display of the expected image ends (in other words, the reliability suggestion pair display effect ends) with the start of the variable display of the first special symbol to be read ahead.

Up to this point, from the start of the variable display of the first special symbol three before the look-ahead target (see FIG. 23 (C)) to the start of the variable display of the first special symbol to be read ahead (see FIG. 23 (I)). We explained how the reliability suggestion pair display effect is executed over the period up to), but since the expected image is deleted when the variable display of the first special symbol to be read ahead is started, the reliability suggestion is made. When the pair display effect ends, there arises a problem that the player cannot recognize the display color of the expected image displayed immediately before the end of the reliability suggestion pair display effect.

Therefore, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, in order to suppress the occurrence of such a problem, the expected image displayed immediately before the end of the reliability suggestion pair display effect is accompanied by the end of the reliability suggestion pair display effect. The effect image of the same color as is displayed on both the left and right sides of the display screen 70 (see FIG. 23 (I)). In the example shown in FIG. 23, the third expected image showing the appearance of the three characters accumulating power wearing a red aura was displayed until just before the end of the reliability suggestion pair display effect. , FIG. 23 (I) illustrates how a red effect image is displayed.

Although this effect image may be displayed until the end of the variable display of the first special symbol to be read ahead, it may interfere with the reach effect. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the effect image is displayed. The display is continued until the reach is established, and the effect image is not displayed after the reach is established.

(About the gaming machine 1 that can execute the reliability suggestion pair display effect)
Up to this point, the reliability suggestion pair display effect executed by the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment has been described with reference to FIGS. 21 to 23, but the gaming machine capable of executing such a reliability suggestion pair display effect. 1 can be regarded as the following gaming machine.

A determination means for determining whether or not to execute a special game (for example, a jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player (for example, the main CPU 81 that executes the jackpot determination process in step S308 of FIG. 42, which will be described later).
Holding means capable of holding the right of the determination up to a predetermined number (the acquired information acquired when the game ball wins in the first starting port 21 is stored in the special figure 1 / first hold storage area 831 to the special figure 1/4 hold. It is stored in one of the storage areas 834 (see FIG. 38 (A)), and the acquired information acquired when the game ball wins the second starting port 22 is stored in the special figure 2 and the first reserved storage area 835 to special figure 2. A main CPU 81 stored in any of the fourth reserved storage areas 838 (see FIG. 38 (A)) and
Before the determination is made for the right held by the holding means, the pre-determination means for pre-determining whether or not to execute the special game (executes the pre-determination processing of steps S211 and S219 in FIG. 40). Main CPU 81) and
The effect control means (for example, sub CPU 91, image / sound control CPU 101, lamp CPU 121) for controlling the execution of the effect is provided.
The effect control means
A hold suggestion image (for example, a hold icon) suggesting that the right of the judgment is held is displayed in a display mode based on the result of the preliminary judgment (see, for example, FIG. 21 (A)).
It is possible to execute an expected effect (for example, an effect of displaying an expected image: see FIG. 21B) that makes the special game expected to be executed in an effect mode based on the result of the preliminary determination.
The display mode of the hold suggestion image includes a plurality of display modes in which the expectation degree at which the special game is executed is different from each other (see FIG. 21 (A)), and the effect degree of the expectation effect has the expectation degree. There are a plurality of different production modes (see FIG. 21 (B)).
When the hold suggestion image is displayed without executing the expectation effect, the expectation degree is suggested by the display mode of the hold suggestion image (see, for example, FIG. 11A), and the hold suggestion image is displayed. When the expected effect is executed during the display, the expected degree is suggested by both the display mode of the hold suggestion image and the effect mode of the expected effect (for example, FIGS. 23 (C), 23 (E). ), (G)).

According to this configuration, when the expected effect (effect of displaying the expected image) is being executed while the hold suggestion image (for example, the hold icon) is being displayed, the display mode of the hold suggestion image and the effect mode of the expected effect Both suggest the degree of expectation that the special game will be performed (see, for example, FIGS. 23 (C), (E), (G)). Therefore, it is possible to obtain a high effect by the synergistic effect of displaying the hold suggestion image and executing the expected effect. Further, since it is possible to execute the expected effect of the effect mode suggesting that the expectation is high while displaying the hold suggestion image of the display mode suggesting that the expectation is low (see, for example, FIG. 22 (D)). ), By displaying the hold suggestion image of the display mode suggesting that the degree of expectation is low, it is effective that the problem that the player's expectation that the special game is executed is significantly lowered occurs. It can be suppressed. Further, since it is possible to display a hold suggestion image suggesting that the expectation is high during the execution of the expectation of the production mode suggesting that the expectation is low (see, for example, FIG. 22F), the expectation By executing the expected effect of the effect mode suggesting that the degree is low, it is possible to effectively suppress the problem that the player's expectation for the special game is executed is significantly lowered. It is possible.

(Other configurations related to reliability suggestion pair display effect)
The following configuration may be adopted for the reliability suggestion pair display effect.
That is, in the present embodiment, the expected image is not displayed while the white hold icon (default hold icon) is displayed, and the expected image is displayed while the non-white hold icon (special icon) is displayed. As described by way of example, in other embodiments, a configuration may be adopted in which the expected image can be displayed even while the white hold icon is displayed. That is, for example, a reliability suggestion pair display effect is executed in which the third expected image is displayed above the white hold icon and the connected image connecting the white hold icon and the third expected image is displayed. You may.

Further, in the present embodiment, after the variable display of the first special symbol corresponding to the hold icon to be read ahead is started, the hold icon to be read ahead is continuously displayed as the icon, but the expected image is not displayed. A case will be described as an example. On the other hand, in other embodiments, instead of displaying the aura image instead of the expected image, the expected image is displayed even after the variable display of the first special symbol corresponding to the hold icon to be read ahead is started. The display may be continued.

Further, in the present embodiment, the suggestion period from the start to the end of the reliability suggestion pair display effect (for example, after the display of FIG. 23 (C) is started, the display of FIG. 23 (I) is started. An example will be described in which the expected image is always displayed during the period until the image is displayed. On the other hand, in another embodiment, for example, during the above-mentioned suggestion period, the suggestion image is limited to the period from the start of the variation display of the first special symbol to the elapse of a predetermined time (shorter than the variation time). May be adopted such that is not displayed. Specifically, in this configuration, for example, the expected image is not displayed in the latter half of the variable display of the first special symbol in which the loss notification effect is performed as shown in FIGS. 23 (D), (F), and (H). The expected image is displayed intermittently.

Further, in the present embodiment, the case where the expected image has three types of the first expected image to the third expected image will be described as an example, but the type of the expected image is not limited to three types, and two types or two types or There may be four or more types.

Further, in the present embodiment, the expected image changes in the order of the first expected image, the second expected image, and the third expected image, so that the display content of the expected image (in the present embodiment, the number of characters indicated by the expected image, etc.) ) And the display color (in this embodiment, the color of the aura worn by the character) will be described as an example, but in other embodiments, the display content of the expected image will be changed due to the change in the expected image. A configuration in which either one of the display colors changes may be adopted.

Further, in the present embodiment, the case where the expected image is an effect image showing a state in which one or a plurality of characters accumulating power are wearing an aura of a predetermined color will be described as an example, but the display of the expected image will be described. The content and display color may be other as long as the player can recognize the degree of expectation that the jackpot game will be executed.

Further, in the present embodiment, the case where the effect symbol is displayed as a small symbol while the expected image is displayed (see FIGS. 23 (C) to 23 (H)) will be described as an example, but in other embodiments, for example, the expectation The display area of the image is changed to the lower right area on the display screen 70 (the area on the right side of the hold icon display area 71), and the effect symbol is displayed in the effect symbol display area 73 (see FIG. 2) even during the reliability suggestion pair display effect. It may be displayed in a large size.

Further, in the present embodiment, the case where the expected effect for expecting the jackpot game to be executed is the effect of displaying the expected image has been described as an example, but the degree of expectation for the jackpot game to be executed is suggested by the effect mode. If possible, the expected effect is not limited to the effect of displaying the expected image. For example, the effect of causing the frame lamp 37 to emit light with a light emitting color suggesting the degree of expectation that the jackpot game is executed, the jackpot game. The effect of outputting the effect sound suggesting the degree of expectation to be executed from the speaker 38 may be executed as the expected effect. Further, these effects may be performed together with the effect of displaying the expected image.

[About multiple expected productions]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 24 to 27, a plurality of expected effects executed by the gaming machine 1 will be described. Here, FIGS. 24 and 25 are screen views showing specific examples of the first expected effect and the second expected effect. FIG. 26 is a time chart for explaining the first expected effect, the second expected effect, and the third expected effect. FIG. 27 is a time chart for explaining a modified example of the first expected effect and the second expected effect.

The gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment indicates that when the game is controlled in the normal gaming state, the jackpot game is executed based on the result of the preliminary determination related to the first special symbol determination of the look-ahead target. As the effect to be expected from the player, the first expected effect, the second expected effect, and the third expected effect can be executed. It should be noted that these three expected effects are different from the effects of displaying the above-mentioned expected images based on FIGS. 21 to 23.

In FIG. 24A, a game ball wins a prize in the first starting port 21 during the variable display of the first special symbol (and the effect symbol) corresponding to the icon displayed in the icon display area 72. An example shows that a fourth hold icon (white hold icon) corresponding to the fourth hold related to the first special symbol determination is newly displayed in the hold icon display area 71. Here, based on the pre-judgment result regarding the right of the first special symbol judgment (pre-reading target) corresponding to the fourth hold icon, these are in the order of the third expected effect, the first expected effect, and the second expected effect. An explanation will be given by taking as an example the case where three expected effects are started.

It should be noted that the variable display of the first special symbol corresponding to the hold icon displayed before the hold icon of the look-ahead target is displayed (here, the three hold icons displayed on the left side of the hold icon of the look-ahead target). If the reach effect is executed during, the expected effect may interfere with the reach effect. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the fluctuation patterns related to the fluctuation display of the first special symbol corresponding to the hold icon displayed before the hold icon to be read ahead is displayed are the fluctuation patterns for loss without reach. If this is the case, the expected effect is executed, and if the variation pattern for big hits and the variation pattern for reach loss are included, the expected effect is not executed.

As described above, it is decided that the first expected effect, the second expected effect, and the third expected effect are executed for this look-ahead target with the right of the first special symbol determination corresponding to the fourth hold icon as the look-ahead target. If so, first, the third expected effect (see FIG. 26) is started almost at the same time as the timing when there is a new prize to be read ahead. The third expected effect is a board lamp light emitting effect that causes the board lamp 5 to emit light with a light emitting pattern dedicated to the third expected effect, and a corresponding effect sound corresponding to the board lamp light emitting effect (for example, a predetermined sound that causes the player to expect a big hit). This is an effect composed of a corresponding effect sound output effect that outputs the sound effect) from the speaker 38.

Corresponding production sound output The corresponding production sound output by the production is output in the output period starting from the timing when there is a new prize corresponding to the fourth hold icon and ending at the timing when 2 seconds have passed from this timing. Will be done. On the other hand, the board lamp emission effect has the same start timing as the corresponding effect sound output effect, but the end timing is different. That is, the corresponding effect sound output effect ends when 2 seconds have passed from the start, whereas the board lamp emission effect starts in response to the execution of the first special symbol determination, which is the read-ahead target. 1 It continues until the start of the variable display of the special symbol (see FIG. 26).

By the way, in the example shown in FIG. 24A, the hold icon (fourth hold icon: hold icon to be read ahead) corresponding to the right of the first special symbol determination to be read ahead is the default hold icon. It is displayed as a white hold icon. Therefore, for example, when the player is expected to make a big hit with the start of the next symbol change of the symbol change performed when the fourth hold icon is displayed, this effect is performed. , The player cannot easily recognize which hold icon corresponds to the effect, and as a result, it may not be possible to identify the hold icon that can be expected to be a big hit.

On the other hand, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, for example, the board lamp 5 that normally emits light in a light emitting pattern corresponding to the current effect mode (or the variable effect performed on the display screen 70) is At the timing when there is a new prize to be read ahead, the light emission pattern dedicated to the third expected production is started. That is, the light emission pattern of the board lamp 5 changes at the timing when there is a new prize to be read ahead. In addition, the corresponding effect sound is output from the speaker 38 at the timing when there is a new prize to be read ahead.

As described above, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, at the timing when there is a new prize to be read ahead, the board lamp light emitting mode changes and the corresponding effect sound is output from the speaker 38, which functions as the third expected effect. These effects occur almost at the same time as the fourth hold icon, which is the read-ahead target, is displayed. Therefore, the player can easily identify that the hold icon that can be expected to be a big hit is the fourth hold icon.

FIG. 24 (B) shows the determination result of the first special symbol determination at the final stage of the variation display of the first special symbol corresponding to the icon (see FIG. 24 (A)) displayed in the icon display area 72. In order to notify that is "missing", a state in which the three effect symbols indicating the disparity of "854" are pseudo-stopped is illustrated. On the other hand, when the variable display of the first special symbol is completed, the lost symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 41 as the first special symbol, and the display screen 70 shows the disparity of "854". The three production symbols will stop as they are.

In this way, when a predetermined fixed time (0.5 seconds in the present embodiment) elapses after the lost symbol is stopped and displayed as the first special symbol, the earliest hold displayed in the hold icon display area 71 is held. The first special symbol determination corresponding to the icon (holding icon at the left end) is executed. Then, as the variable display of the first special symbol is started in response to the execution of the first special symbol determination, the earliest hold icon shifts from the hold icon display area 71 to the icon display area 72. At the same time, the scroll display of the three symbol columns is started (see FIGS. 24 (B) and 24 (C)). Along with the start of the scroll display of these three symbol rows, the first expected effect described later is started, and the effect image related to the first expected effect is displayed in the central area of the display screen 70, so that there are three. The symbol sequence is displayed small in the lower right area of the display screen 70 until the variable display of the first special symbol performed in response to the execution of the first special symbol determination to be read ahead is started (FIG. 24 (C) to (I), see FIGS. 25 (A) to 25 (C)).

In this way, as the next symbol change of the symbol change that was performed when there was a new prize to be read ahead is started, the hold icon of the look-ahead target that was displayed as the fourth hold icon is changed. Third, it is displayed as a third hold icon, and the first expected effect is started (see FIGS. 24 (C) and 26). In the present embodiment, the above-mentioned chance mode effect functions as the first expected effect, the effect image for the chance mode showing the state of thunderstorm is displayed on the display screen 70, and the effect sound corresponding to the effect image is displayed. It is output from the speaker 38. Further, at the start of the first expected effect (here, the effect of the chance mode), the characters "Enter the chance mode" are displayed in the center of the display screen 70 in order to clearly notify that the mode has been changed to the chance mode (here, the effect of the chance mode). See FIG. 24 (C)). In the present embodiment, this first expected effect is continued until the start of the variable display of the first special symbol performed in response to the execution of the first special symbol determination to be read ahead (FIG. 25 (B)). ~ (C), see FIG. 26).

In the example shown in FIG. 24C, although the first expected effect has been started, the hold icon to be read ahead has not changed to a special icon. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the hold icon to be read ahead is displayed regardless of whether the hold icon to be read ahead has changed from the default hold icon (white hold icon) to a special icon (hold icon other than white). The pedestal of the above is extended upward, and the hold icon to be read ahead is moved upward to inform which hold icon the first expected effect is started in an easy-to-understand manner.

As illustrated in FIG. 24C, when the first expected effect is executed while a plurality of hold icons are displayed, the hold icon corresponding to the first expected effect is distinguished from other hold icons. Possible identification display (here, an effect display in which the hold icon to be read ahead is moved upward and its pedestal is extended upward) is performed. Since this identification display is continuously performed even after the second expected effect described later is started (see FIG. 24 (D)), the hold icons corresponding to the first expected effect and the second expected effect are added. It can be easily identified from the hold icon of.

The second expected effect is started in the middle of the variation display of the first special symbol started as described above based on FIG. 24 (C) (see FIGS. 24 (D) and 26). This second expected effect is an effect in which one or a plurality of characters appear, and is an effect that suggests the reliability of the jackpot depending on the number of characters. FIG. 24D exemplifies an effect display showing a state in which one character is accumulating power while being hit by a thunderstorm due to the first expected effect. Since the number of characters displayed by the second expected effect is one at this point, the player can determine the jackpot reliability at the present time based on the fact that only one character is displayed. It can be easily recognized that it is low.

FIG. 24 (E) shows the determination result of the first special symbol determination at the final stage of the variation display of the first special symbol corresponding to the icon (see FIG. 24 (D)) displayed in the icon display area 72. In order to notify that is "missing", a state in which three production symbols indicating a weak chance of "246" are pseudo-stopped is illustrated. On the other hand, when the variable display of the first special symbol is completed, the lost symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 41 as the first special symbol, and the display screen 70 shows a weak chance of "246". The above three production symbols will stop as they are.

Here, the case where the three effect symbols indicating the weak chances are pseudo-stopped and then the main stop is described as an example, but the case where the three effect symbols indicating the loose eyes are pseudo-stopped and then the main stop is also performed. There is a feature that the former case has a higher jackpot reliability than the latter case.

In this way, when a predetermined fixed time (0.5 seconds in the present embodiment) elapses after the lost symbol is stopped and displayed as the first special symbol, the earliest hold displayed in the hold icon display area 71 is held. The first special symbol determination corresponding to the icon (holding icon at the left end) is executed. Then, as the variable display of the first special symbol is started in response to the execution of the first special symbol determination, the earliest hold icon shifts from the hold icon display area 71 to the icon display area 72. At the same time, the scroll display of the three symbol columns is started (see FIGS. 24 (E) and 24 (F)). In addition, the look-ahead hold icon that was displayed as the third hold icon is displayed as the second hold icon, and instead of the pedestal corresponding to the third hold icon, the second hold is held. The pedestal corresponding to the icon extends upward.

It should be noted that, with the start of the scroll display of these three symbol strings, the effect mode of the first expected effect changes (see FIGS. 24 (E) to 24 (F) and FIG. 26). Specifically, the number of clouds that generate thunderstorms increases by one to two, and the effect display is switched to the effect display that shows the state of a more severe thunderstorm. The number of clouds displayed during this first expected production corresponds to the jackpot reliability, and the greater the number of clouds, in other words, the more intense the thunderstorm, the higher the jackpot reliability of the first expected production. Is getting higher.

In the middle of the variation display of the first special symbol started as described above based on FIG. 24 (F), the production mode of the second expected effect changes (FIGS. 24 (F) to (G), See FIG. 26). Specifically, from the state where the production display showing how one character is accumulating power is being performed, one new character appears and the two characters cooperate to accumulate power. It changes to the state where the effect display showing the situation is performed.

Since the first expected production is performed even after the production mode of the second expected production is changed in this way, as a result, the two characters cooperate while being hit by a thunderstorm falling from the two clouds. An effect display showing the state of accumulating power will be performed (see FIG. 24 (G)). Here, since the number of characters related to the second expected effect is increased by one, the player can easily recognize that the jackpot reliability of the second expected effect is improved.

FIG. 24 (H) shows the determination result of the first special symbol determination at the final stage of the variation display of the first special symbol corresponding to the icon (see FIG. 24 (G)) displayed in the icon display area 72. In order to notify that is "missing", a state in which three production symbols indicating a strong chance of "531" are pseudo-stopped is illustrated. On the other hand, when the variable display of the first special symbol is completed, the lost symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 41 as the first special symbol, and the display screen 70 shows a strong chance of "531". The above three production symbols will stop as they are.

At the end of the previous variation display of the first special symbol, the three effect symbols indicating the weak chance eyes were pseudo-stopped and then the main stop (see FIG. 24 (E)), but here, the strong chance eyes are shown. The three effect symbols shown are pseudo-stopped and then the main stop is performed. When comparing the two, the case where the three effect symbols indicating the strong chance eyes are pseudo-stopped and then the main stop is the weak chance eye. It can be said that the jackpot reliability is higher than in the case where the main bank is made after the three production symbols shown are simulated and stopped.

In this way, when a predetermined fixed time (0.5 seconds in the present embodiment) elapses after the lost symbol is stopped and displayed as the first special symbol, the earliest hold displayed in the hold icon display area 71 is held. The first special symbol determination corresponding to the icon (holding icon at the left end: see FIG. 24 (H)) is executed. Then, as the variable display of the first special symbol is started in response to the execution of the first special symbol determination, the earliest hold icon shifts from the hold icon display area 71 to the icon display area 72. At the same time, the scroll display of the three symbol columns is started (see FIGS. 24 (H) and 24 (I)). In addition, the look-ahead hold icon that was displayed as the second hold icon is now displayed as the first hold icon, and instead of the pedestal corresponding to the second hold icon, the first hold The pedestal corresponding to the icon extends upward.

In the middle of the variable display of the first special symbol started as described above based on FIG. 24 (I), the production mode of the second expected effect changes (see FIGS. 24 (I) and 25 (A)). ). Specifically, from the state where the production display showing how the two characters are accumulating power is being performed, one new character appears and the three characters cooperate to accumulate power. It changes to the state where the effect display showing the situation is performed.

Since the first expected production is performed even after the production mode of the second expected production is changed in this way, as a result, the three characters cooperate while being hit by a thunderstorm falling from the two clouds. An effect display showing the state of accumulating power will be performed (see FIG. 25 (A)). Here, since the number of characters related to the second expected effect is increased by one to three, the player can easily recognize that the jackpot reliability of the second expected effect is further improved.

Further, as the production mode of the second expected effect changes, the hold icon to be read ahead, which is displayed in the hold icon display area 71 as the earliest hold icon, changes from the white hold icon to green (FIG. FIG. 24 (I) and FIG. 25 (A)). In this way, the display mode of the hold icon to be read ahead may change (due to the icon change effect) during the execution of the expected effect (here, the three expected effects of the first expected effect to the third expected effect). , It is possible to effectively improve the player's expectation for the jackpot by the synergistic effect of the expected effect and the icon change effect.

FIG. 25 (B) shows the determination result of the first special symbol determination at the final stage of the variation display of the first special symbol corresponding to the icon (see FIG. 25 (A)) displayed in the icon display area 72. In order to notify that is "missing", a state in which three production symbols indicating a strong chance of "337" are pseudo-stopped is illustrated. On the other hand, when the variable display of the first special symbol is completed, the lost symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 41 as the first special symbol, and the display screen 70 shows a strong chance of "337". The above three production symbols will stop as they are.

At the end of the previous variation display of the first special symbol, the three production symbols indicating the strong chances not including the 7 symbols of "531" were pseudo-stopped and then stopped (see FIG. 24 (H)). ), Here, the three production symbols showing the strong chance eyes including the seven symbols of "337" are stopped after the pseudo stop, and the jackpot reliability is further higher.

As described above, when a predetermined fixed time (0.5 seconds in the present embodiment) elapses after the lost symbol is stopped and displayed as the first special symbol, the earliest displayed in the hold icon display area 71. The first special symbol determination corresponding to the hold icon (hold icon to be read ahead: see FIG. 25B) is executed. Then, as the variable display of the first special symbol is started in response to the execution of the first special symbol determination, the earliest hold icon shifts from the hold icon display area 71 to the icon display area 72. At the same time, the scroll display of the three symbol columns is started (see FIGS. 25 (B) and 25 (C)).

Here, with the start of the variable display of the first special symbol, the display area of the effect symbol is returned from the lower right area on the display screen 70 to the effect symbol display area 73, and the first expected effect and the second expected effect. , And the third expected effect ends at the same time (see FIGS. 25 (B) to (C), FIG. 26). Further, as the look-ahead target hold icon displayed in the hold icon display area 71 as the earliest hold icon shifts to the icon display area 72 and is displayed as the icon, the green hold icon becomes red. Changes to the relevant icon.

In this way, when the variable display of the first special symbol corresponding to the hold icon to be read ahead is started, for example, the following effect is performed. That is, when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variable display of the first special symbol and the three symbol rows, the advance notice effect may be executed (see FIG. 25 (D)). As an example of this notice effect, the step-up notice described above based on FIG. 11 (C) can be mentioned.

Next, following the advance notice effect, a pseudo-continuous effect may be performed in which seven symbols are pseudo-stopped in the middle row after the effect symbols that are different from each other as the left symbol and the right symbol are pseudo-stopped (FIG. 25 (E)). reference). This pseudo-continuous production is as described above based on FIG. 11 (D) and the like.

When the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol are pseudo-stopped by the pseudo continuous effect, the pseudo second variable effect following the pseudo first variable effect is started (see FIGS. 25 (E) and 25 (F)). ). Specifically, after the character "x2" suggesting the start of the pseudo-second variation effect is displayed large in the central area of the display screen 70, the character "x2" is displayed on the upper left of the display screen 70. It is displayed smaller in one area, and along with this, the scroll display of the three symbol strings is restarted in the effect symbol display area 73.

Subsequently, when the pseudo-second variation effect is being performed, a notice effect suggesting the jackpot reliability may be executed (see FIG. 25 (G)). As an example of this notice effect, the above-mentioned dialogue notice based on FIG. 11 (F) can be mentioned.

In this way, after the advance notice effect is executed during the pseudo-second variable effect, the second pseudo-continuous effect is executed (see FIG. 25 (H)), and the scroll display of the three symbol rows is resumed. Then, the pseudo-third continuous variation effect is started (see FIG. 25 (I)). Although the effect after the start of the pseudo-third variable effect is omitted, here, since the red icon is displayed in the icon display area 72, the reach effect is at least SP reach or higher. (SP reach or SPSP reach) will be developed and the winning will be notified. Specifically, it develops into SP reach and a hit notification effect (or loss notification effect) is executed at the end of SP reach, or SPSP is performed via SP reach (or without SP reach). It develops into a reach, and a hit notification effect (or a loss notification effect) is executed at the end of the SPSP reach.

Although the case where the third expected effect is started at the timing when there is a new prize to be read ahead has been described with reference to FIGS. 24 to 26, the third expected effect may not be executed. Further, although the case where both the first expected effect and the second expected effect are executed has been described as an example, there is a case where only one of the first expected effect and the second expected effect is executed.

(About game machine 1 that can execute multiple expected effects)
Up to this point, a plurality of expected effects executed by the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment have been described with reference to FIGS. 24 to 26, but the gaming machine 1 capable of executing such a plurality of expected effects is described below. It can be regarded as a game machine like.

A determination means for determining whether or not to execute a special game (for example, a jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player (for example, the main CPU 81 that executes the jackpot determination process in step S308 of FIG. 42, which will be described later).
Holding means capable of holding the right of the determination up to a predetermined number (the acquired information acquired when the game ball wins in the first starting port 21 is stored in the special figure 1 / first hold storage area 831 to the special figure 1/4 hold. It is stored in one of the storage areas 834 (see FIG. 38 (A)), and the acquired information acquired when the game ball wins the second starting port 22 is stored in the special figure 2 and the first reserved storage area 835 to special figure 2. A main CPU 81 stored in any of the fourth reserved storage areas 838 (see FIG. 38 (A)) and
Before the determination is made for the right held by the holding means, the pre-determination means for pre-determining whether or not to execute the special game (executes the pre-determination processing of steps S211 and S219 in FIG. 40). Main CPU 81) and
The effect control means (for example, sub CPU 91, image / sound control CPU 101, lamp CPU 121) for controlling the execution of the effect is provided.
The effect control means
When the right of the judgment is reserved, a hold suggestion image (for example, a hold icon) suggesting to that effect is displayed.
Based on the result of the preliminary determination, as the effect of expecting the special game to be executed, the first expected effect (see, for example, FIG. 24 (C)) and the second expected effect (see, for example, FIG. 24 (D)). ) Can be executed, and multiple expected effects can be performed.
When the first expected effect and the second expected effect are executed in a state where a plurality of the hold suggestion images are displayed, another hold suggestion image (for example, a hold icon to be read ahead) corresponding to these expected effects is displayed. An identification display that can be distinguished from the hold suggestion image (for example, the hold icon corresponding to the expected effect is displayed at a higher position than the other hold icons, and the pedestal located below the hold icon is extended upward and displayed. Production: A gaming machine characterized in that (see FIG. 24 (D)) can be executed.

According to this configuration, when the first expected effect and the second expected effect are executed, the hold suggestion image corresponding to these expected effects can be distinguished from other hold suggestion images (for example, FIG. 24 (for example, FIG. 24). Since D)) is executed, it is possible to effectively improve the player's expectation that the special game will be executed by the synergistic effect of the first expected effect and the second expected effect and the identification display. It is possible, and the player can easily identify the hold suggestion image corresponding to the first expected effect and the second expected effect based on the identification display.

(Other configurations related to the first expected production and the second expected production)
Up to this point, the first expected effect, the second expected effect, and the third expected effect executed by the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment have been described with reference to FIGS. 24 to 26, but in other embodiments, the first expected effect, the second expected effect, and the third expected effect have been described. The following configurations may be adopted for the first expected effect and the second expected effect.

That is, in the present embodiment, the first expected effect is started at the start of the next variation display of the variation display of the first special symbol, which is performed when there is a new prize to be read ahead, and the next variation display is displayed. A case where the second expected effect is started in the middle (delayed by a predetermined time from the first expected effect) has been described (see FIG. 26). On the other hand, in another embodiment, as illustrated in FIGS. 27 (A) and 27 (B), the first expected effect and the second expected effect may be started at the same time. In addition, in FIG. 27 (A), the first expected effect and the second expected effect are displayed at the start of the next variable display of the variable display of the first special symbol, which is performed when there is a new prize to be read ahead. The case where they are started at the same time is illustrated. Further, in FIG. 27 (B), the first expected effect and the second expected effect are shown in the middle of the next variable display of the variable display of the first special symbol, which is performed when there is a new prize to be read ahead. The case where they are started at the same time is illustrated.

Further, in the present embodiment, the case where both the first expected effect and the second expected effect are continuously executed over a predetermined period has been described (see FIG. 26). On the other hand, in other embodiments, at least one of the first expected effect and the second expected effect may be executed intermittently. It should be noted that FIGS. 27 (A) to 27 (C) exemplify a case where both the first expected effect and the second expected effect are executed intermittently.

Further, in the present embodiment, a case will be described in which the middle point of the next variation display of the variation display of the first special symbol, which is performed when there is a new prize to be read ahead, is the start timing of the second expected effect. (See FIG. 26). On the other hand, in another embodiment, as illustrated in FIG. 27 (A), the next variable display of the variable display of the first special symbol performed when there is a new prize to be read ahead is displayed. The start timing may be set as the start timing of the first expected effect and the second expected effect. In this case, as illustrated in FIG. 27 (A), every time the variation display of the first special symbol is started, the first expected effect and the second expected effect that continue for a shorter time than the variation time are started. An example is the configuration.

Further, in the present embodiment, a case where the start time of the next variable display of the variable display of the first special symbol, which is performed when there is a new prize to be read ahead, is the start timing of the first expected effect will be described. (See FIG. 26). On the other hand, in another embodiment, as illustrated in FIG. 27 (B), the variation display following the variation display of the first special symbol performed when there is a new prize to be read ahead is displayed. The intermediate point may be set as the start timing of the first expected effect and the second expected effect. In this case, as illustrated in FIG. 27B, the end timing at which the variation display of the first special symbol ends every time a predetermined time elapses from the start of the variation display of the first special symbol. One example is a configuration in which the first expected effect and the second expected effect that continue until are started.

Further, when both the first expected effect and the second expected effect are executed intermittently, as illustrated in FIG. 27 (C), the variation time is each time the variation display of the first special symbol is started. The end timing at which the first expected effect that continues for a shorter predetermined time is started and the variation display of the first special symbol ends every time the predetermined time elapses after the variation display of the first special symbol is started. One example is to start the second expected production that continues until.

Further, up to this point, the case where the expected effect is executed over three fluctuations has been described as an example, but the expected effect is the case where the expected effect is executed over two fluctuations or the first special corresponding to the hold icon to be read ahead. In some cases, it is executed only in the variation display immediately before the variation display of the symbol.

The end timing of the first expected effect and the second expected effect is not limited to the start timing of the variable display of the first special symbol corresponding to the hold icon to be read ahead, and may be the following timing. For example, as illustrated in FIG. 27 (A), it may be in the middle of the variation display immediately before the variation display of the first special symbol corresponding to the hold icon to be read ahead. Further, it may be in the middle of the variable display of the first special symbol corresponding to the hold icon to be read ahead (for example, the reach establishment timing).

Further, in FIGS. 26, 27 (A), and 27 (B), a case where the first expected effect and the second expected effect are completed at the same time is illustrated, but the first expected effect and the second expected effect are shown. It may be terminated at different timings.

Further, in the present embodiment, the case where the effect of the chance mode is executed as the first expected effect and the effect display showing how the character accumulates power is executed as the second expected effect has been described as an example. The production content of the second expected production may be any production content as long as the player can expect the player to execute the jackpot game.

Further, in the present embodiment, the case where the production mode of the first expected production changes in the middle of the first expected production and the production mode of the second expected production changes in the middle of the second expected production has been described. On the other hand, in other embodiments, the first expected effect and / or one of the second expected effect may be an effect in which the effect mode is invariant.

Further, in the present embodiment, the case where the first expected effect and the second expected effect are executed by using the display screen 70 and the speaker 38 will be described, but in other embodiments, the examples are as illustrated in the present embodiment. May use different effect means to perform the first expected effect and the second expected effect. For example, the frame lamp 37 may be used to execute the first expected effect, and the board lamp 5 may be used to execute the second expected effect. Further, for example, the display screen 70, the board lamp 5, and the speaker 38 may be used to execute the first expected effect, and the frame lamp 37 and the speaker 38 may be used to execute the second expected effect.

(Other configurations related to identification display)
Further, in the present embodiment, the hold icon of the look-ahead target is displayed at a higher position than the other hold icons, and the pedestal located below the hold icon of the look-ahead target is extended upward to hold the look-ahead target. The icon can be easily distinguished from other pending icons. On the other hand, in another embodiment, during the expected effect, the effect display indicating how the pedestal located immediately below the hold icon to be read ahead vibrates may be performed as the identification display. Further, for example, during the expected production, an identification mark is displayed directly above the hold icon of the look-ahead target, and when the hold icon of the look-ahead target shifts, the identification mark is the same so as to be linked with the hold icon of the look-ahead target. A display effect such as shifting in a direction may be performed as an identification display. Further, for example, during the expected effect, an irradiation effect is performed in which the beam beam is irradiated to the hold icon to be read ahead, and the irradiation destination of the beam ray is changed so as to follow the hold icon of the look-ahead target to be shifted. It may be performed as an identification display.

Further, after the hold icon is shifted to the icon display area 72 and displayed as the icon, the following configuration may be adopted. When the hold icon to be read ahead is shifted to the icon display area 72 and displayed as the icon, for example, the pedestal of the icon can be deformed to easily distinguish the icon to be read ahead from other hold icons. You may do so.

[About light emission effect using each light emission group]
Hereinafter, the light emitting effect executed by the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 28 and 29. Here, FIG. 28 is a schematic view for explaining the arrangement of the first starting port 21 and each light emitting group. FIG. 29 is a time chart for explaining the light emission effect.

(Arrangement of each light emitting group)
As illustrated in FIG. 28, the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment includes a first substrate 510 and a second substrate 520 on which a plurality of color LEDs functioning as board lamps 5 are mounted. The second substrate 520 is on the back surface side of the game board 2 and is provided at a position on the left side of the display screen 70 viewed from the front. On the other hand, the first board 510 is provided on the back surface side of the game board 2 so as to extend from directly below the first starting port 21 to the left and then toward the lower end of the second board 520. .. In the present embodiment, these the first substrate 510 and the second substrate 520 are connected to the lamp control board 120 via a relay board (not shown), and based on the control signal output from the lamp control board 120, the first board 510 and the second board 520 are connected to the lamp control board 120. The light emission control of the color LED mounted on the first substrate 510 and the color LED mounted on the second substrate 520 is performed. The game board 2 is composed of at least a translucent acrylic plate on the front side of the first board 510 and the front side of the second board 520, and the player can emit light from the color LED mounted on the first board 510. Then, the light emission of the color LED mounted on the second substrate 520 can be visually recognized through the game board 2.

The color LEDs mounted on the first substrate 510 are different in light emission control between the color LEDs located directly below the first starting port 21 and the other color LEDs. , A plurality of color LEDs arranged at positions close to the first starting port 21 on the first substrate 510 are referred to as a second light emitting group 512 (see FIG. 28), and the remaining color LEDs on the first substrate 510 (second). A color LED located at a position farther from the first starting port 21 as compared with the light emitting group 512) is referred to as a first light emitting group 511 (see FIG. 28) to distinguish between the two. On the other hand, since common light emission control is performed for a large number of color LEDs mounted on the second board 520, in the following description, a large number of color LEDs mounted on the second board 520 are used as a third color LED. It shall be referred to as a light emitting group 523 (see FIG. 28).

[Light emission effect of each light emission group]
Next, with reference to FIG. 29, the light emission effect of each light emitting group when the hold icon and the display color of the icon change due to the icon change effect will be described. In addition, "variation" and "stop" in the symbol of FIG. 29 here mean the variation display and the stop display of the first special symbol in the normal gaming state, respectively. Further, in the icon of FIG. 29, "white hold" means a white hold icon, "blue hold" means a blue hold icon, "blue hold" means a blue icon, and "green hold". Means the green icon, and "red" means the red icon.

(First light emission effect of each light emission group)
FIG. 29A is a time chart for explaining the first light emission effect of each light emission group. In this first light emission effect, when there is a new prize to be read ahead, a white hold icon (white hold) is displayed according to this new prize, and this white hold icon is changed to a blue hold icon (blue hold). At the start of the variation display (pre-reading target variation) of the first special symbol corresponding to the first special symbol determination of the look-ahead target, the blue hold icon shifts to the icon display area 72, and this hold icon Is displayed as the green icon, and further, it is a light emitting effect performed when the green icon is changed to the red icon in the middle of the change of the look-ahead target.

In the example shown in FIG. 29 (A), with respect to the variation display of the first special symbol performed three times before the look-ahead target variation, the variation pattern for loss without reach (see FIG. 10 (C)). Is selected, and the non-reach effect is executed along with the variable display of the first special symbol. Therefore, based on the determination result of the first special symbol determination executed at the start of the variation display of each first special symbol, the first emission group 511 and the third emission group 523 have the emission pattern corresponding to the current effect mode. It emits light. Specifically, for example, when the effect is controlled in the first normal mode, the first light emitting group 511 and the third light emitting group 523 emit light in a light emitting pattern dedicated to the first normal mode. Further, when the effect is controlled in the second normal mode, the first light emitting group 511 and the third light emitting group 523 emit light in a light emitting pattern dedicated to the second normal mode. Further, when the effect is controlled in the third normal mode, the first light emitting group 511 and the third light emitting group 523 emit light in a light emitting pattern dedicated to the third normal mode.

On the other hand, regarding the variation display of the first special symbol, which is the pre-reading target variation, as is clear from the display of the green icon and the red icon, the variation pattern for jackpot (FIG. 10 (FIG. 10) (See A)) or the variation pattern for reach loss (see FIG. 10B) is selected, the reach effect is executed along with the variation display of the first special symbol, and various advance notice effects that expect a big hit. (Step-up notice and dialogue notice) will be executed. Therefore, when the look-ahead target change is started, the reach effect is performed by the first light emitting group 511 and the third light emitting group 523 based on the determination result of the first special symbol determination performed at the start of the look-ahead target change. Starts emitting light with a light emission pattern that corresponds to the fluctuation / advance notice that corresponds to the fluctuation effect and the notice effect.

Although not shown in FIG. 29, when the normal mode of any of the first normal mode to the third normal mode is changed to the chance mode, the first light emitting group 511 and the first light emitting group 511 and the first light emitting group 511 and the first light emitting group are used in the light emitting pattern dedicated to the chance mode. 3 Light emitting group 523 emits light. Further, when the mode shifts from either the normal mode or the chance mode to the intense heat mode, the first light emitting group 511 and the third light emitting group 523 emit light in the light emitting pattern dedicated to the intense heat mode. In addition, the effect mode may shift to the chance mode or the intense hot mode before the change of the look-ahead target is started. In such a case, the pre-judgment result related to the hold of the first special symbol judgment of the look-ahead target is used. Therefore, the light emission of the first light emitting group 511 and the third light emitting group 523 is controlled. On the other hand, when the effect mode shifts to the chance mode or the intense hot mode after the look-ahead target change is started, the first light emitting group is based on the judgment result of the first special symbol determination performed at the start of the look-ahead target change. The light emission of 511 and the third light emission group 523 is controlled.

On the other hand, regarding the second light emitting group 512, the following light emitting effect is performed. That is, when the special icon is not displayed in either the hold icon display area 71 or the icon display area 72, that is, even if the hold icon or the icon is displayed, both of them are white white icons. At one point, the second light emitting group 512 emits light in a white blinking pattern so that it blinks slowly (brightens or darkens) in white.

On the other hand, as illustrated in FIG. 29 (A), when the next variable display of the variable display of the first special symbol, which was performed when there was a new prize to be read ahead, is started, As the white hold icon changes to a blue hold icon, the second light emitting group 512 starts emitting light in a blue blinking pattern in which the second light emitting group 512 blinks in blue. That is, as the white hold icon changes to the blue hold icon, the light emission pattern of the second light emitting group 512 changes from the white blink pattern to the blue blink pattern.

Further, as illustrated in FIG. 29 (A), when the look-ahead target variation is started, the second light emitting group 512 blinks in green as the blue hold icon changes to the green icon. Start emitting light in a green blinking pattern. That is, as the blue hold icon changes to the green icon, the light emission pattern of the second light emitting group 512 changes from the blue blinking pattern to the green blinking pattern. After that, at a predetermined timing during execution of the look-ahead target variation (for example, the timing at which the reach is established), the second light emitting group 512 blinks in red as the green icon changes to the red icon. Start emitting light in the pattern. That is, as the green icon changes to the red icon, the light emission pattern of the second light emitting group 512 changes from the green blinking pattern to the red blinking pattern.

In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, in order to make the second light emitting group 512 blink in the same color as the hold icon (or the icon), it is based on the preliminary judgment result relating to the hold of the first special symbol judgment which is the pre-reading target. Therefore, the light emission of the second light emitting group 512 is controlled.

Further, when the loss notification effect is executed in the look-ahead target change, the light emission pattern of the second light emitting group 512 is returned from the red blink pattern to the white blink pattern with the end of the look-ahead target change.

(Second light emission effect of each light emission group)
FIG. 29B is a time chart for explaining the second light emission effect of each light emission group. This second light emission control displays a hold icon other than white (here, a blue hold icon) at the timing when there is a new prize for the look-ahead target, and when the look-ahead target change starts, the blue hold icon Is a light emitting effect performed when the hold icon is displayed as the green icon as the icon shifts to the icon display area 72.

In the example shown in FIG. 29 (B), with respect to the variation display of the first special symbol twice performed before the look-ahead target variation, the variation pattern for loss without reach (see FIG. 10 (C)). Is selected, and the reachless effect is executed along with the variable display of the first special symbol. Therefore, the first light emitting group 511 and the third light emitting group 523 emit light in the light emitting pattern corresponding to the current effect mode. This is the same as described above based on FIG. 29 (A). In addition, in the look-ahead target change, as is clear from the fact that the green icon is displayed, the reach effect is executed, and various notice effects that expect a big hit are executed. Therefore, in the look-ahead target change, the look-ahead target change , The first light emitting group 511 and the third light emitting group 523 start light emission in the light emitting pattern corresponding to the above-mentioned fluctuation / notice.

On the other hand, regarding the second light emitting group 512, the following light emitting effect is performed. That is, as illustrated in FIG. 29B, since the special icon is not displayed before there is a new prize to be read ahead, the second light emitting group 512 emits light in a white blinking pattern. There is. On the other hand, as the blue hold icon is displayed in the hold icon display area 71 according to the new prize to be read ahead, the second light emitting group 512 starts emitting light in the blue blinking pattern. Therefore, the blue hold icon is displayed at the timing when there is a new prize to be read ahead, and almost at the same time, the light emission pattern of the second light emitting group 512 changes from the white blinking pattern to the blue blinking pattern.

Further, as illustrated in FIG. 29 (B), when the look-ahead target variation is started, the blue hold icon changes to the green icon, and the second light emitting group 512 has a green blinking pattern. Start emitting light at. That is, as described above based on FIG. 29 (A), as the blue hold icon changes to the green icon, the light emission pattern of the second light emitting group 512 changes from the blue blinking pattern to the green blinking pattern. It changes to a pattern.

(Third light emission effect of each light emission group)
FIG. 29C is a time chart for explaining the third light emission effect of each light emission group. This third light emission control displays a white hold icon according to the new prize of the look-ahead target at the timing when there is a new prize of the look-ahead target, and when the look-ahead target change starts, the white hold icon displays the icon. This is a light emitting effect performed when the hold icon is displayed as the red icon as it shifts to the area 72.

In the example shown in FIG. 29 (C), as described above based on FIG. 29 (B), in the two first special symbol variation displays performed before the look-ahead target variation, the current effect is produced. The first light emitting group 511 and the third light emitting group 523 emit light in the light emitting pattern corresponding to the mode, and in the look-ahead target variation, the first light emitting group 511 and the third light emitting group 523 emit light in the light emitting pattern corresponding to the above-mentioned fluctuation / notice. do.

On the other hand, regarding the second light emitting group 512, the following light emitting effect is performed. That is, as illustrated in FIG. 29 (C), before there is a new prize to be read ahead, the special icon is not displayed, so that the second light emitting group 512 emits light in a white blinking pattern. .. In addition, a hold icon is displayed according to a new prize to be read ahead, but this hold icon is a white hold icon, and its display color does not change until the change of the look-ahead target is started. Therefore, even after a new prize for the look-ahead target is received, light emission in the white blinking pattern of the second light emitting group 512 continues until the change of the look-ahead target starts (see FIG. 29 (C)). ..

After that, as illustrated in FIG. 29 (C), when the look-ahead target variation is started, the white hold icon changes to the red icon, and the second light emitting group 512 has a red blinking pattern. Start emitting light at. That is, as the white hold icon changes to the red icon, the light emission pattern of the second light emitting group 512 changes from the white blinking pattern to the red blinking pattern.

Here, the light emitting effect of the first light emitting group 511 and the third light emitting group 523 and the light emitting effect of the second light emitting group 512 have been described, but as is clear from the above description based on FIG. 29, the hold icon (or the said). When the icon change effect of changing the display mode of the icon) from the first display mode to the second display mode is executed, light emission corresponding to the second display mode which is the display mode after the change of the hold icon (or the icon). When the second light emitting group 512 emits light in the pattern (first light emitting pattern) and the second light emitting group 512 emits light in this first light emitting pattern, the first light emitting pattern is different from the first light emitting pattern. The light emitting group 511 and the third light emitting group 523 emit light.

In the present embodiment, since the second light emitting group 512 emits light in the same color as the display color after the change of the hold icon (or the icon), the player does not need to look at the hold icon (or the icon). By looking at the two light emitting groups 512, it is possible to easily recognize the display color after the change of the hold icon (or the icon). In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the icon of the look-ahead target may be temporarily hidden during the change of the look-ahead target, and the second light emitting group 512 also emits light in the first light emitting pattern at this time. Therefore, even when the icon is temporarily hidden, the player can recognize the display color of the icon.

Further, when the second light emitting group 512 emits light in the first light emitting pattern, the second light emitting pattern different from the first light emitting pattern (the emission color when the second light emitting group 512 emits light in the first light emitting pattern). Is a light emitting pattern that emits light in different colors), and the first light emitting group 511 and the third light emitting group 523 emit light. Therefore, it is possible to make the light emission of the second light emitting group 512 in the first light emitting pattern stand out, and the icon change effect of the hold icon (or the icon) and the light emission that causes the second light emitting group 512 to emit light in the first light emitting pattern. It is possible to further improve the effect obtained by the synergistic effect with the effect.

The blinking pattern of the second light emitting group 512 has the following characteristics. Since the white blinking pattern of the second light emitting group 512 is set to the longest period in which the second light emitting group 512 blinks in white, the second light emitting group 512 emits light in the white blinking pattern, so that the second light emitting group 512 emits light. The light emitting group 512 blinks at a slow speed. Further, in the blue blinking pattern of the second light emitting group 512, since the cycle in which the second light emitting group 512 blinks in blue is set to a longer time, the second light emitting group 512 emits light in the blue blinking pattern. The second light emitting group 512 blinks at a low speed. Further, in the green blinking pattern of the second light emitting group 512, since the cycle in which the second light emitting group 512 blinks in green is set to a medium time, the second light emitting group 512 emits light in the green blinking pattern. , The second light emitting group 512 blinks at a medium speed. Further, since the red blinking pattern of the second light emitting group 512 is set to the shortest period in which the second light emitting group 512 blinks in red, the second light emitting group 512 emits light in the red blinking pattern. The second light emitting group 512 blinks at high speed.

In this way, the second light emitting group 512 emits light in the same color as the hold icon (or the icon), and the higher the jackpot reliability, the faster the blinking speed of the second light emitting group 512. Expectations can be effectively improved.

(About the gaming machine 1 that can execute the light emission effect)
Up to this point, the light emitting effect executed by the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment has been described with reference to FIGS. 28 to 29, but the gaming machine 1 capable of executing such a light emitting effect is described in the following games. It can be regarded as an opportunity.

With the first light emitting means (for example, the first light emitting group 511),
With the second light emitting means (for example, the second light emitting group 512),
A determination means for determining whether or not to execute a special game (for example, a jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player (for example, the main CPU 81 that executes the jackpot determination process in step S308 of FIG. 42, which will be described later).
Holding means capable of holding the right of the determination up to a predetermined number (the acquired information acquired when the game ball wins in the first starting port 21 is stored in the special figure 1 / first hold storage area 831 to the special figure 1/4 hold. It is stored in one of the storage areas 834 (see FIG. 38 (A)), and the acquired information acquired when the game ball wins the second starting port 22 is stored in the special figure 2 and the first reserved storage area 835 to special figure 2. A main CPU 81 stored in any of the fourth reserved storage areas 838 (see FIG. 38 (A)) and
The effect control means (for example, sub CPU 91, image / sound control CPU 101, lamp CPU 121) for controlling the execution of the effect is provided.
The effect control means
A hold suggestion image (for example, a hold icon) suggesting that the right of the determination is held is displayed, and the display mode of the hold suggestion image is changed from the first display mode to the first display mode. It is possible to execute a change effect (for example, an icon change effect) that changes to the second display mode suggesting that the special game is likely to be executed.
When the change effect is executed, when the second light emitting means emits light in the first light emitting pattern corresponding to the second display mode and the second light emitting means emits light in the first light emitting pattern, A gaming machine characterized in that the first light emitting means emits light in a second light emitting pattern different from the first light emitting pattern (see, for example, FIG. 29).

According to this configuration, when the change effect (for example, the icon change effect) is executed, the second light emitting means (for example, the second light emitting means (for example) is performed in the first light emitting pattern corresponding to the second display mode which is the display mode after the change of the hold suggestion image. , The second light emitting group 512) emits light, so that a high effect can be obtained by the synergistic effect of the light emission of the second light emitting means in the first light emitting pattern and the change effect. Further, when the second light emitting means emits light in the first light emitting pattern, the first light emitting means emits light in the second light emitting pattern (different from the first light emitting pattern) (see, for example, FIG. 29). Therefore, when the second light emitting means emits light in the first light emitting pattern, the first light emitting means emits light in the same first light emitting pattern, thereby causing the second light emitting means to emit light in the first light emitting pattern. It is possible to effectively suppress the problem that the effect cannot be sufficiently obtained.

Although not shown in the figure, in the game machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the second light emitting group 512 blinks in the same color as the hold icon (or the icon) other than white, the first start port 21 is used. Even if there is a new prize and the hold icon can be displayed as a special icon according to this new prize, the configuration is adopted such that this hold icon is displayed as the white hold icon which is the default hold icon. There is. That is, when the second light emitting group 512 blinks in the same color as the hold icon (or the icon) other than white, the execution of the icon change effect for the new hold icon is restricted. Therefore, for example, when the second light emitting group 512 is blinking in green so as to correspond to the green hold icon, the same green hold icon is newly displayed, and the green light emission of the second light emitting group 512 is performed. It is possible to effectively suppress the problem of not knowing which hold icon is the hold icon corresponding to.

(Other configurations related to light emission production)
The following configuration may be adopted for the light emission effect.
That is, in the present embodiment, when the first light emitting group 511 and the third light emitting group 523 and the second light emitting group 512 emit light with different light emitting colors, that is, the first light emitting group 511 and the third light emitting group 523. Although the case where the second light emitting group 512 does not emit light in the same color has been described, the first light emitting group 511 and the third light emitting group 523 and the second light emitting group 512 temporarily have the same color, for example, during a predetermined reach effect. May emit light at.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the special icon is not displayed, the case where the second light emitting group 512 blinks in a white blinking pattern has been described as an example, but in other embodiments, when the special icon is not displayed, the case has been described. , The second light emitting group 512 may be set to non-light emission, and at the timing when the special icon is displayed, the light emission control for blinking the second light emitting group 512 in the same color as the special icon may be started.

Further, in the present embodiment, for example, when the hold icon to be read ahead changes to a red hold icon, the second light emitting group 512 blinks in red, but the light emitting pattern of the second light emitting group 512 is the look-ahead target. As long as the light emitting pattern can be recognized by the player as the light emitting pattern corresponding to the display color after the change of the hold icon, the light emitting pattern is not limited to the light emitting pattern illustrated in the present embodiment. That is, for example, when the display color of the hold icon to be read ahead changes to red, the second light emitting group 512 is made to emit light in a light emitting pattern in which red light emission and white light emission of the second light emitting group 512 are alternately repeated. You may. That is, the light emitting pattern of the second light emitting group 512 may be a light emitting pattern in which there is a moment when the second light emitting group 512 emits light with a light emitting color different from the display color after the change of the hold icon to be read ahead. Further, for example, when the hold icon to be read ahead changes to a red hold icon, the second light emitting group 512 does not blink in red, but blinks in red, or the second light emitting group 512 emits red light. You may continue.

In addition, a first effect button image imitating the first effect button 35 is displayed as a hold icon according to a new prize to be read ahead, and the first effect button 35 is operated while the hold icon is displayed. Therefore, the hold icon may change from the first effect button image to a special icon (for example, a green hold icon). In this case, as the hold icon changes from the first effect button image to the special icon, the light emission control for blinking the second light emitting group 512 in the same color as the special icon may be started.

In the present embodiment, as the display color of the hold icon (or the icon) changes, the second light emitting group 512 blinks in the same color as the display color after the change of the hold icon (or the icon). Although the case where the effect is started has been described as an example, in other embodiments, even if the display color of the hold icon (or the icon) changes, the above-mentioned light emission effect may not be started. You may.

Further, as is clear from the fact that the second light emitting group 512 is arranged close to the first starting port 21, the second light emitting group 512 corresponds to the suspension of the first special symbol determination. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the display color of the hold icon corresponding to the hold of the first special symbol determination in the normal game state is changed to a display color other than white, the second light emitting group is performed. While performing a light emitting effect that blinks 512 with the same color as the display color after the change of the hold icon, the display color of the hold icon corresponding to the hold of the second special symbol determination in the probability change game state (or the time saving game state) is other than white. When an icon change effect that changes to the display color is performed, a configuration is adopted in which the second light emitting group 512 is not blinked with the same color as the display color after the change of the hold icon. On the other hand, in another embodiment, an icon change effect is performed in which the display color of the hold icon corresponding to the hold of the second special symbol determination in the probability change game state (or the time saving game state) changes to a display color other than white. If it is broken, a light emitting effect may be performed in which the second light emitting group 512 blinks in the same color as the display color after the change of the hold icon.

Further, in the present embodiment, the case where the second light emitting group 512 is fixed at a predetermined position close to the first starting port 21 on the back surface side of the game board 2 will be described as an example, but in other embodiments, it will be described. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which the second light emitting group 512 is provided in the effecting object that can operate with respect to the game board 2, and the position of the second light emitting group 512 can be changed. Further, in the present embodiment, the case where the first light emitting group 511 is integrally fixed with the second light emitting group 512 has been described as an example, but in other embodiments, the first light emitting group 511 can operate individually. Or a configuration in which the first light emitting group 511 can operate integrally with the second light emitting group 512 may be adopted.

Further, in the present embodiment, the icon is displayed until immediately before the end of the variable display of the first special symbol, and when the icon is a special icon, the second light emitting group is displayed until the icon is erased. The case where the light emission control of 512 is continued has been described as an example (see FIG. 29). On the other hand, in another embodiment, for example, the icon which is a special icon is erased in the middle of SPSP reach, and the light emission control of the second light emitting group 512 is terminated when the icon is erased. It may be adopted. Separately from this, the light emission control of the second light emitting group 512 is continued even after the icon is erased, and the final display color of the icon can be recognized even after the icon is erased. May be adopted.

Further, in the present embodiment, a case will be described in which light emission in the first light emission pattern of the second light emission group 512 is continued even when the icon of the look-ahead target is temporarily hidden in the middle of the change of the look-ahead target. However, in another embodiment, when the icon to be read ahead is temporarily hidden, the light emission in the first light emitting pattern of the second light emitting group 512 is interrupted, and the icon to be read ahead is changed. When it is displayed again, a configuration may be adopted in which light emission in the first light emission pattern of the second light emission group 512 is restarted.

[About prior suggestion production]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 30 to 33, the advance suggestion effect executed by the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described. Here, FIG. 30 is an explanatory diagram for explaining each effect suggestion image displayed in the prior suggestion effect. FIG. 31 is a screen view showing a specific example of the prior suggestion effect, and FIG. 32 is a screen view illustrating the effect after the prior suggestion effect is performed. FIG. 33 is a time chart for explaining the prior suggestion effect.

In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, for example, when the game is controlled in the normal gaming state, as a variable effect performed during the variable display of the first special symbol, a variable effect of displaying the decorative symbol in a variable manner, or a variable effect of displaying the decorative symbol in a variable manner. Various notice effects that suggest the reliability of the jackpot are executed. The pre-suggestion effect executed by the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment is an effect that suggests in advance that the effect during fluctuation is performed. The pre-suggestion effect is, for example, a pseudo-ream suggestion image, an SP reach suggestion image, and SPSP when the pseudo-ream effect, SP reach, and SPSP reach are executed during the variable display of the first special symbol in the normal gaming state. It is an effect that displays a reach suggestion image and suggests in advance that the pseudo-continuous effect, the SP reach, and the SPSP reach illustrated in FIG. 30 are executed.

In the pre-suggestion effect, an effect suggestion image suggesting each of the variable effect is displayed for a plurality of variable effects that can be executed by the gaming machine 1 during the variable display of the first special symbol in the normal gaming state. As this effect suggestion image, in the present embodiment, as illustrated in FIG. 30, a pseudo-ream suggestion image, a group notice suggestion image, an SP reach suggestion image, an SPSP reach suggestion image, and an accessory production suggestion image are used. , A chance suggestion image and a super hot suggestion image are prepared.

The pseudo-ream suggestion image is an effect image that suggests in advance that the pseudo-ream effect described based on FIGS. 11 (D) and 11 (G) is executed, and in the present embodiment, the pseudo-repeated effect is associated. It is a round production image including the character of "ream" to be made (see FIG. 30). The jackpot reliability when this pseudo-continuous suggestion image is displayed in the pre-suggestion effect is set to about 8% in the present embodiment. In the prior suggestion effect, one pseudo-ream suggestion image may be displayed or two pseudo-ream suggestion images may be displayed. If only one pseudo-ream suggestion image is displayed, the variation effect is pseudo-double. When it is confirmed that the development is more than the eyes and two pseudo-ream suggestion images are displayed, it is confirmed that the variation effect is developed in the pseudo-third series.

The group notice suggestion image is an effect image that suggests in advance that the above-mentioned group notice is executed based on FIG. 12 (D) and the like, and in the present embodiment, three characters appearing in the group notice are displayed. It is a horizontally long rectangular effect image including (see FIG. 30). The jackpot reliability when this group notice suggestion image is displayed in the advance suggestion effect is set to about 45% in the present embodiment.

The SP reach suggestion image is an effect image that suggests in advance that the above-mentioned SP reach will be executed based on FIG. 9 (H) and the like, and in the present embodiment, a horizontally long ellipse including the character “SP”. It is an effect image of a shape (see FIG. 30). The jackpot reliability when this SP reach suggestion image is displayed in the pre-suggestion effect is set to about 10% in the present embodiment. When this SP reach suggestion image is displayed, the SP reach is executed and the winning notification effect is executed at the end of the SP reach, and the winning notification effect is executed at the SPSP reach by developing from the SP reach to the SPSP reach. The latter is more reliable than the former. Therefore, when the SP reach is developed after the SP reach suggestion image is displayed, the player can enjoy the game while expecting that the reach effect is further developed to the SPSP reach.

The SPSP reach suggestion image is an effect image that suggests that the above-mentioned SPSP reach is executed based on FIG. 9 (I) and the like, and in the present embodiment, it is a horizontally long hexagon including the characters “SPSP”. (See FIG. 30). The jackpot reliability when this SPSP reach suggestion image is displayed in the pre-suggestion effect is set to about 30% in the present embodiment. When this SPSP reach suggestion image is displayed, it will eventually develop into SPSP reach and the winning notification effect will be executed at the end of SPSP reach, but it will develop from normal reach to SPSP reach without going through SP reach. In some cases, the normal reach is changed to the SPSP reach via the SP reach, and the latter has a higher jackpot reliability than the former. Therefore, when the SPSP reach suggestion image is displayed, the player can enjoy the game while expecting that the normal reach first develops into the SP reach.

The accessory effect suggestion image is an effect image that suggests in advance that the accessory effect in which the movable decorative member 14 operates is executed. In the present embodiment, a horizontally long heptagonal effect including the characters "gimmick" is produced. It is an image (see FIG. 30). In the present embodiment, the jackpot reliability when this character effect suggestion image is displayed in the pre-suggestion effect is set to about 40%. The movable decorative member 14 is usually arranged at an initial position (see FIG. 2) in which most of the movable decorative member 14 is hidden behind the decorative member 13 and only the lower end portion of the movable decorative member 14 is visible. On the other hand, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the movable decorative member 14 emits light in a predetermined light emitting pattern and is displayed during the execution of the development effect (see FIG. 12B) performed prior to the SPSP reach. An accessory effect that moves so as to fall to an operation position that covers most of the screen 70 may be executed. In this way, the jackpot reliability is higher when the character effect is executed along with the development effect than when the character effect is not executed along with the development effect. By executing the advance suggestion effect to be displayed, the player's expectation for the jackpot can be effectively improved.

In addition, the 1st SPSP reach and the 2nd SPSP reach, which has a higher jackpot reliability than the 1st SPSP reach, are prepared, and if the character production is not executed during the development production, it develops into the 1st SPSP reach. If the winning notification effect is executed at the end of the first SPSP reach and the character effect is executed during the development production, the winning notification effect is executed at the end of the second SPSP reach by developing into the second SPSP reach. It may be adopted at the same time.

The chance suggestion image is a production image that suggests that there is a higher possibility that the hit notification effect will be executed in the variable display of the first special symbol this time, and in the present embodiment, the characters "chance!" It is an effect image which shows (see FIG. 30). This chance suggestion image does not suggest that some variable effect will be executed after that, but the jackpot reliability when this chance suggestion image is displayed in the advance suggestion effect is set to about 15%. Therefore, by displaying the chance suggestion image, it is possible to effectively improve the player's expectation for the jackpot.

The super hot suggestion image is a directing image that suggests in advance that a fluctuating effect (super hot character display effect) for displaying super hot characters is executed. In this embodiment, "super hot !!" It is an effect image which shows the character of (see FIG. 30). Since the jackpot reliability when this super hot suggestion image is displayed in the pre-suggestion effect is set to about 65% in this embodiment, by displaying the super hot suggestion image, the player's hit against the jackpot It is possible to dramatically improve expectations.

When this super hot suggestion image is displayed by the advance suggestion effect, the reach line including the characters "super hot !!" is displayed and the voice of "super hot !!" is output from the speaker 38 when the reach is established. When a super-heated character display effect is performed (see FIG. 32 (D)), and when a super-hot character display effect is performed in which the characters "super hot !!" are displayed in a large size in the center of the display screen 70 at a predetermined timing. There is.

(Specific example of prior suggestion production)
Next, with reference to FIGS. 31 and 32, the pre-suggestion effect and the effect after the pre-suggestion effect is performed will be described. FIG. 31 (A) shows that the determination result of the first special symbol determination is “missing” at the final stage of the variable display of the first special symbol corresponding to the icon displayed in the icon display area 72. In order to notify, a state in which three effect symbols indicating the disparity of "625" are pseudo-stopped is illustrated. On the other hand, when the variable display of the first special symbol is completed, the lost symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 41 as the first special symbol, and the display screen 70 shows the variation of "625". The three production symbols will stop as they are.

In this way, when a predetermined fixed time (0.5 seconds in the present embodiment) elapses after the lost symbol is stopped and displayed as the first special symbol, the earliest hold displayed in the hold icon display area 71 is held. The first special symbol determination corresponding to the icon is executed. Then, as the variable display of the first special symbol is started in response to the execution of the first special symbol determination, the earliest hold icon shifts from the hold icon display area 71 to the icon display area 72. At the same time, the scroll display of the three symbol columns is started (see FIGS. 31 (A) and 31 (B)).

In this way, when a predetermined time (for example, 1 second) elapses from the start of the scroll display of the three symbol strings accompanying the variable display of the first special symbol, the above-mentioned effect suggestion image is acquired based on FIG. The title of the acquisition challenge production aiming at is displayed (see FIG. 31 (C)). Specifically, the characters "acquisition challenge" are displayed large in the center of the display screen 70 with the three symbol strings displayed in the upper right area of the display screen 70 (FIG. 31 (C)). reference). Subsequently, an explanatory effect of the acquisition challenge effect is performed in which the characters "Press the button to get the effect!" Are displayed on the display screen 70 (see FIG. 31 (D)).

When the acquisition challenge effect is performed, the effect suggestion images are displayed in a list on the display screen 70 (see FIG. 31 (E)). Specifically, the pseudo-ream suggestion image, the group notice suggestion image, the SP reach suggestion image, the SPSP reach suggestion image, the character production suggestion image, the chance suggestion image, and the intense hot suggestion image described above based on FIG. 30 are displayed on the display screen. Listed in 70. The display shown in FIG. 31 (E) is an example, and is, for example, a pseudo-ream suggestion image, a group notice suggestion image, an SP reach suggestion image, an SPSP reach suggestion image, a character production suggestion image, a chance suggestion image, and The super hot suggestion images may be displayed side by side in the execution order of the corresponding effects. Further, although FIG. 31 (E) illustrates a state in which all the effect suggestion images are displayed in a list, some effect suggestion images may be displayed or an effect image showing the characters "missing" may be displayed. A list may be displayed so as to include.

When a predetermined time has elapsed after the effect suggestion images are displayed in a list as shown in FIG. 31 (E), an operation promotion effect for urging the player to operate the first effect button 35 is performed (see FIG. 31 (F)). It should be noted that this operation promotion effect is the same effect as the first effect button operation promotion effect described above based on FIG. 12 (F) and the like, only the timing at which the valid period occurs is different. The description is omitted. Further, during the operation promotion effect, the effect suggestion images displayed in a list are displayed on the display screen 70, but the illustration is omitted in FIG. 31 (F) for convenience of explanation.

Next, when the player operates the first effect button 35 during the valid period related to the operation promotion effect, or when the valid period ends without operating the first effect button 35, the operation corresponding effect is performed. (See FIG. 31 (G)). This operation-compatible effect is an effect display showing a state in which an explosion occurs on the display screen 70 and a part of the effect suggestion image displayed on the display screen 70 is erased.

When such an operation-corresponding effect is performed, an effect suggestion image suggesting the effect to be executed during the variable display of the first special symbol remains, and an acquisition effect notification effect showing how the two characters are pleased is generated. It is done (see FIGS. 31 (H) and 31 (I)). This acquisition effect notification effect is an effect corresponding to the above-mentioned prior suggestion effect. In FIGS. 31 (H) and 31 (I), a pseudo-ream suggestion image suggesting that the pseudo-ream effect is executed in advance, an SP reach suggestion image suggesting that the pseudo-ream effect will be developed in advance, and an SP SP reach are developed. It seems that the SPSP reach suggestion image that suggests in advance to do, and the super hot suggestion image that suggests in advance that the fluctuating effect (super hot character display effect) that displays the super hot characters will be executed are displayed. Illustrated.

The number of effect suggestion images displayed in the prior suggestion effects illustrated in FIGS. 31 (H) and 31 (I) is not particularly limited, but for example, when the jackpot reliability is relatively low (that is,). , When the judgment result of the first special symbol judgment this time is "missing" and the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol with a relatively short fluctuation time is selected), the number of effect suggestion images to be displayed. When the jackpot reliability is relatively high (that is, when the judgment result of the first special symbol judgment this time is "big hit" or even if it is "missing", the fluctuation time is relatively long. (1) When a variation pattern of a special symbol is selected), a configuration such as increasing the number of effect suggestion images to be displayed may be adopted.

If such a configuration is adopted, the player can more easily recognize the jackpot reliability based on not only the content of the changing effect suggested by each effect suggestion image but also the number of the effect suggestion images displayed. Will be possible.

When the above-mentioned acquisition effect notification effect (preliminary suggestion effect) is completed based on FIGS. 31 (H) and 31 (I), the scroll display of the three symbol strings in the effect symbol display area 73 is resumed (FIG. 31 (I)). And FIG. 32 (A)). In this way, when a predetermined time elapses after the scroll display of the three symbol strings in the effect symbol display area 73 is restarted, as a notice effect suggesting the jackpot reliability, for example, the jackpot reliability increases to a higher stage. A step-up notice with a higher degree is executed (see FIG. 32 (A)). Here, a case where a step-up notice is executed as a notice effect will be described as an example, but as a notice effect, another notice effect (for example, the content of the dialogue emitted by the character and the color of characters and frames indicating the dialogue) will be described. In some cases, a dialogue notice that suggests the reliability of the jackpot) will be executed.

In this way, when the advance notice effect suggesting the jackpot reliability is executed, the pseudo-continuous effect previously suggested by the advance suggestion effect (see FIG. 31 (I)) is executed (see FIG. 32 (B)). , The pseudo-second variation effect is started (see FIG. 32 (C)). After that, as the left 7 symbols and the right 7 symbols are pseudo-stopped and the reach is established, the characters of intense hotness that were previously suggested by the prior suggestion effect (see FIG. 31 (I)) are being displayed. As an effect, a super hot character display effect is performed in which the reach line on which the characters "super hot !!" are written are superimposed and displayed on the reach pattern (see FIG. 32 (D)).

After the reach is established in this way, the normal reach is executed (see FIG. 32 (E)), the SP reach effect suggested by the prior suggestion effect is executed (see FIG. 32 (F)), and the prior suggestion effect causes the SP reach effect. The suggested SPSP reach is performed (see FIG. 32 (G)). At the end of the SPSP reach, the first effect button operation promotion effect described based on FIG. 12 (F) is executed (see FIG. 32 (H)), and the effect related to the first effect button operation promotion effect is executed. When the first effect button 35 is operated by the player during the period, a cut-in occurs (see FIG. 32 (I)). Note that FIG. 32 (I) illustrates a state in which a cut-in image including one character and expressed in green is superimposed and displayed on the SPSP reach effect image displayed on the display screen 70.

In FIG. 32, the flow of the effect after the cut-in occurs is omitted, but at the end of the SPSP reach, the second effect button operation promotion effect is executed (see FIG. 12 (H)). When the second effect button 36 is operated during the valid period related to the second effect button operation promotion effect, the hit notification effect (or the loss notification effect) is executed. Note that FIG. 12 (I) illustrates how a hit notification effect is performed in response to an operation of the second effect button 36.

(Flow of production when advance suggestion production is executed)
FIG. 33 illustrates the flow of the above-mentioned series of effects based on FIGS. 31 and 32. In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, as illustrated in FIG. 33, immediately after the variable display of the first special symbol in the normal gaming state is started, the intense hot suggestion image, the pseudo continuous suggestion image, and the SP reach suggestion image , A pre-suggestion effect (see FIGS. 31 (H) and (I)) for displaying the SPSP reach suggestion image may be executed.

When such a pre-suggestion effect is executed, a step-up notice may be given after that, as illustrated in FIG. 33, before the pseudo-continuous effect suggested by the pre-suggestion effect is performed. (See FIGS. 31 (I) and 32 (A)-(B)). Then, the pseudo-continuous effect is executed after the step-up notice, and the intense heat character display effect is executed at the timing when the reach is established during the pseudo-second variable effect (see FIGS. 33 and 32 (D)). ..

When the reach is established in this way, the normal reach not suggested by the prior suggestion effect is executed (see FIGS. 33 and 32 (E)), and the SP reach suggested by the prior suggestion effect is executed (FIG. 33, FIG. (See FIG. 32 (F)), the SPSP reach also suggested by the pre-suggestion effect is executed (see FIGS. 33 and 32 (G)). After that, when the final stage of the SPSP reach is approached, the first effect button operation promotion effect is performed (see FIG. 32 (H)), and the first effect button 35 is pressed during the valid period related to the first effect button operation promotion effect. When operated, a cut-in occurs (see FIGS. 33 and 32 (I)). The flow of the production after the cut-in occurs is as described above.

(About the gaming machine 1 that can execute the advance suggestion effect)
Up to this point, the prior suggestion effect executed by the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment has been described with reference to FIGS. 30 to 33, but the gaming machine 1 capable of executing such a prior suggestion effect is as follows. It can be regarded as a game machine.

A determination means for determining whether or not to execute a special game (for example, a jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player (for example, the main CPU 81 that executes the jackpot determination process in step S308 of FIG. 42, which will be described later).
When the determination is made, the symbol (for example, the first special symbol) is variablely displayed on the predetermined symbol display means (for example, the first special symbol display 41), and then the symbol showing the result of the determination is stopped and displayed. The symbol display control means (main CPU 81 that executes the processes of steps S311 and S315 in FIG. 42) and
The effect control means (for example, sub CPU 91, image / sound control CPU 101, lamp CPU 121) for controlling the execution of the effect is provided.
The effect control means
The changing effect (for example, pseudo-continuous effect, group notice, SP reach, SPSP reach, character effect, super hot character display effect, etc.) performed during the variable display of the symbol and the changing effect are performed. It is possible to perform a pre-suggestion effect (see, for example, FIGS. 31 (H) and (I)) that suggests in advance.
The prior suggestion effect is executed for a part of the plurality of the variable effect that is performed during the variation display of the symbol, the variable effect that is not suggested by the prior suggestion effect is executed, and then the variable effect is executed. A gaming machine characterized in that it is possible to execute the partially changing effect suggested by the prior suggestion effect (see FIG. 33).

According to such a gaming machine, before the fluctuating effect suggested by the prior suggestion effect (in the example shown in FIGS. 31 to 33, the pseudo continuous effect, the intense hot character display effect, the SP reach, the SPSP reach). Since the changing effect (for example, step-up notice: see FIG. 32 (A)) that is not suggested by the prior suggestion effect is performed (see FIG. 33), the player can feel unexpected. By the way, if the pre-suggestion effect is executed for all of the plurality of fluctuating effects, the player cannot enjoy the game while guessing the fluctuating effect to be performed after that, and as a result, the advance suggestion effect is executed. By doing so, there is a possibility that the problem of lowering the interest of the production during the fluctuation may occur. On the other hand, according to the above configuration, since the effect during fluctuation that is not suggested by the prior suggestion effect may be executed, it is possible to effectively suppress the occurrence of such a problem.

(Other configurations related to prior suggestion production)
The following configuration may be adopted for the advance suggestion effect.
That is, in the present embodiment, as illustrated in FIG. 30, the SU notice suggestion image suggesting that the step-up notice is executed is not prepared in advance, and FIGS. 31 (H) and 31 (I) show. Based on this, the case where the step-up notice is executed after the above-mentioned prior suggestion effect is performed has been described as an example. On the other hand, in another embodiment, a SU notice suggestion image that can be displayed by the advance suggestion effect is prepared, and in the above-mentioned list display based on FIG. 32 (E), a list including the SU notice suggestion image is included. Display is performed, and then, in the above-mentioned prior suggestion effect based on FIGS. 32 (H) and (I), the prior suggestion effect that does not display the SU notice suggestion image is executed, and then the step-up of FIG. 32 (A) is performed. You may perform a flow effect such as executing a notice.

In the present embodiment, the advance suggestion effect is executed immediately after the variation display of the first special symbol in the normal game state is started, and the changing effect suggested by the advance suggestion effect is executed within the same variation. Was explained as an example. On the other hand, in another embodiment, the variation display of the first special symbol is used as the pre-reading target variation, and the pre-judgment processing is performed. Is specified, and based on this specific result, the pre-suggestion effect may be executed before the pre-reading target variation is started.

Further, in the present embodiment, the case where the prior suggestion effect is executed in response to the operation of the first effect button 35 has been described as an example, but in other embodiments, the operation promotion effect exemplified in FIG. 31 (F) is performed. Instead, the pre-suggestion effect may be executed regardless of the operation of the first effect button 35.

[About the 1st and 2nd precursors]
Next, with reference to FIG. 34, the first precursor effect and the second precursor effect that can be executed by the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described. Here, FIG. 34 is an explanatory diagram for explaining two types of precursory effects (an example of a first expected effect and a second expected effect) and four types of suggestive effects.

The gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment has the above-mentioned non-reach effect (an example of the fourth suggestion effect) based on FIG. 9 (B) and the above-mentioned normal reach (an example of the first suggestion effect) based on FIG. 9 (F) and the like. An example), the above-mentioned pseudo-third consecutive variation effect (an example of the second suggestion effect) based on FIG. 11 (H) and the like, and the above-mentioned SPSP reach (third suggestion effect) based on FIG. 9 (I) and the like. (Example)) and can be executed.

FIGS. 34 (A) to 34 (D) show these non-reach effects, normal reach, pseudo-third consecutive variable effect, and SPSP reach. Of these four types of effects, assuming that the possibility that the hit notification effect is executed in the normal reach (see FIG. 34 (B)) is the first degree, in the present embodiment, this first degree is about 2%. It is set. Further, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the pseudo continuous effect is executed twice and the variable effect of the pseudo third station is developed, the reach effect (SP reach or SPSP reach) equal to or higher than the SP reach is executed. Therefore, the possibility that the hit notification effect will be executed when the pseudo third station is developed is higher than the possibility that the hit notification effect will be executed in the normal reach, and the possibility is the second degree. Then, in the present embodiment, this second degree is set to about 15%.

Further, assuming that the possibility that the hit notification effect is executed in the SPSP reach (see FIG. 34 (D)) is set to a third degree, in the present embodiment, this third degree is set to about 30%. Further, since the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment adopts a configuration in which the hit notification effect is not executed unless the reach effect is executed, the case where the reachless effect (see FIG. 34 (A)) is performed. When the possibility that the notification effect is executed is set to the fourth degree, in the present embodiment, the fourth degree is set to 0%.

By the way, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the right of the first special symbol determination in the normal gaming state is reserved, the jackpot game is executed prior to the first special symbol determination being performed on the right. In addition to pre-determining whether or not to do so, pre-determination processing is performed to pre-determine which variation pattern is selected as the variation pattern of the first special symbol when the first special symbol determination is performed. On the other hand, since the sub ROM 92 of the sub control board 90 stores information indicating the correspondence between the variation pattern of the first special symbol and the effect pattern of the variation effect using the effect symbol, the sub CPU 91 stores the information indicating the correspondence relationship. Based on the pre-judgment result (pre-judgment information) acquired from the main control board 80, whether or not the non-reach effect is executed due to the pre-reading target variation, whether or not the normal reach is executed due to the pre-reading target variation, and the pre-reading target variation. It is possible to specify whether or not the variation effect of the pseudo-third station is developed and whether or not the SPSP reach is executed by the look-ahead target change before the look-ahead target change is started.

As described above, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, since it is possible to specify the effect performed by the look-ahead target change, the player is given a big hit before the look-ahead target change is started based on this specific result. It is preferable to produce an effective effect that is expected.

(1st precursor production)
Therefore, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, based on the preliminary determination result, the player is expected to execute the hit notification effect by the look-ahead target change before the look-ahead target change is started. As a result, the first precursory effect is to be executed. The first precursor effect may be any effect as long as the player can expect a big hit, but in the present embodiment, the first precursor effect is displayed on the display screen 70. The background image showing the daytime state is changed to the background image showing the evening state, the background image showing the evening state is displayed on the display screen 70, and the corresponding effect corresponding to this background image is displayed from the speaker 38. The effect of outputting sound is executed.

In the present embodiment, the normal reach suggesting that the hit notification effect is executed is the first degree, and the hit notification effect is likely to be executed (higher than the first degree). The configuration is such that the above-mentioned first precursor effect is executed before the start of the look-ahead target variation, provided that at least one of the pseudo-third consecutive variation effects suggesting that the degree is 2 is executed by the look-ahead target variation. Is adopted. In other words, when the first precursor effect is executed, at least one of the normal reach and the pseudo-third consecutive variation effect is executed in the look-ahead target variation.

According to this configuration, when the first precursor effect is executed, the normal reach is executed by the look-ahead target variation, the pseudo-third consecutive variation effect is executed by the look-ahead target change, and the pseudo-look-ahead target change is simulated. It can be said that it is an effective effect for expecting the player to execute the hit notification effect because it is confirmed that one of the normal reach is executed by developing into the third continuous variable effect.

(2nd precursor production)
In addition, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, based on the preliminary determination result, the second expectation that the player is expected to execute the hit notification effect by the pre-reading target variation before the pre-reading target variation is started. As a production, the second precursor production is to be executed. The second precursor effect may be any effect as long as the player can expect a big hit, but in the present embodiment, the second precursor effect is displayed on the display screen 70. The background image showing the daytime state is changed to the background image showing the nighttime state, the background image showing the nighttime state is displayed on the display screen 70, and the corresponding effect corresponding to this background image is displayed from the speaker 38. The effect of outputting sound is executed.

In the present embodiment, there is a possibility that the SPSP reach suggesting that the hit notification effect is executed is the third degree (higher than the first degree) and the hit notification effect is executed. Prior to the start of the look-ahead target variation, the above second It adopts a configuration that executes a precursory effect. In other words, when the second precursor effect is executed, either the SPSP reach or the non-reach effect is executed in the look-ahead target variation.

According to this configuration, at the time when the second precursor effect is executed, either the non-reach effect is executed due to the look-ahead target variation or the SPSP reach is executed due to the look-ahead target change. That is, when the non-reach effect is executed due to the change in the look-ahead target after the second precursor effect is executed, the second precursor effect functions as a so-called ghost effect, while the look-ahead target change after the second precursor effect is executed. When SPSP reach is executed in, the second precursor effect functions as a big chance effect. In addition, when the second precursor effect functions as a big chance effect, the SPSP reach that can be expected to be a big hit is executed rather than the normal reach or the pseudo third variable effect that is confirmed by executing the first precursor effect. Therefore, the player can enjoy the game while expecting that the second precursor effect is a large chance effect.

When the pseudo-third consecutive variation effect is executed due to the look-ahead target variation, it is confirmed that the reach effect of SP reach or higher is executed at that time, so that the first look-ahead target variation is started before the start. When the precursor effect is executed, it is confirmed that some kind of reach effect is executed due to the change in the look-ahead target. On the other hand, when the second precursor effect is executed, it may be confirmed that the reachless effect is executed due to the change in the look-ahead target as described above. Therefore, the first precursor effect and the second precursor effect are executed at the same time. It is not preferable to do so.

Therefore, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, it is prohibited to execute the first precursor effect and the second precursor effect at the same time, and the execution condition of the first precursor effect and the execution condition of the second precursor effect are satisfied. If both are satisfied, one of the precursory effects will be executed.

(About the gaming machine 1 capable of executing the first precursor effect and the second precursor effect)
Up to this point, the first precursor effect and the second precursor effect executed by the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment have been described with reference to FIG. 34, but such a first precursor effect and a second precursor effect can be executed. The game machine 1 can be regarded as the following game machine.

A determination means for determining whether or not to execute a special game (for example, a jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player (for example, the main CPU 81 that executes the jackpot determination process in step S308 of FIG. 42, which will be described later).
When the determination is made, the symbol (for example, the first special symbol) is variablely displayed on the predetermined symbol display means (for example, the first special symbol display 41), and then the symbol showing the result of the determination is stopped and displayed. The symbol display control means (main CPU 81 that executes the processes of steps S311 and S315 in FIG. 42) and
The effect control means (for example, sub CPU 91, image / sound control CPU 101, lamp CPU 121) for controlling the execution of the effect is provided.
The effect control means
Based on the result of the determination, a hit notification effect for notifying that the special game is executed or a loss notification effect for notifying that the special game is not executed is executed (see FIG. 9 (G)).
As an expected effect for expecting the hit notification effect to be executed, a first expected effect (for example, a first precursor effect: see FIG. 34) or a second expected effect (for example, a second precursor effect: see FIG. 34). Feasible and
When the first expected effect is executed, the first suggestive effect (for example, normal reach: see FIG. 34 (B)) suggesting that the hit notification effect is likely to be executed is the first degree. At least one of the second suggestive effect (for example, the pseudo-third consecutive variation effect: see FIG. 34 (C)) suggesting that the possibility is a second degree higher than the first degree. And
When the second expected effect is executed, a third suggestive effect suggesting that the possibility is a third degree higher than the first degree (for example, SPSP reach: see FIG. 34 (D)). And a fourth suggestion effect (eg, no reach effect: see FIG. 34 (A)) suggesting that the possibility is a fourth degree lower than the first degree. A gaming machine characterized by that.

According to this gaming machine, when the first expected effect is executed, the first suggestive effect (for example, normal reach) suggesting that the possibility that the special game is executed is the first degree, and the above-mentioned possible At least one of the second suggestion effects (for example, the pseudo-third consecutive variation effect) suggesting that the sex is a second degree higher than the first degree is executed. Therefore, when the first expected effect is executed, the player executes the second suggested effect rather than the first suggested effect, and both the first suggested effect and the second suggested effect are executed. You can enjoy the game while expecting that. Further, when the second expected effect is executed, the third suggestive effect (for example, SPSP) suggesting that the above possibility is a third degree higher than the first degree (corresponding to the first suggestive effect). Reach), or a fourth suggestion effect (eg, no reach effect) suggesting that the above possibility is a fourth degree lower than the first degree is performed. Therefore, when the second expected effect is executed, the player can enjoy the game while expecting that the third suggested effect is executed rather than the fourth suggested effect.

(Other configurations related to the first precursor effect and the second precursor effect)
In the present embodiment, the case where the third possibility is higher than the second possibility has been described as an example, but in other embodiments, the third possibility is higher than the first possibility and , A configuration that is lower than the second possibility may be adopted. That is, when the second precursor effect is executed, it is confirmed that the effect without reach is executed (similar to the present embodiment), or the jackpot reliability is higher than the normal reach and the pseudo third station. A configuration may be adopted in which it is confirmed that an effect having a lower jackpot reliability than the variable effect is executed.

Further, in the present embodiment, the first suggestion effect is a normal reach, the second suggestion effect is a pseudo-third variable effect, the third suggestion effect is SPSP reach, and the fourth suggestion effect is a non-reach effect. Although a certain case has been described as an example, the first suggestion effect to the fourth suggestion effect may be different from those illustrated in the present embodiment.

Further, in the present embodiment, the case where the first precursor effect is an effect of displaying a background image showing the state of the evening on the display screen 70 and outputting the corresponding effect sound from the speaker 38 has been described as an example, but other In the embodiment, for example, an effect using at least one of the frame lamp 37, the board lamp 5, and the speaker 38 may be executed as the first precursor effect.

Further, in the present embodiment, the case where the second precursor effect is an effect of displaying a background image showing the state of the night on the display screen 70 and outputting the corresponding effect sound from the speaker 38 has been described as an example, but other In the embodiment, for example, an effect using at least one of the frame lamp 37, the board lamp 5, and the speaker 38 may be executed as the second precursor effect.

Further, in the present embodiment, a case where either the first precursor effect or the second precursor effect is executed before the pre-reading target variation is started based on the preliminary determination result related to the pre-reading target variation has been described as an example. However, in another embodiment, based on the determination result of the first special symbol determination, immediately after the variation display of the first special symbol performed in response to the execution of the first special symbol determination is started, immediately after Either one of the first precursor effect and the second precursor effect may be executed.

[About icon proliferation production]
Next, the icon proliferation effect executed by the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 35 to 37. Here, FIG. 35 is an explanatory diagram for explaining each icon displayed in the third normal mode. FIG. 36 is a screen view illustrating an icon proliferation effect in which the effect image related to the hold suggestion display is propagated. FIG. 37 is a screen view illustrating an icon proliferation effect in which the effect image related to the variation suggestion display is propagated.

In the game machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the effect is controlled in the third normal mode, it is based on the preliminary determination result corresponding to the hold suggestion display suggesting that the right of the first special symbol determination is reserved. From the first display state in which the first number of effect images related to the hold suggestion display are displayed (for example, the state in which one helicopter icon is displayed in the hold icon display area 71: see FIG. 36 (D)). , A second display state in which a second number of effect images is displayed, which is larger than the first number related to the hold suggestion display (for example, a state in which two heli icons are displayed in the hold icon display area 71: FIG. 36 ( There is a case where a hold icon proliferation effect that changes the display state to (see E)) is performed.

Further, when the effect is controlled in the third normal mode, the first display state (1st display state) in which the first number of effect images related to the variation suggestion display suggesting that the variation display of the first special symbol is being performed is displayed. For example, from the state where two helicopter icons are displayed in the icon display area 72: see FIG. 37 (F)), a second number of effect images, which is larger than the first number related to the fluctuation suggestion display, is displayed. The icon proliferation effect may be performed to change the display state to the second display state (for example, a state in which three heli icons are displayed in the icon display area 72: see FIG. 37 (G)).

<Icon displayed during the 3rd normal mode>
FIG. 35 shows the type of the hold icon and each icon displayed as the hold icon and the icon when the effect is controlled in the third normal mode in the normal game state, the display mode of each icon, and the jackpot reliability of each icon. And whether or not each icon can be propagated (whether or not the icon proliferation effect can be produced) are shown in association with each other.

In the game machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the effect is controlled in the third normal mode, as the hold icon (or the icon), the white hold icon (white icon), the heli icon, illustrated in FIG. 35, Airplane icons, gold icons, and rainbow icons can be displayed.

(White icon)
The white hold icon is the default hold icon that is also displayed when the effect is controlled in the first normal mode or the second normal mode.

(Helicopter icon)
The helicopter icon is an icon imitating a helicopter, and the jackpot reliability when this helicopter icon is displayed in the hold icon display area 71 (or the icon display area 72) is set to about 5% in the present embodiment. ing. Further, this heli icon is an icon capable of executing the icon proliferation effect, and is displayed in the hold icon proliferation effect for multiplying the heli icon displayed in the hold icon display area 71 or in the icon display area 72. The icon proliferation effect that propagates the heli icon may be executed.

As the hold icon proliferation effect for this heli icon, the hold icon proliferation effect for multiplying one helicopter icon displayed in the hold icon display area 71 into two helicopter icons (for example, FIGS. 36 (D) to (D) to ( E)) and the hold icon proliferation effect of multiplying the two heli icons displayed in the hold icon display area 71 into three heli icons can be mentioned as an example. Further, as the icon proliferation effect for the heli icon, the icon proliferation effect of multiplying one helicopter icon displayed in the icon display area 72 into two helicopter icons (for example, FIGS. 37 (D) to 37 (D)). (See (E)) and the icon proliferation effect (see, for example, FIGS. 36 (F) to (G)) in which the two heli icons displayed in the icon display area 72 are propagated into three heli icons (for example, see FIGS. 36 (F) to (G)). Can be mentioned.

(Airplane icon)
The airplane icon is an icon imitating an airplane, and the jackpot reliability when this airplane icon is displayed in the hold icon display area 71 (or the icon display area 72) is set to about 25% in this embodiment. ing. Further, this airplane icon is an icon capable of executing the icon proliferation effect, and is displayed in the hold icon proliferation effect for multiplying the airplane icon displayed in the hold icon display area 71 or in the icon display area 72. The icon proliferation effect that propagates the airplane icon may be executed.

The hold icon proliferation effect for this airplane icon includes a hold icon proliferation effect that propagates one airplane icon displayed in the hold icon display area 71 to two airplane icons, and a hold icon proliferation effect that is displayed in the hold icon display area 71. An example is the hold icon proliferation effect that propagates the two icon of the two icons to the three icons of the airplane. Further, as the icon proliferation effect targeting the airplane icon, the icon proliferation effect of multiplying one airplane icon displayed in the icon display area 72 into two airplane icons and displaying in the icon display area 72. An example is the icon proliferation effect in which the two icon proliferations are propagated into three airplane icons.

Although the display mode and jackpot reliability of the helicopter icon and the airplane icon are different from each other, both of them are icons that can be the target of the icon proliferation effect, and it is possible to determine how many pseudo-series the variation effect in the look-ahead target variation develops. Both have in common that they have a suggestive function. Therefore, for example, an icon change effect may be executed in which one or a plurality of helicopter icons displayed in the hold icon display area 71 are changed to the same number of airplane icons as the helicopter icons. In addition, an icon change effect may be executed in which one or a plurality of helicopter icons displayed in the icon display area 72 are changed to the same number of airplane icons as the helicopter icons. FIGS. 37 (H) and 37 (I), which will be described later, illustrate how the three helicopter icons displayed in the icon display area 72 are changed to the same three airplane icons.

As described above, in the game machine 1 of the present embodiment, an icon change effect in which one or a plurality of helicopter icons are changed to the same number of airplane icons as the helicopter icons may be executed, but when the helicopter icons are displayed. Since the jackpot reliability is about 5% and the jackpot reliability when the airplane icon is displayed is about 25%, the icon change effect that one or more airplane icons change to the same number of heli icons as the airplane icon is created. It will never be executed.

(Gold icon)
The gold icon is a gold icon that imitates a spaceship, and its jackpot reliability is set to about 68% in this embodiment. In the game machine 1 of the present embodiment, depending on the number of helicopter icons (or airplane icons) displayed in the icon display area 72, the variation effect performed during the variation display of the first special symbol develops to a pseudo number of stations. It is suggested that, after developing to the pseudo 3rd station, it will not further develop to the pseudo 4th station, so after developing to the pseudo 3rd station, a helicopter icon or an airplane icon will be displayed in the icon display area 72. There is little need to keep it. Therefore, when the determination result of the first special symbol determination corresponding to the three helicopter icons (or three airplane icons) displayed in the icon display area 72 is "big hit" or "missing". If a variation pattern for reach loss with a relatively long variation time is selected as the variation pattern of the first special symbol, the three helicopter icons (or three airplane icons) displayed in the icon display area 72 are selected. ) May change to a gold icon.

In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the gold icon, like the white icon, has a function of suggesting to what number of pseudo stations the variation effect performed during the variation display of the first special symbol develops. No. Therefore, the icon proliferation effect for the gold icon displayed in the icon display area 72 is not executed.

Further, as is clear from the notation in FIG. 35, the jackpot reliability when the gold icon is displayed is the jackpot reliability when the heli icon is displayed and the jackpot reliability when the airplane icon is displayed. Since the value is set higher than that of the icon display area 72, even if the three heli icons (or three airplane icons) displayed in the icon display area 72 may change to gold icons, the icon display area 72 The gold icon displayed in is not changed to a helicopter icon (or airplane icon).

By the way, in the game machine 1 of the present embodiment, since the gold icon does not change to the helicopter icon (or airplane icon), if the gold icon is displayed in the hold icon display area 71, it changes. There will be a problem that it will not be possible to suggest how many pseudo-series the production will develop. Therefore, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, in order to avoid such a problem, the gold icon is not displayed in the hold icon display area 71, and three heli icons (or three heli icons (or) are displayed in the icon display area 72. After the three airplane icons) are displayed, the gold icon will be displayed instead of these icons.

When only two helicopter icons (or airplane icons) are displayed in the icon display area 72, the jackpot reliability is extremely low because the variation effect develops only up to the pseudo second station. Further, if the two helicopter icons (or two airplane icons) displayed in the icon display area 72 are changed to gold icons, it is suggested whether or not the variation effect develops to the pseudo third station after that. You will not be able to do it. Therefore, in the game machine 1 of the present embodiment, while executing the icon change effect of changing the three heli icons (or the three airplane icons) displayed in the icon display area 72 to the gold icon, the icon display is performed. A configuration is adopted in which the icon change effect of changing the two heli icons (or two airplane icons) displayed in the area 72 to the gold icon is not executed.

(Rainbow icon)
In FIG. 21 described above, an icon displayed when the production is controlled in a production mode other than the third normal mode such as the first normal mode, the second normal mode, the chance mode, and the intense heat mode is illustrated. However, as is clear from the notation of FIGS. 21 and 35, the rainbow icon is an icon that can be displayed regardless of the effect mode, and the jackpot reliability is set to 100% in the present embodiment. Therefore, if the determination result of the first special symbol determination in the normal game state is not "big hit", the rainbow icon is not displayed in the icon display area 72.

In the game machine 1 of the present embodiment, only when the determination result of the first special symbol determination corresponding to the three heli icons (or the three airplane icons) displayed in the icon display area 72 is "big hit". , An icon change effect that changes the three heli icons (or three airplane icons) displayed in the icon display area 72 to a rainbow icon, and three heli icons (or 3) displayed in the icon display area 72. An icon change effect may be executed in which one of the airplane icons) is changed to a gold icon and then changed to a rainbow icon.

In addition, in the game machine 1 of the present embodiment, the rainbow icon, like the white icon and the gold icon, has a function of suggesting to what number of pseudo stations the variation effect performed during the variation display of the first special symbol develops. The icon proliferation effect for the rainbow icon displayed in the icon display area 72 is not executed.

Further, as is clear from the notation in FIG. 35, the jackpot reliability when the rainbow icon is displayed is the jackpot reliability when the heli icon is displayed, the jackpot reliability when the airplane icon is displayed, and so on. It is set to a higher value than the jackpot reliability when the gold icon is displayed. Therefore, the three heli icons (or three airplane icons) displayed in the icon display area 72 change to rainbow icons, or the three heli icons (or three helicopters) displayed in the icon display area 72. Although the airplane icon) may change to a gold icon and then to a rainbow icon, the rainbow icon displayed in the icon display area 72 may change to a heli icon (or airplane icon), or the icon may change. A configuration is adopted in which the rainbow icon displayed in the icon display area 72 does not change to a gold icon.

By the way, in the game machine 1 of the present embodiment, since the configuration that the rainbow icon does not change to the helicopter icon (or airplane icon) is adopted, if the rainbow icon is displayed in the hold icon display area 71, it changes. There will be a problem that it will not be possible to suggest how many pseudo-series the production will develop. Therefore, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, in order to avoid such a problem, the rainbow icon is not displayed in the hold icon display area 71, and three heli icons (or three heli icons (or) are displayed in the icon display area 72. When the gold icon is displayed instead of these three heli icons (or three airplane icons), or when the gold icon is displayed instead of these icons, the rainbow icon should be displayed instead of these icons. It is supposed to be.

When only two helicopter icons (or airplane icons) are displayed in the icon display area 72, the jackpot reliability is extremely low because the variation effect develops only up to the pseudo second station. Further, when the two helicopter icons (or two airplane icons) displayed in the icon display area 72 are changed to rainbow icons, it is suggested whether or not the variation effect develops to the pseudo third station after that. You will not be able to do it. Therefore, in the game machine 1 of the present embodiment, an icon change effect of changing the three heli icons (or three airplane icons) displayed in the icon display area 72 to a rainbow icon and display in the icon display area 72. While executing the icon change effect of changing the three helicopter icons (or three airplane icons) to the gold icon and then the rainbow icon, the two helicopter icons displayed in the icon display area 72. Change the icon change effect to change (or two airplane icons) to a gold icon, or change the two heli icons (or two airplane icons) displayed in the icon display area 72 to a gold icon and then change to a rainbow icon. A configuration is adopted in which the changing icon change effect is not executed.

(Specific example of holding icon proliferation production)
Next, with reference to FIG. 36, a specific example of the hold icon proliferation effect for multiplying the helicopter icon displayed in the hold icon display area 71 will be described. In FIG. 36 (A), the first start port is displayed during the variable display of the first special symbol (and the effect symbol) corresponding to the icon (here, the white icon) displayed in the icon display area 72. A game ball wins in 21, and a heli icon is newly added to the hold icon display area 71 as a third hold icon (hold icon to be read ahead) corresponding to the third hold related to the first special symbol determination. The displayed state is illustrated.

Here, a case where the third hold icon is displayed as a helicopter icon from the beginning will be described. For example, the timing when the third hold related to the first special symbol determination occurs (FIG. 36 (A)). Is displayed), a white hold icon is displayed, and at the start of the next symbol variation of the symbol variation exemplified in FIG. 36 (A) (see FIG. 36 (C)), the white color to be read ahead. The hold icon may change to a heli icon.

FIG. 36 (B) shows the determination result of the first special symbol determination at the final stage of the variation display of the first special symbol corresponding to the icon (see FIG. 36 (A)) displayed in the icon display area 72. In order to notify that is "missing", a state in which three production symbols indicating the disparity of "486" are pseudo-stopped is illustrated. On the other hand, when the variable display of the first special symbol is completed, the lost symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 41 as the first special symbol, and the display screen 70 shows the disparity of "486". The three production symbols will stop as they are.

In this way, when a predetermined fixed time (0.5 seconds in the present embodiment) elapses after the lost symbol is stopped and displayed as the first special symbol, the earliest hold displayed in the hold icon display area 71 is held. The first special symbol determination corresponding to the icon (the leftmost hold icon in the hold icon display area 71 of FIG. 36B) is executed. Then, as the variable display of the first special symbol is started in response to the execution of the first special symbol determination, the earliest hold icon shifts from the hold icon display area 71 to the icon display area 72. At the same time, the scroll display of the three symbol columns is started (see FIGS. 36 (B) and 36 (C)). At that time, the remaining hold icon displayed in the hold icon display area 71 shifts toward the icon display area 72, and the helicopter icon, which is the hold icon to be read ahead, is displayed as the second hold icon. (See FIG. 36 (C)).

FIG. 36 (D) shows the determination result of the first special symbol determination at the final stage of the variation display of the first special symbol corresponding to the icon (see FIG. 36 (C)) displayed in the icon display area 72. In order to notify that is "missing", a state in which the three effect symbols indicating the disparity of "245" are pseudo-stopped is illustrated. On the other hand, when the variable display of the first special symbol is completed, the lost symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 41 as the first special symbol, and the display screen 70 shows the variation of "245". The three production symbols will stop as they are.

In this way, when a predetermined fixed time (0.5 seconds in the present embodiment) elapses after the lost symbol is stopped and displayed as the first special symbol, the earliest hold displayed in the hold icon display area 71 is held. The first special symbol determination corresponding to the icon (the leftmost hold icon in the hold icon display area 71 of FIG. 36 (D)) is executed. Then, as the variable display of the first special symbol is started in response to the execution of the first special symbol determination, the earliest hold icon shifts from the hold icon display area 71 to the icon display area 72. At the same time, the scroll display of the three symbol columns is started (see FIGS. 36 (D) and (E)). At that time, a hold icon proliferation effect is performed for the heli icon (see FIG. 36 (D)) displayed at the position (second position) where the second hold icon is displayed in the hold icon display area 71. Therefore, the heli icon is displayed at both the position where the earliest hold icon is displayed (first position) in the hold icon display area 71 and the above-mentioned second position (see FIG. 36 (E)). The hold icon proliferation effect here is realized, for example, by moving the helicopter icon displayed at the second position to the first position and newly displaying the helicopter icon at the second position.

When the display of FIG. 36 (E) is performed, the hold icon to be read ahead is composed of two helicopter icons, a helicopter icon arranged at the first position and a helicopter icon arranged at the second position. Therefore, in FIG. 36 (E), the arrow of the line extending from the character “look-ahead target” is directed to these two helicopter icons.

By the way, if the game ball does not easily win a prize at the first starting port 21 even though the player continues to hit left, the number of hold icons displayed in the hold icon display area 71 decreases, and as a result, the player May cause discomfort.

On the other hand, in the game machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the hold icon proliferation effect targeting the helicopter icon displayed at the second position is executed as described above, the second icon is accompanied by the start of the symbol change. 1 Although the number of pending special symbol judgments has decreased, a new helicopter icon is displayed at the second position, and as a result, the state where the helicopter icon is displayed at the second position is maintained (Fig.). 36 (D) and (E)), it is possible to give the player a feeling that the number of holds has not decreased. Therefore, it is possible to effectively suppress the problem of causing discomfort to the player as described above.

Further, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, when one (or two) pseudo-continuous effects are executed and the variable effect develops into the pseudo-second (or pseudo-third) pseudo-continuous effect, (or A configuration is adopted in which the possibility of a big hit is higher than in the case where the variable effect does not develop after the pseudo second station (because the pseudo continuous effect is not executed). On the other hand, according to the above-mentioned hold icon proliferation effect, it is confirmed at the timing when the helicopter icon is propagated to two that the variation effect develops at least up to the pseudo second station in the look-ahead target fluctuation, so that the jackpot is hit. It is also possible to improve the expectation of the player. In addition, the player is expected to further increase the number of hold icons and increase the number of helicopter icons from two to three (that is, the fluctuation effect develops into the pseudo-third station due to the change in the look-ahead target). Can be made to.

Here, the hold icon proliferation effect of multiplying the helicopter icon displayed at the second position of the hold icon display area 71 into two helicopter icons has been described as an example, but the third hold icon display area 71 has been described. In some cases, a hold icon proliferation effect is executed in which the helicopter icon displayed at the third position where the hold icon is displayed is propagated to two helicopter icons. This hold icon proliferation effect is realized, for example, by moving the helicopter icon displayed at the third position to the second position and newly displaying the helicopter icon at the third position.

Further, as described above, when the next symbol change is started while the helicopter icon is displayed in both the second position and the third position in the hold icon display area 71, the helicopter icon is displayed in the second position. By moving the existing helicopter icon to the 1st position, moving the helicopter icon displayed in the 3rd position to the 2nd position, and newly displaying the helicopter icon in the 3rd position, 3 helicopter icons can be displayed. A hold icon proliferation effect that propagates to a helicopter icon may be executed.

Here, unlike the example shown in FIG. 36, a case where the hold icon proliferation effect is performed in a state where the helicopter icon is displayed at the third position in the hold icon display area 71 has been described, but the game of the present embodiment has been described. For the following reasons, the machine 1 does not perform the icon proliferation effect for the helicopter icon displayed at the fourth position where the fourth hold icon is displayed in the hold icon display area 71.

That is, if the hold icon proliferation effect is executed while the helicopter icon is displayed at the 4th position of the hold icon display area 71, the helicopter icon is newly displayed at the 4th position, so that the 4th position is not opened. When a game ball newly wins a prize in the first starting port 21, there is a possibility that a problem may occur in which the hold icon corresponding to the winning cannot be displayed at the fourth position. Therefore, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the helicopter icon may be displayed at the fourth position in order to suppress such a problem, but the helicopter icon is displayed at the fourth position. It is decided not to perform the icon proliferation production of.

Returning to the description of FIG. 36, in FIG. 36 (F), in the final stage of the variable display of the first special symbol corresponding to the icon (see FIG. 36 (E)) displayed in the icon display area 72, the first 1 In order to notify that the determination result of the special symbol determination is "missing", a state in which the three effect symbols indicating the disparity of "311" are pseudo-stopped is illustrated. On the other hand, when the variable display of the first special symbol is completed, the lost symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 41 as the first special symbol, and the display screen 70 shows the disparity of "311". The three production symbols will stop as they are.

When a predetermined fixed time (0.5 seconds in the present embodiment) elapses after the lost symbol is stopped and displayed as the first special symbol, the earliest hold icon displayed in the hold icon display area 71 (FIG. 36). The first special symbol determination corresponding to the leftmost hold icon: helicopter icon in the hold icon display area 71 of (F) is executed. Then, as the variable display of the first special symbol is started in response to the execution of the first special symbol determination, the helicopter icon, which is the earliest hold icon, is displayed from the hold icon display area 71. Along with shifting to the area 72, the scroll display of the three symbol columns is started (see FIGS. 36 (F) and 36 (G)). At that time, the helicopter icon displayed at the second position in the hold icon display area 71 shifts to the first position and is displayed like the first hold icon.

In this way, when the look-ahead target variation is started, the pseudo-continuous effect is executed in the same manner as described above based on FIG. 11 (D) (see FIG. 36 (H)). Specifically, the scroll speed of the symbol row in the left column decreases and the left symbol (for example, 6 symbols) pseudo-stops, and then the scroll speed of the symbol row in the right column decreases (pseudo-stops first). The right symbol (for example, 8 symbols) (which is different from the left symbol) is pseudo-stopped, and then the scroll speed of the symbol row in the middle row is reduced, and 7 symbols are pseudo-stopped as the middle symbol that notifies the execution of the pseudo-continuous effect. ..

In this way, when seven symbols are pseudo-stopped in the middle row after the effect symbols that are different from each other as the left symbol and the right symbol are pseudo-stopped, the pseudo-second variation effect following the pseudo-first variation effect is started. (See FIGS. 36 (H) and 36 (I)). Specifically, after the character "x2" suggesting the start of the pseudo-second variation effect is displayed large in the central area of the display screen 70, the character "x2" is displayed on the upper left of the display screen 70. It is displayed smaller in one area, and along with this, the scroll display of the three symbol strings is restarted in the effect symbol display area 73.

Note that, in FIGS. 36 (H) and 36 (I), the helicopter icon (second) displayed at the first position of the hold icon display area 71 is accompanied by the start of the pseudo-second variation effect. The helicopter icon) moves to the icon display area 72, and two helicopter icons are displayed in the icon display area 72. (That is, from the display of FIG. 36 (G) to the display of FIG. 36 (H)) and during the execution of the pseudo-continuous production (display of FIG. 36 (H)). The second helicopter icon may move from the hold icon display area 71 to the icon display area 72.

Here, based on FIGS. 36 (G) to 36 (I), one helicopter icon is displayed from the hold icon display area 71 to the icon display area at the start of the look-ahead target variation and at the start of the pseudo second station. The case of moving to 72 has been described. On the other hand, when the hold icon proliferation effect for the helicopter icon displayed in the hold icon display area 71 is performed twice, at the start of the look-ahead target change, at the start of the pseudo second station, and at the start of the pseudo second station. At the start of the third station, each helicopter icon moves from the hold icon display area 71 to the icon display area 72.

However, the movement of the helicopter icon after the start of the look-ahead target change is not limited to these. For example, the look-ahead target change is started with two helicopter icons displayed in the hold icon display area 71. In this case, these two helicopter icons may be moved to the icon display area 72 together with the start of the look-ahead target variation. Further, for example, when the look-ahead target change is started with the three helicopter icons displayed in the hold icon display area 71, these three helicopter icons are displayed together with the start of the look-ahead target change. It may be moved to the area 72.

Although not shown in the figure, when the variation effect of the pseudo second station is developed as illustrated in FIG. 36 (I), the icon display area 72 is generated during the variation effect of the pseudo second station. The icon proliferation effect in which the helicopter icon displayed in is propagated from two to three is performed, and then the (second) pseudo-ream effect is performed, which develops into a pseudo-third variable effect. In some cases. Further, when the pseudo-second variation effect is developed as illustrated in FIG. 36 (I), the (second) pseudo-continuous effect is performed during the pseudo-second variation effect, and the pseudo 3 is performed. When the continuous variation effect is started, the icon proliferation effect may be performed in which the helicopter icon displayed in the icon display area 72 proliferates from two to three.

Further, as illustrated in FIG. 36 (I), when the pseudo second station variation effect is developed, the two heli icons displayed in the icon display area 72 are displayed during the pseudo second station variation effect. Similarly, an icon change effect that changes to two airplane icons and the icon proliferation effect that the airplane icon proliferates from two to three are performed, and then a (second) pseudo-continuous effect is performed to simulate. It may develop into a third series of variable effects. Further, when the pseudo-second variation effect is developed as illustrated in FIG. 36 (I), the (second) pseudo-continuous effect is performed during the pseudo-second variation effect, and the pseudo-triple effect is performed. When the eye variation effect is started, the icon proliferation effect may be performed in which the helicopter icon displayed in the icon display area 72 proliferates from two to three.

In addition, when the variation effect of the pseudo third station is developed, the icon change effect in which the three heli icons displayed in the icon display area 72 are changed to the same three airplane icons is performed, or the icon display area 72. When an icon change effect is performed in which the three heli icons displayed in are changed to gold icons (or rainbow icons), the three heli icons displayed in the icon display area 72 are changed to three airplane icons. After that, it may change to a gold icon (or rainbow icon).

(Specific example of the icon proliferation effect)
Next, with reference to FIG. 37, a specific example of the icon proliferation effect for multiplying the helicopter icon displayed in the icon display area 72 will be described. In FIG. 37 (A), the first start port is displayed during the variable display of the first special symbol (and the effect symbol) corresponding to the icon (here, the white icon) displayed in the icon display area 72. A game ball wins in 21 and helicopters are placed at the first position of the hold icon display area 71 as the first hold icon (hold icon to be read ahead) corresponding to the first hold related to the first special symbol determination. The appearance of the newly displayed icon is illustrated.

Here, a case where the first hold icon, which is the hold icon to be read ahead, is displayed as a helicopter icon from the beginning will be described. For example, the first hold related to the first special symbol determination has occurred. At the timing (the timing at which the display of FIG. 37 (A) is performed), a white hold icon is displayed, and the symbol variation following the symbol variation exemplified in FIG. 37 (A), that is, white at the start of the look-ahead target variation. When the hold icon of is moved to the icon display area 72, it may change to a heli icon.

FIG. 37 (B) shows the determination result of the first special symbol determination at the final stage of the variation display of the first special symbol corresponding to the icon (see FIG. 37 (A)) displayed in the icon display area 72. In order to notify that is "missing", a state in which the three effect symbols indicating the disparity of "265" are pseudo-stopped is illustrated. On the other hand, when the variable display of the first special symbol is completed, the lost symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 41 as the first special symbol, and the display screen 70 shows the variation of "265". The three production symbols will stop as they are.

In this way, when a predetermined fixed time (0.5 seconds in the present embodiment) elapses after the lost symbol is stopped and displayed as the first special symbol, the earliest hold displayed in the hold icon display area 71 is held. The first special symbol determination corresponding to the icon (holding icon at the left end in the holding icon display area 71 of FIG. 37B: helicopter icon) is executed. Then, as the variable display of the first special symbol is started in response to the execution of the first special symbol determination, the helicopter icon moves from the first position of the hold icon display area 71 to the icon display area 72. Along with the shift, the scroll display of the three symbol strings, which is the change in the look-ahead target, is started (see FIGS. 37 (B) and 37 (C)).

In this way, when the look-ahead target variation is started, the pseudo-continuous effect is executed in the same manner as described above based on FIG. 11 (D) (see FIG. 37 (D)). Specifically, the scroll speed of the symbol row in the left column decreases and the left symbol (for example, 3 symbols) pseudo-stops, and then the scroll speed of the symbol row in the right column decreases (pseudo-stops first). The right symbol (for example, 4 symbols) pseudo-stops (different from the left symbol), and then the scroll speed of the symbol row in the middle row decreases, and 7 symbols stop pseudo-stop as the middle symbol that notifies the execution of the pseudo-continuous effect. ..

In this way, when seven symbols are pseudo-stopped in the middle row after the effect symbols that are different from each other as the left symbol and the right symbol are pseudo-stopped, the pseudo-second variation effect following the pseudo-first variation effect is started. (See FIGS. 37 (D) and 37 (E)). Specifically, after the character "x2" suggesting the start of the pseudo-second variation effect is displayed large in the central area of the display screen 70, the character "x2" is displayed on the upper left of the display screen 70. It is displayed smaller in one area, and along with this, the scroll display of the three symbol strings is restarted in the effect symbol display area 73.

In addition, in FIGS. 37 (D) and 37 (E), the helicopter icon displayed in the icon display area 72 proliferates from one to two as the pseudo second continuous variation effect is started. Although the state in which the icon proliferation effect is performed is illustrated, the icon proliferation effect may be executed while the pseudo-first variable effect is being performed or during the pseudo-continuous effect. be.

As illustrated in FIG. 37 (E), when the pseudo-second pseudo-continuous effect is developed, the second pseudo-continuous effect may be performed while the pseudo-second variation effect is being performed. Yes (see FIG. 37 (F)). FIG. 37 (F) illustrates a state in which 6 symbols are pseudo-stopped as the left symbol, 8 symbols are pseudo-stopped as the right symbol, and 7 symbols are pseudo-stopped as the middle symbol.

In this way, when seven symbols are pseudo-stopped in the middle row after the effect symbols that are different from each other as the left symbol and the right symbol are pseudo-stopped, the pseudo-third-series variation effect following the pseudo-second variation effect is started. (See FIGS. 37 (F) and 37 (G)). Specifically, after the character "x3" suggesting the start of the pseudo-third series of variation effects is displayed large in the central area of the display screen 70, the character "x3" is displayed on the upper left of the display screen 70. It is displayed smaller in one area, and along with this, the scroll display of the three symbol strings is restarted in the effect symbol display area 73.

In addition, in FIGS. 37 (F) and 37 (G), the helicopter icons displayed in the icon display area 72 proliferate from two to three as the pseudo-third consecutive variation effect is started. Although the state in which the icon proliferation effect is performed is illustrated, the icon proliferation effect is executed while the pseudo second continuous variable effect is being performed or during the execution of the second pseudo continuous effect. In some cases.

In this way, when a predetermined time elapses after the development of the pseudo-third continuous variation effect, reach is established with, for example, three symbols (see FIG. 37 (H)). At that time, an effect display showing how a shooting star collides with the three helicopter icons displayed in the icon display area 72 is performed (see FIG. 37 (H)), and the three helicopter icons become three airplane icons. A changing icon change effect may be performed (see FIGS. 37 (H) and 37 (I)).

When three helicopter icons are displayed in the icon display area 72, when the display of these three helicopter icons is continued or when these three helicopter icons change to gold icons, these three helicopter icons May change to a gold icon and then to a rainbow icon.

In addition, when it develops into a pseudo-third variable effect, it develops from normal reach to SP reach and a winning notification effect is performed at the end of SP reach, or normal reach does not go through SP reach (or SP reach). It develops into SPSP reach (via), and a winning notification effect is performed at the end of SPSP reach.

By the way, since the helicopter icon and the airplane icon suggest how many pseudo-continuous effects the fluctuation effect develops due to the change in the look-ahead target, they are used during SP reach or SPSP reach where the pseudo-continuous effect is not performed. There is little need to display the icon. Therefore, for example, the helicopter icon (or airplane icon) displayed in the icon display area 72 is deleted at a predetermined timing such as when the SP reach is developed, during the SP reach, when the SPSP reach is developed, or during the SPSP reach. You may do so.

(About game machine 1 that can execute icon proliferation effect)
Up to this point, the icon proliferation effect executed by the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment has been described with reference to FIGS. 35 to 37, but the gaming machine 1 capable of executing such an icon proliferation effect is as follows. It can be regarded as a game machine.

A determination means for determining whether or not to execute a special game (for example, a jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player (for example, the main CPU 81 that executes the jackpot determination process in step S308 of FIG. 42, which will be described later).
Holding means capable of holding the right of the determination up to a predetermined number (the acquired information acquired when the game ball wins in the first starting port 21 is stored in the special figure 1 / first hold storage area 831 to the special figure 1/4 hold. It is stored in one of the storage areas 834 (see FIG. 38 (A)), and the acquired information acquired when the game ball wins the second starting port 22 is stored in the special figure 2 and the first reserved storage area 835 to special figure 2. A main CPU 81 stored in any of the fourth reserved storage areas 838 (see FIG. 38 (A)) and
Before the determination is made for the right held by the holding means, the pre-determination means for pre-determining whether or not to execute the special game (executes the pre-determination processing of steps S211 and S219 in FIG. 40). Main CPU 81) and
The effect control means (for example, sub CPU 91, image / sound control CPU 101, lamp CPU 121) for controlling the execution of the effect is provided.
The effect control means
It is possible to execute a hold suggestion display (for example, display of an icon in the hold icon display area 71) suggesting that the right of the determination is held.
From the first display state (for example, see FIG. 36 (D)) in which the first number of effect images related to the hold suggestion display are displayed based on the result of the preliminary determination corresponding to the hold suggestion display. It is possible to change the display state to a second display state (for example, see FIG. 36 (E)) in which a second number of effect images, which is larger than the first number related to the hold suggestion display, is displayed. A featured gaming machine.

According to such a gaming machine, from the first display state in which the first number of effect images related to the hold suggestion display is displayed, the second number of effect images related to the hold suggestion display (more than the first number) May change to the second display state in which is displayed. Therefore, it is possible to give the player the impression that the number of pending determination rights has increased, and as a result, it is possible to effectively improve the interest of the pending suggestion display.

A determination means for determining whether or not to execute a special game (for example, a jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player (for example, the main CPU 81 that executes the jackpot determination process in step S308 of FIG. 42, which will be described later).
When the determination is made, the symbol display control means (for example, the first special symbol display 41) that displays the symbol in a variable manner and then stops and displays the symbol indicating the result of the determination (for example, the first special symbol display 41). 1 Main CPU 81) that controls the special symbol display 41 and
The effect control means (for example, sub CPU 91, image / sound control CPU 101, lamp CPU 121) for controlling the execution of the effect is provided.
The effect control means
It is possible to execute a fluctuation suggestion display (for example, display of an icon in the icon display area 72) suggesting that the symbol is being displayed in a variable manner.
From the first display state (for example, see FIG. 37 (F)) in which the first number of effect images related to the variation suggestion display is displayed, the second number of effects larger than the first number related to the variation suggestion display is displayed. A gaming machine characterized in that the display state can be changed to a second display state (for example, see FIG. 37 (G)) in which an image is displayed.

According to such a gaming machine, from the first display state in which the first number of effect images related to the variation suggestion display is displayed, the second number of effect images related to the variation suggestion display (more than the first number) are displayed. May change to the second display state in which is displayed. Therefore, it is possible to give the fluctuation suggestion image a change that is not found in the change effect that changes the display color of the effect image (variation suggestion image) related to the variation suggestion display, and effectively enhances the interest of the effect using the variation suggestion image. It is possible to improve.

(Other configurations related to icon proliferation production)
The following configuration may be adopted for the icon proliferation effect.
That is, in the present embodiment, the case where the icon proliferation effect (holding icon proliferation effect or the icon proliferation effect) is executed only in the third normal mode has been described as an example. On the other hand, in other embodiments, it is possible to adopt a configuration in which the icon proliferation effect can be executed even in the first normal mode, the second normal mode, the chance mode, and the intense hot mode. Further, the icon proliferation effect may be executed not only when the game is controlled in the normal game state but also when the game is controlled in the probabilistic game state or the time-saving game state.

Further, in the present embodiment, as described above based on FIGS. 36 (D) and 36 (E), in order to propagate the helicopter icon displayed at the second position in the hold icon display area 71, the symbol variation is started. The helicopter icon displayed in the second position is moved to the first position, and the helicopter icon is newly displayed in the second position, and the helicopter icon is displayed in both the first position and the second position. The case where the display state is displayed has been described as an example. On the other hand, in another embodiment, when the helicopter icon displayed at the second position is moved to the first position with the start of the symbol change, the helicopter icon is propagated to two and 2 Both of the two helicopter icons may be displayed in the first position.

Hereinafter, the RAM configuration of each control board for realizing the game control and the effect control described based on the drawings up to FIG. 37, and the processing performed on each control board will be described.

[Configuration example of main RAM 83]
FIG. 38 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the storage area of the main RAM 83 and the information stored in each storage area. As illustrated in FIG. 38 (A), the main RAM 83 has a determination storage area 830 as a storage area for storing acquired information or the like acquired when the game ball wins a prize in the first starting port 21. 1st and 1st reserved storage areas 831, 1st and 2nd reserved storage areas 832, 1st and 3rd reserved storage areas 833, and 1st and 4th reserved storage areas 834 are provided. Further, the main RAM 83 has the determination storage area 830 and the special figure 2 / first hold storage area 835 as storage areas for storing the acquired information and the like acquired when the game ball wins in the second start port 22. , Special Figure 2 and 2nd Hold Storage Area 836, Special Figure 2 and 3rd Hold Storage Area 837, and Special Figure 2 and 4 Hold Storage Area 838 are provided.

The determination storage area 830 is a storage area in which various information used for the special symbol determination is stored when the special symbol determination is actually executed. The special figure 1 / 1st reserved storage area 831 to the special figure 1 / 4th reserved storage area 834 is a storage area for storing various information related to the 1st special symbol determination, and the special figure 2 / 1st reserved storage area. The 835-special figure 2/4 reserved storage area 838 is a storage area in which various information related to the second special symbol determination is stored. Then, when both the first special symbol determination and the second special symbol determination are suspended, the second special symbol determination is preferentially digested over the first special symbol determination. Therefore, in the determination storage area 830, when the reserved special symbol determination is executed, if the second special symbol determination is suspended, it is stored in the special figure 2 and the first reserved storage area 835. When various information is shifted and only the first special symbol determination is reserved, the various information stored in the special figure 1 / first reserved storage area 831 is shifted.

As illustrated in FIG. 38 (B), the reserved storage areas 831 to 838 are areas for storing information for holding the right of special symbol determination, and each is a jackpot random number acquired by the main CPU 81. It includes an area for storing a symbol random number, an area for storing a reach random number, an area for storing a variation pattern random number, an area for storing pre-judgment information which is information indicating a pre-judgment result, and the like.

Here, the jackpot random number, the symbol random number, the reach random number, and the fluctuation pattern random number are as described above. The pre-determination information is information obtained by a pre-determination process (see FIG. 41) described later based on a jackpot random number, a symbol random number, a reach random number, and a fluctuation pattern random number. The pre-judgment information is, specifically, winning start information, information indicating whether or not the judgment result of the special symbol judgment is a jackpot, and if it is a jackpot, information indicating what kind of jackpot is. It includes information indicating a variation pattern of a special symbol, information indicating a gaming state of the gaming machine 1, and the like. Here, the winning start opening information is acquired when the jackpot random number, the symbol random number, the reach random number, and the fluctuation pattern random number stored in the same hold storage area are won by the game ball in the first starting opening 21. This is information indicating whether or not the game ball was acquired when the game ball won a prize in the second starting port 22. The pre-determination information including this information is stored in the same reserved storage area as the jackpot random number, the symbol random number, the reach random number, and the fluctuation pattern random number used in the pre-determination process.

In the game machine 1, each time a game ball wins a prize in the first starting port 21, the five pieces of information explained based on FIG. 38 (B) are displayed in order from the special figure 1 and the first reserved storage area 831. -It is stored in one of the first reserved storage area 831 to the special figure 1 and the fourth reserved storage area 834. In addition, each time the game ball wins a prize in the second starting port 22, the above five pieces of information are displayed in the order of the special figure 2 and the first reserved storage area 835, in the order of the special figure 2 and the first reserved storage area 835 to the special figure 2. It is stored in any of the fourth reserved storage areas 838.

For example, in a state where the information is stored in the determination storage area 830 and the information is not stored in any of the special figure 1 and the first reserved storage area 831 to the special figure 1 and the fourth reserved storage area 834, the first When the game ball wins the starting port 21, five pieces of information related to the first special symbol determination newly acquired in response to the winning are stored in the special figure 1 and the first reserved storage area 831. Further, for example, the first start port 21 has five pieces of information stored in each of the determination storage area 830, the special figure 1 / first reserved storage area 831, and the special figure 1/2 reserved storage area 832. When the game ball wins a prize, five pieces of information related to the first special symbol determination newly acquired according to the winning are stored in the special figure 1 and 3 reserved storage areas 833.

Further, when the information stored in the special figure 1 / 1st reserved storage area 831 is shifted to the determination storage area 830 when the first special symbol determination is executed, the special figure 1 / 2nd reserved storage area 832 or later is performed. The information stored in the reserved storage area related to the first special symbol determination is shifted to the special figure 1 / first reserved storage area 831 side. For example, the information stored in the special figure 1 and the first reserved storage area 831 is stored in the state where the information is stored in each of the special figure 1 and the first reserved storage area 831 to the special figure 1 and the third reserved storage area 833. When the determination storage area 830 is shifted, the information stored in the special figure 1 and 2 reserved storage areas 832 is shifted to the special figure 1 and 1 reserved storage area 831, and the special figure 1 and 3 reserved storage areas are shifted to. The information stored in the area 833 is shifted to the special figure 1 and 2 reserved storage areas 832.

Such information shift processing is also performed in the special figure 2 / first reserved storage area 835 to the special figure 2 / 4th reserved storage area 838 in which the information related to the second special symbol determination is stored. In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, when both the first special symbol determination and the second special symbol determination are reserved, that is, the special figure 1 / first reserved storage area 831 and the special figure 2 / 1st reserved When information is stored in both of the storage areas 835, the special figures 2 and 1 are prior to the shift processing for the special figures 1 and 1 reserved storage areas 831 to the special figures 1 and 4 reserved storage areas 834. 1 The shift process for the reserved storage area 835 to the special figure 2 and the fourth reserved storage area 838 is prioritized.

By the way, even if a game ball wins a prize in the first starting port 21 or the second starting port 22 and various random numbers are acquired during the variable display of the special symbol or the jackpot game, the special symbol determination and the variable display of the special symbol are displayed. It cannot be done immediately. Therefore, when various random numbers are acquired under such a situation, the main CPU 81 uses the acquired various random numbers and the like as information for holding the right to determine the special symbol in the reserved storage area 831. It is supposed to be stored in any of the areas of ~ 838. On the other hand, when the special symbol is not displayed in a variable manner, the special symbol determination is not held, and the jackpot game is not in progress, the main CPU 81 receives various random numbers and the like acquired when the start opening prize is won. It is stored directly in the determination storage area 830.

[Interrupt processing by the main control board 80]
Next, the interrupt processing executed on the main control board 80 will be described with reference to FIG. 39. Here, FIG. 39 is a flowchart illustrating interrupt processing executed on the main control board 80. The main control board 80 repeatedly executes a series of processes illustrated in FIG. 39 at regular time intervals (for example, 4 milliseconds) during normal operation except for special cases such as when the power is turned on or when the power is turned off. .. The processing of the main control board 80 described based on the flowcharts of FIGS. 39 and 39 is performed according to an instruction issued by the main CPU 81 based on the program stored in the main ROM 82.

First, the main CPU 81 executes a random number update process for updating various random numbers such as a jackpot random number, a symbol random number, a reach random number, a variable pattern random number, and a normal symbol random number (step S1). The jackpot random number, the symbol random number, the reach random number, the variable pattern random number, and the ordinary symbol random number are added by "1" each time the process of step S1 is performed. A loop counter is used as the counter that performs the process of step S1, and each random number is returned to "0" and updated after reaching a preset maximum value.

Following the process of step S1, the main CPU 81 acquires various random numbers according to the input of the detection signals from the first start port sensor 211, the second start port sensor 221 and the gate sensor 251. The sensor detection process including the process is executed (step S2). This sensor detection process will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 40.

Following the process of step S2, the main CPU 81 executes the special symbol determination to cause the first special symbol display 41 or the second special symbol display 42 to display the special symbol in a variable manner, and then the determination result of the special symbol determination. A special symbol process including a process of stopping and displaying the special symbol indicating the above is executed (step S3). This special symbol processing will be described in detail later based on FIG. 42.

Following the process of step S3, the main CPU 81 executes a normal symbol determination, causes the normal symbol display 43 to display the normal symbol in a variable manner, and then stops and displays the normal symbol indicating the result of the normal symbol determination. Normal symbol processing is executed (step S4).

Following the process of step S4, the main CPU 81 controls the second start port solenoid 222 to operate the opening / closing member 23 when it is determined that the second start port 22 is to be opened as a result of the normal symbol determination. 2 The second starting port opening / closing control process for opening / closing the starting port 22 is executed (step S5).

Following the process of step S5, when the main CPU 81 determines that the jackpot is a "big hit" in the jackpot determination process executed in the special symbol process of step S3, the first big prize opening solenoid 262 (or the second big prize) The large winning opening opening / closing control process for opening / closing the first large winning opening 26 (or the second large winning opening 28) is executed by controlling the mouth solenoid 282) (step S6). The opening / closing control process for the winning opening will be described in detail later with reference to FIGS. 46 to 48.

Following the process of step S6, the main CPU 81 executes a prize ball process for controlling the payout of the prize ball according to the winning of the game ball (step S7).

Following the process of step S7, the main CPU 81 transmits to the sub-control board 90 information necessary for determining various commands set (stored) in the main RAM 83 and the effect contents in the process steps prior to step S7. The process is executed (step S8).

[Sensor detection processing by the main control board 80]
FIG. 40 is a detailed flowchart of the sensor detection process in step S2 of FIG. 39. As illustrated in FIG. 40, in the main CPU 81, following the random number update process in step S1, the gate sensor 251 passes the game ball through the gate 25 based on the presence / absence of the input of the detection signal from the gate sensor 251. It is determined whether or not it has been detected (step S201). Here, when it is determined that the gate sensor 251 has detected the passage of the game ball through the gate 25 (step S201: YES), the hold number F for the normal symbol determination stored in the main RAM 83 is set in advance. It is determined whether or not it is less than the maximum number of pending symbols Fmax (“4” in this embodiment) for symbol determination (step S202).

When the main CPU 81 determines that the hold number F is less than "4" (step S202: YES), the main CPU 81 updates the hold number F to a value obtained by adding "1" (step S203), and the random number update process in step S1 is performed. With respect to the ordinary symbol random number that is updated every time the random number is performed, the value of the timing at which the passage of the game ball to the gate 25 is detected is acquired and stored in a predetermined area of the main RAM 83 (step S204).

On the other hand, when the main CPU 81 executes the process of step S204 and determines that the gate sensor 251 has not detected the passage of the game ball to the gate 25 (step S201: NO), the hold number F is less than "4". If it is determined that this is not the case (step S202: NO), the second start port sensor 221 detects that the game ball has won the second start port 22 based on the presence or absence of the input of the detection signal from the second start port sensor 221. It is determined whether or not this has been done (step S206). Here, when it is determined that the second start port sensor 221 has detected the winning of the game ball with respect to the second start port 22 (step S206: YES), the number of hold numbers T2 for the second special symbol determination stored in the main RAM 83. Is less than the preset maximum hold number T2max (“4” in the present embodiment) of the second special symbol determination (step S207).

When the main CPU 81 determines that the hold number T2 is less than "4" (step S207: YES), the main CPU 81 updates the hold number T2 to a value obtained by adding "1" (step S208), and the random number update process in step S1 is performed. With respect to the jackpot random number, the symbol random number, the reach random number, and the fluctuation pattern random number, which are updated each time the game is performed, the value of the timing at which the winning of the game ball with respect to the second starting port 22 is detected is acquired (step S209).

In this way, various random numbers related to the second special symbol determination are generated according to the establishment of the acquisition condition that the winning of the game ball for the second starting port 22 is detected when the holding number T2 is less than the maximum holding number T2max. To be acquired. When various random numbers are acquired in a situation where the second special symbol determination and the variation display of the second special symbol can be immediately executed, these random numbers are directly stored in the determination storage area 830 and cannot be executed immediately. When various random numbers are acquired in the situation, these random numbers are stored in any of the special figure 2, the first reserved storage area 835, and the special figure 2, the fourth reserved storage area 838.

When the process of step S209 is executed, the main CPU 81 determines whether or not the current state is the high base state (step S210). The time saving game flag is stored in the main RAM 83. At this time, the time-saving game flag is set to "OFF" when controlling the operation of the opening / closing member 23 so that the game ball is in a low base state in which it is difficult for the game ball to win in the second start port 22, and the game ball is set in the second start port 22. Is a flag set to "ON" when controlling the operation of the opening / closing member 23 so as to be in a high base state in which is easy to win a prize. In step S210, the main CPU 81 determines whether or not the current state is the high base state based on whether or not the time saving game flag is set to “ON”.

When the main CPU 81 determines that the current state is the high base state (step S210: YES), that is, when the time saving game flag is set to "ON", the pre-determination relating to the hold of the second special symbol determination The process is executed (step S211). Specifically, the jackpot determination process (see FIG. 43) and the variation pattern selection process (see FIG. 44), which will be described later, are executed based on various random numbers acquired in response to the winning of the game ball in the second starting port 22. Based on the various random numbers acquired in the process of step S209, it is determined in advance whether or not it will be a big hit, and the change of the second special symbol when the second special symbol determination is executed. A pre-determination process is executed to predetermine which variation pattern is selected as the pattern. The pre-determination information that is the result of this pre-determination process is stored in the same reserved storage area in which the jackpot random numbers and the like used in the pre-determination process are stored.

If a game ball wins a prize in the second starting port 22 while the number of pending numbers T2 for determining the second special symbol is "0", neither during the jackpot game nor during the variable display of the special symbol, the winning number is increased. The various acquired random numbers are directly stored in the determination storage area 830, and the second special symbol determination based on these random numbers is immediately executed. In this case, since the second special symbol determination is not suspended, the pre-determination process related to the second special symbol determination is not performed. Such a pre-determination process will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 41.

When the main CPU 81 executes the process of step S211 or determines that it is not in the high base state (step S210: NO), the main CPU 81 sets the hold command related to the second special symbol determination in the main RAM 83 (step S212). This hold command is a command for notifying that the second special symbol determination has been held, and is transmitted to the sub-control board 90 by the transmission process in step S8. If the process of step S212 is performed without the pre-determination process of step S211 being performed, a hold command that does not include the pre-determination information is transmitted to the sub-control board 90. On the other hand, when the process of step S212 is performed after the pre-determination process of step S211 is performed, a hold command including the pre-determination information is transmitted to the sub-control board 90.

On the other hand, when the main CPU 81 executes the process of step S212 and determines that the second start port sensor 221 has not detected the winning of the game ball for the second start port 22 (step S206: NO), the second When it is determined that the hold number T2 of the special symbol determination is not less than "4" (step S207: NO), the first start port sensor 211 is based on the presence or absence of the input of the detection signal from the first start port sensor 211. It is determined whether or not the winning of the game ball with respect to the first starting port 21 is detected (step S214). Here, when it is determined that the first start port sensor 211 has detected the winning of the game ball for the first start port 21 (step S214: YES), the number of hold numbers T1 for the first special symbol determination stored in the main RAM 83. Is less than the preset maximum hold number T1max (“4” in the present embodiment) of the first special symbol determination (step S215).

When the main CPU 81 determines that the hold number T1 is less than "4" (step S215: YES), the main CPU 81 updates the hold number T1 to a value obtained by adding "1" (step S216), and the random number update process in step S1 is performed. With respect to the jackpot random number, the symbol random number, the reach random number, and the fluctuation pattern random number that are updated each time the game is performed, the value of the timing at which the winning of the game ball with respect to the first starting port 21 is detected is acquired (step S217).

In this way, various random numbers related to the first special symbol determination are generated according to the establishment of the acquisition condition that the winning of the game ball for the first starting port 21 is detected when the holding number T1 is less than the maximum holding number T1max. To be acquired. When various random numbers are acquired in a situation where the first special symbol determination and the variation display of the first special symbol can be immediately executed, these random numbers are directly stored in the determination storage area 830 and cannot be executed immediately. When various random numbers are acquired in the situation, these random numbers are stored in any of the special figure 1 and 1st reserved storage areas 831 to the special figure 1 and 4 reserved storage areas 834.

When the process of step S217 is executed, the main CPU 81 determines whether or not the current state is the high base state, as in the process of step S210 (step S218). Here, when it is determined that the current state is not the high base state (step S218: NO), that is, when the time saving game flag is set to "OFF", the pre-determination process relating to the suspension of the first special symbol determination Is executed (step S219). Specifically, the jackpot determination process (see FIG. 43) and the variation pattern selection process (see FIG. 44), which will be described later, are executed based on various random numbers acquired in response to the winning of the game ball in the first start port 21. Based on various random numbers acquired in the process of step S217, it is determined in advance whether or not it will be a big hit, and when the first special symbol determination is executed, the fluctuation of the first special symbol is performed. A pre-determination process is executed to predetermine which variation pattern is selected as the pattern. The pre-determination information that is the result of this pre-determination process is stored in the same reserved storage area in which the jackpot random numbers and the like used in the pre-determination process are stored.

If the game ball wins a prize in the first starting port 21 while the number of pending numbers T1 of the first special symbol determination is "0", neither during the jackpot game nor in the variable display of the special symbol, the winning number is increased. The various acquired random numbers are directly stored in the determination storage area 830, and the first special symbol determination based on these random numbers is immediately executed. In this case, since the first special symbol determination is not suspended, the pre-determination process related to the first special symbol determination is not performed. Such a pre-determination process will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 41.

When the main CPU 81 executes the process of step S219 or determines that it is in the high base state (step S218: YES), the main CPU 81 sets the hold command related to the first special symbol determination in the main RAM 83 (step S220). This hold command is a command for notifying that the first special symbol determination has been held, and is transmitted to the sub-control board 90 by the transmission process in step S8. If the process of step S220 is performed without performing the pre-determination process of step S219, a hold command that does not include the pre-determination information is transmitted to the sub-control board 90. On the other hand, when the process of step S220 is performed after the pre-determination process of step S219 is performed, a hold command including the pre-determination information is transmitted to the sub-control board 90.

[Preliminary determination processing by the main control board 80]
Hereinafter, the pre-determination process executed by the main control board 80 will be described with reference to FIG. 41. Here, FIG. 41 is a detailed flowchart of the pre-determination process in steps S211, 219 of FIG. 40. Here, the pre-judgment process performed when the right to determine the first special symbol is reserved will be described as an example, but the right to determine the second special symbol is different except that the random numbers and tables used are different. Is suspended, the same pre-judgment process is performed.

When the main CPU 81 determines in the process of step S210 of FIG. 40 that it is in a high base state (step S210: YES), or when it determines that it is not in a high base state in the process of step S218 of FIG. 40 (step S218: NO), the jackpot determination process is executed (step S2191). Specifically, in the case of a low probability state (in this embodiment, the "normal game state" corresponds to this), the jackpot random number table for low probability (see FIG. 6A) is read from the main ROM 82. Set in the main RAM 83. On the other hand, in the case of a high probability state (in this embodiment, the "probability variation game state" corresponds to this), the jackpot random number table for high probability (see FIG. 6A) is read from the main ROM 82 and stored in the main RAM 83. set. Then, whether or not the jackpot random number acquired in the process of step S209 of FIG. 40 (or the process of step S217 of FIG. 40) matches any of the winning values stored in the jackpot random number table set in the main RAM 83. Based on this, it is determined whether or not a jackpot will be determined at the start of the fluctuation.

Next, the main CPU 81 determines whether or not it is determined to be a big hit at the start of the fluctuation based on the determination result in step S2191 (step S2192). Here, when it is determined that the jackpot is determined at the start of the fluctuation (step S2192: YES), the jackpot fluctuation pattern selection table (see FIG. 10A) is read from the main ROM 82 and set in the main RAM 83. (Step S2193).

On the other hand, when the main CPU 81 determines that it is not a big hit at the start of the fluctuation (step S2192: NO), it determines whether or not the reach effect is performed during the fluctuation (step S2194). Specifically, based on whether or not the reach random number acquired together with the jackpot random number used in the jackpot determination process in step S2191 matches the winning value of the reach random number stored in the main ROM 82. It is determined whether or not the reach effect is performed during the fluctuation.

When it is determined that the reach effect is to be performed (step S2194: YES), the main CPU 81 reads the reach loss variation pattern selection table (see FIG. 10B) from the main ROM 82 and sets it in the main RAM 83 (step S2195).

By the way, when the determination result of the first special symbol determination is "missing" and the reach effect is not performed during the fluctuation, the first special symbol is based on the number of pending first special symbol determinations at the start of the fluctuation. Fluctuation pattern is determined. This is as described above based on FIG. 10 (C). Then, the number of pending first special symbol determinations may differ between before and after the reserved first special symbol determination is digested. Therefore, the variation pattern of the special symbol acquired before the first special symbol determination is digested may be different from the variation pattern of the special symbol selected when the first special symbol determination is actually digested. be. That is, for the right of the first special symbol determination in which the reach effect is not performed during the variation, it may not be possible to acquire an accurate variation pattern of the first special symbol prior to the first special symbol determination.

Therefore, when it is determined by the main CPU 81 that the reach effect is not performed (step S2194: NO), the variation pattern random number determination process of step S2196 described later and the process of storing the advance determination information of step S2197 are performed. The process proceeds to step S212 (or step S220) of FIG. Therefore, when the determination result of the special symbol determination becomes "missing" and the non-reach effect is performed, the hold command that does not include the advance determination information is set.

When the main CPU 81 sets the variable pattern selection table for jackpot or the variable pattern selection table for reach loss, the main CPU 81 executes the variable pattern random number determination process (step S2196). Specifically, the variation pattern random number acquired at the time of winning the start opening together with the jackpot random number used in the process of step S2191 is among the random number values defined in the variation pattern selection table set in the main RAM 83. Based on which random number value of the throat matches, the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol to be selected in the special symbol determination performed at the start of the fluctuation is specified.

When the process of step S2196 is executed, the main CPU 81 generates pre-determination information and stores it in the main RAM 83 (step S2197). The area in which the pre-determination information is stored is as described above based on FIG. 38.

In this way, the main CPU 81 is based on the acquisition information such as the jackpot random number acquired when the game ball wins the first start port 21 (or the second start port 22), and the jackpot based on this acquisition information. Prior to the determination process and the variation pattern selection process, the variation pattern (that is, the variation time) of the first special symbol (or the second special symbol) is acquired.

[Special symbol processing by the main control board 80]
Next, the details of the special symbol processing executed by the main control board 80 will be described with reference to FIG. 42. Here, FIG. 42 is a detailed flowchart of the special symbol processing in step S3 of FIG. 39.

As illustrated in FIG. 42, the main CPU 81 determines whether or not the jackpot game is in progress based on whether or not the jackpot game flag stored in the main RAM 83 is set to “ON” ( Step S301). This jackpot game flag is a flag indicating whether or not the jackpot game is being executed, and is set to "ON" at the start of the jackpot game and set to "OFF" at the end of the jackpot game. Here, if it is determined that the jackpot game is in progress (step S301: YES), the process proceeds to the normal symbol processing in step S4.

When the main CPU 81 determines that the jackpot game is not in progress (step S301: NO), the main CPU 81 determines whether or not the special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner (step S302). Here, when it is determined that the special symbol is not being displayed in a variable manner (step S302: NO), it is determined whether or not the hold number T2 of the second special symbol determination stored in the main RAM 83 is "1" or more. (Step S303). Here, when it is determined that the hold number T2 is "1" or more (step S303: YES), the hold number T2 is updated to a value subtracted by "1" (step S304).

When the main CPU 81 determines that the hold number T2 is not "1" or more (step S303: NO), whether or not the hold number T1 of the first special symbol determination stored in the main RAM 83 is "1" or more. (Step S305). Here, when it is determined that the hold number T1 is "1" or more (step S305: YES), the hold number T1 is updated to a value subtracted by "1" (step S306).

When the main CPU 81 executes the process of step S304 or the process of step S306, the main CPU 81 executes a shift process for the reserved storage area of the main RAM 83 (step S307). Specifically, when the process of step S307 is executed following the process of step S304, the shift process of shifting the information stored in the special figure 2 first reserved storage area 835 to the determination storage area 830 is executed. do. At that time, if information is also stored in the reserved storage areas after the special figure 2 and the second reserved storage area 836, the shift process for shifting the information to the special figure 2 and the first reserved storage area 835 side. Is also executed. On the other hand, when the shift process is executed following the process of step S306, the shift process for shifting the information stored in the special figure 1 first reserved storage area 831 to the determination storage area 830 is executed. At that time, if information is also stored in the reserved storage areas after the special figure 1 and 2 reserved storage areas 832, the shift process for shifting the information to the special figure 1 and 1 first reserved storage area 831 side. Is also executed.

When the main CPU 81 stores the information necessary for the second special symbol determination (or the first special symbol determination) such as the jackpot random number and the symbol random number by the shift process in step S307 in the determination storage area 830, the main CPU 81 is based on these information. , The jackpot determination process in step S308 and the variation pattern selection process in step S309 are executed.

It should be noted that the game ball is first started with the number of pending numbers T1 for the first special symbol determination and the number of pending numbers T2 for the second special symbol determination both being "0", neither during the jackpot game nor during the variable display of the special symbol. When a prize is won in the mouth 21 (or the second starting mouth 22), information such as a jackpot random number and a symbol random number acquired in response to the prize is directly stored in the determination storage area 830. In such a case, the jackpot determination process and the variation pattern selection process are executed without executing the shift process in step S307.

The main CPU 81 executes the jackpot determination process based on the random numbers stored in the determination storage area 830 (step S308). By executing this jackpot determination process, it is determined whether or not the jackpot is a jackpot, and if it is determined to be a jackpot, the type of jackpot (big hit symbol) is determined. Then, the setting information of the special symbol indicating the result of these processes is set in the main RAM 83. This jackpot determination process will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 43.

Following the jackpot determination process in step S308, the main CPU 81 executes a variation pattern selection process for selecting a variation pattern of a special symbol (step S309). This fluctuation pattern selection process will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 44.

Following the process of step S309, the main CPU 81 determines whether the special symbol setting information set in the process of step S308, the special symbol setting information is related to the first special symbol determination, or the second special symbol determination. A fluctuation start command including information indicating whether or not the above is related, information on setting the fluctuation pattern selected in the process of step S309, information on the gaming state of the gaming machine 1, and the like is set in the main RAM 83 (step S310). This variation start command is a command for instructing the start of the effect accompanying the variation display of the special symbol, and is transmitted to the sub-control board 90 by the transmission process in step S8. As a result, the variable effect including the variable display of the effect symbol on the display screen 70 is started.

Following the process of step S310, the main CPU 81 starts the variation display of the special symbol based on the variation pattern setting information included in the variation start command set in the process of step S310 (step S311). At that time, if the processes of steps S308 to S310 are performed with the information related to the first special symbol determination stored in the determination storage area 830, the first special symbol in the first special symbol display 41 Starts the variable display of. On the other hand, when the processes of steps S308 to S310 are performed with the information related to the second special symbol determination stored in the determination storage area 830, the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 42 Start variable display.

Next, the main CPU 81 starts measuring the elapsed time from the start of the variation display of the special symbol in step S311 (step S312). When the main CPU 81 executes the process of step S312 or determines that the special symbol variation is being displayed (step S302: YES), the elapsed time when the measurement is started in the process of step S312 is the variation of step S309. It is determined whether or not the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern selected in the pattern selection process has been reached (step S313). Here, when it is determined that the elapsed time has not reached the fluctuation time (step S313: NO), the process proceeds to the normal symbol processing in step S4.

When the main CPU 81 determines that the elapsed time has reached the variation time (step S313: YES), the main CPU 81 sets a variation end command in the main RAM 83 to notify that the variation display of the special symbol ends (step S314). This variation end command is transmitted to the sub-control board 90 by the transmission process in step S8. As a result, processing such as stopping and displaying the effect symbols that have been variablely displayed on the display screen 70 in a manner showing the determination result of the special symbol determination is performed.

Following the process of step S314, the main CPU 81 ends the variable display of the special symbol started in the process of step S311 (step S315). Specifically, the special symbol (big hit symbol or lost symbol) set in the process of step S308 is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display that has been variable-displaying the special symbol. The stop display of this special symbol is continued until at least a predetermined symbol confirmation time (for example, 0.5 seconds) has elapsed.

In this way, the main CPU 81 displays the special symbol on the first special symbol display 41 or the second special symbol display 42 in a variable manner, and then displays the special symbol (big hit symbol or lost symbol) indicating the determination result of the jackpot determination process. The first special symbol display 41 or the second special symbol display 42 is stopped and displayed.

Following the process of step S315, the main CPU 81 resets the elapsed time at which the measurement was started in the process of step S312 (step S316), and when the special figure is stopped including the process of starting the jackpot game when the jackpot is a big hit. The process is executed (step S317). This special figure stop processing will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 45.

[Big hit determination process by the main control board 80]
FIG. 43 is a detailed flowchart of the jackpot determination process in step S308 of FIG. 42. First, the main CPU 81 executes a jackpot determination based on the jackpot random numbers stored in the determination storage area 830 (step S3081). Specifically, whether or not the jackpot random number stored in the determination storage area 830 is a jackpot based on whether or not it matches a preset winning value (see FIG. 6A). judge. The winning value here is a jackpot winning value defined in the high-probability jackpot random number table or the low-probability jackpot random number table. When the jackpot determination is executed in the high probability state (in this embodiment, the "probability variation game state" corresponds to this), the winning value stored in the jackpot random number table for high probability is used. On the other hand, when the jackpot determination is executed in the low probability state (in this embodiment, the "normal game state" and the "time saving game state" correspond to this), it is stored in the jackpot random number table for low probability. The winning value is used.

In this way, the main CPU 81 starts such that the acquisition information such as the jackpot random number acquired when the game ball wins the first start port 21 or the second start port 22 is stored in the determination storage area 830. When the condition is satisfied, it is determined whether or not to execute the jackpot game that is advantageous to the player based on the jackpot random number.

Following the process of step S3081, the main CPU 81 determines whether or not the determination result of the jackpot determination is "big hit" (step S3082). Here, when it is determined that the determination result of the jackpot determination is not "big hit" (step S3082: NO), that is, when the determination result of the jackpot determination is "missing", the setting information of the losing symbol is set in the main RAM 83. (Step S3083). As a result, during the process of step S315, the lost symbol set here is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 41 or the second special symbol display 42. In this case, the jackpot game is not performed.

On the other hand, when the main CPU 81 determines that the determination result of the jackpot determination is "big hit" (step S3082: YES), the jackpot symbol stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 41 or the second special symbol display 42. The jackpot symbol selection process for selecting is executed (step S3084). Specifically, when the symbol random number stored in the determination storage area 830 together with the jackpot random number used for the jackpot determination in step S3081 is related to the first special symbol determination, the symbol random number is , One of the jackpot symbols is selected based on which jackpot symbol is matched with the random number value specified in the symbol determination table for winning the first start opening (see FIG. 6 (B)). If the symbol random number is related to the second special symbol determination, which jackpot symbol is defined in the symbol determination table for winning the second starting opening (see FIG. 6 (C)). Select one of the jackpot symbols based on whether it matches the random number value of.

Then, the main CPU 81 sets the setting information of the selected jackpot symbol in the main RAM 83 (step S3085). As a result, during the process of step S315, the jackpot symbol set here is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 41 or the second special symbol display 42, and then the jackpot game according to the jackpot symbol. Will be done.

[Variation pattern selection process by main control board 80]
FIG. 44 is a detailed flowchart of the fluctuation pattern selection process in step S309 of FIG. 42. After executing the jackpot determination process in step S308 of FIG. 42, the main CPU 81 determines whether or not the determination result in step S3081 is a jackpot (step S3091). Here, when it is determined that the jackpot is a jackpot (step S3091: YES), the jackpot variation pattern selection table (see FIG. 10A) is read from the main ROM 82 and set in the main RAM 83 (step S3092).

On the other hand, when the main CPU 81 determines that it is not a big hit (step S3091: NO), the reach random number stored in the determination storage area 830 is the winning value of the reach random number stored in the main ROM 82 (for the effect with reach). Based on whether or not it matches with the corresponding random number value), it is determined whether or not to perform a reach effect that makes the player expect a big hit (step S3093). Here, when it is determined that the reach effect is to be performed (step S3093: YES), the reach loss variation pattern selection table (see FIG. 10B) is read from the main ROM 82 and set in the main RAM 83 (step S3094). On the contrary, when it is determined that the reach effect is not performed (step S3093: NO), the variation pattern selection table for loss without reach (see FIG. 10C) is read from the main ROM 82 and set in the main RAM 83 (step S3095). ..

The main CPU 81 executes the variation pattern random number determination process with reference to the variation pattern selection table set in the main RAM 83 by the process of step S3092, the process of step S3094, or the process of step S3095 (step S3096). Specifically, when the jackpot variation pattern selection table or the reach loss variation pattern selection table is set in the main RAM 83, the variation pattern corresponding to the variation pattern random number stored in the determination storage area 830 is set. One variation pattern is selected by reading from the variation pattern selection table. Further, when the variation pattern selection table for loss without reach is set in the main RAM 83, it is based on the hold number T1 of the first special symbol determination (or the hold number T2 of the second special symbol determination) stored in the main RAM 83. One variation pattern is selected by specifying the number of holds and reading the variation pattern corresponding to the specified number of holds from the variation pattern selection table for loss without reach. By selecting the variation pattern of the special symbol in this way, the variation time of the special symbol is inevitably determined.

When the fluctuation pattern is selected, the main CPU 81 sets the setting information of the selected fluctuation pattern in the main RAM 83 (step S3097). The fluctuation pattern setting information is included in the fluctuation start command and transmitted to the sub-control board 90 together with the symbol setting information set in the main RAM 83 by the jackpot determination process in step S308 described above.

[Processing when the special figure is stopped by the main control board 80]
FIG. 45 is a detailed flowchart of the special figure stop processing in step S317 of FIG. 42. After resetting the elapsed time by the process of step S316, the main CPU 81 determines whether or not it is a big hit, as in the process of step S3082 (see FIG. 43), as illustrated in FIG. 45 (step). S3171). Here, when it is determined that the jackpot is a jackpot (step S3171: YES), the jackpot game flag stored in the main RAM 83 is set to "ON" (step S3172).

Next, the main CPU 81 sets the probability variation game flag stored in the main RAM 83 to “OFF” (step S3173), and sets the time saving game flag also stored in the main RAM 83 to “OFF” (step S3174). ). Here, the probability variation game flag is a flag indicating whether or not the probability of being determined to be a big hit in the special symbol determination is a relatively high probability state.

In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the gaming state is controlled by setting the probability variation gaming flag and the time saving gaming flag. That is, when the game state is controlled to the "probability change game state", both the probability change game flag and the time saving game flag are set to "ON". Further, when the game state is controlled to the "normal game state", both the probability variation game flag and the time saving game flag are set to "OFF". Further, when the game state is controlled to the "time saving game state", the probability variation game flag is set to "OFF" and the time saving game flag is set to "ON".

Following the process of step S3174, the main CPU 81 sets an opening command in the main RAM 83 for notifying that the jackpot game is started (step S3175). This opening command includes information such as the type of big hit, the opening pattern of the first big winning opening 26 (or the second big winning opening 28 or the V winning opening 287) during the big hit game, and is the transmission process of step S8. Is transmitted to the sub-control board 90.

On the other hand, when the main CPU 81 determines that it is not a big hit (step S3171: NO), it determines whether or not the probability variation game flag is set to "ON" (step S3176). Here, when it is determined that the probability variation game flag is set to "ON" (step S3176: YES), that is, when the special symbol determination is performed in the high probability state, the high probability stored in the main RAM 83 is high. The remaining number of games K is updated to a value obtained by subtracting "1" (step S3177). The high-probability game remaining number K indicates the remaining number of times the special symbol determination is executed in the high-probability state.

Following the process of step S3177, the main CPU 81 determines whether or not the high-probability game remaining number K is “0” (step S3178). Here, when it is determined that the high-probability game remaining number K is "0" (step S3178: YES), the probability variation game flag is set to "OFF" (step S3179). As a result, the special symbol determination is performed in a low probability state.

When the main CPU 81 executes the process of step S3179, when it is determined that the probability variation game flag is not set to "ON" (step S3176: NO), or the high probability game remaining number K is not "0". If it is determined (step S3178: NO), it is determined whether or not the time saving game flag is set to "ON" (step S3180). Here, when it is determined that the time saving game flag is set to "ON" (step S3180: YES), the time saving game remaining number J stored in the main RAM 83 is updated to a value subtracted by "1" (step). S3181). The time-saving game remaining number J indicates the remaining number of times that the special symbol determination is executed in the time-saving state (high base state).

Following the process of step S3181, the main CPU 81 determines whether or not the time-saving game remaining number J is "0" (step S3182). Here, when it is determined that the time-saving game remaining number J is "0" (step S3182: YES), the time-saving game flag is set to "OFF" (step S3183). As a result, the support function that facilitates the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 22 is not provided.

[Large winning opening opening / closing control process by the main control board 80]
46 to 48 are detailed flowcharts of the large winning opening opening / closing control process in step S6 of FIG. 39. Following the second start opening opening / closing control process in step S5 in FIG. 39, the main CPU 81 determines whether or not the jackpot game flag is set to “ON” as illustrated in FIG. 46 (step S601). ). Here, when it is determined that the jackpot game flag is not set to "ON" (step S601: NO), the process proceeds to the prize ball processing in step S7.

When the main CPU 81 determines that the jackpot game flag is set to "ON" (step S601: YES), for example, after setting the opening command related to the jackpot game by the process of step S3175 (see FIG. 45). Based on whether or not the elapsed time has reached a predetermined opening time, it is determined whether or not the opening period in the jackpot game is in progress (step S602).

When the main CPU 81 determines that the opening period in the jackpot game is in progress (step S602: YES), the main CPU 81 determines whether or not the opening time has elapsed (step S603). Here, if it is determined that the opening time has not elapsed (step S603: NO), the process proceeds to the prize ball processing in step S7. On the other hand, when it is determined that the opening time has elapsed (step S603: YES), the main CPU 81 sets the number of rounds Rmax of the jackpot game, the operation pattern, the valid period, and the like, and stores the setting information in the main RAM 103 (step S603: YES). Step S604). For example, when the setting information of any of the jackpot symbols X1 to X4 (see FIG. 6B) is set in the main RAM 83 in the process of step S3085 in FIG. 43, the number of rounds Rmax is set to "5" and the jackpot is hit. When the setting information of the symbol Y3 (see FIG. 6C) is set, the number of rounds Rmax is set to "9". Further, for example, when executing any of the jackpot games of "5R probability variation A", "5R probability variation B", "5R normal A", and "5R normal B" related to the first special symbol determination, the second major The operation patterns of the opening / closing member 29 and the slide member 285 are set so that the winning opening 28 and the V winning opening 287 are opened / closed in the opening / closing pattern described above based on FIG. 7. Further, for example, when executing the jackpot game of "7R probability variation" (see FIG. 6C) related to the second special symbol determination, the operation patterns of the opening / closing member 29, the slide member 285, and the opening / closing member 27 are set. .. In addition, "5R probability variation A" related to the first special symbol determination, "5R probability variation B" related to the first special symbol determination, "5R probability variation" related to the second special symbol determination, and "7R probability variation" related to the second special symbol determination. ], When executing any of the jackpot games of "9R probability change" related to the second special symbol determination, the validity period in which the V prize is valid is set. When the jackpot game of "5R normal A" or "5R normal B" related to the first special symbol determination is executed, the validity period is not set.

By executing the process of step S604, various times related to the jackpot game such as the interval time, which is the time from the end of the round game to the start of the next round game, and the ending time after the end of the final round game, are also included. It is also set.

When the process of step S604 is executed, the main CPU 81 updates the number of rounds R stored in the main RAM 83 to a value obtained by adding "1" (step S605). This number of rounds R is set to "0" before the jackpot game is started, and is updated to a value obtained by adding "1" each time the process of step S605 is performed.

Following the process of step S605, the main CPU 81 determines whether or not the number of rounds R updated in the process of step S605 is "5" or less (step S606). In the present embodiment, for all jackpots, the second big winning opening 28 is used for the round games of the 1st to 5th rounds, and the first big winning opening 26 is used for the round games of the 6th and subsequent rounds (Fig.). 6 (B) and (C)). Therefore, when the main CPU 81 determines that the number of rounds R is "5" or less (step S606: YES), the main CPU 81 wins the second prize via the second prize opening solenoid 282 (and the V winning opening solenoid 286). The second major winning opening opening / closing control for controlling the opening / closing of the opening 28 (and the V winning opening 287) is started (step S607). Since the second prize opening opening / closing control is as described above based on FIG. 7, detailed description here will be omitted.

Following the process of step S607, the main CPU 81 is based on the valid period set in the process of step S604 and the number of rounds R updated in the process of step S605, and the current round game to be started from now on is a valid round. It is determined whether or not it is a game (step S608). Here, when it is determined that the current round game is a valid round game (step S608: YES), a valid round game start command for notifying that the valid round game is started is set in the main RAM 83 (step S609). .. On the contrary, when it is determined that the current round game is not a valid round game (step S608: NO), a second large winning opening opening / closing round game start command is issued to notify that a round game that is not a valid round game is started. It is set in the main RAM 83 (step S610).

On the other hand, when the main CPU 81 determines that the number of rounds R updated in the process of step S605 is not "5" or less (step S606: NO), the first large winning opening 26 via the first large winning opening solenoid 262. The first grand prize opening opening / closing control for controlling the opening / closing of the solenoid is started (step S611). Specifically, a long-opening round game in which the first large winning opening 26 is long-opened is started. As described above, the opening / closing control of the first large winning opening is performed after 10 game balls have won the first large winning opening 26 or the first large winning opening 26 has been opened (first). It will continue until 25 seconds have passed (without 10 game balls winning in the grand prize opening 26).

Following the process of step S611, the main CPU 81 sets in the main RAM 83 a command to start a round game for opening and closing the first special winning opening 26 to notify that the round game for opening and closing the first winning opening 26 is started (step S612). ).

The effective round game start command set in the process of step S609, the second large winning opening opening / closing round game start command set in the process of step S610, and the first large winning opening opening / closing round set in the process of step S612. The game start command is transmitted to the sub-control board 90 by the transmission process of step S8 in FIG. 39.

On the other hand, when the main CPU 81 determines in the process of step S602 that it is not during the opening period in the jackpot game (step S602: NO), it determines whether or not it is during the ending period in the jackpot game (step S613). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the ending period is in progress based on whether or not the elapsed time from the end of the final round of the jackpot game has reached a predetermined ending time. Here, if it is determined that the ending period is in progress (step S613: YES), the process proceeds in step S626 (see FIG. 48), which will be described later.

When the main CPU 81 determines that it is not during the ending period of the jackpot game (step S613: NO), for example, during the interval period based on whether or not a predetermined interval time has elapsed since the end of the previous round game. (Step S614). Here, if it is determined that the interval period is not in progress (step S614: NO), the process proceeds in step S617 (see FIG. 47), which will be described later.

When the main CPU 81 determines that the interval period is in progress (step S614: YES), the main CPU 81 determines whether or not the interval time set in the process of step S604 has elapsed since the end of the previous round game. (Step S615). Here, if it is determined that the interval time has not elapsed (step S605: NO), the process proceeds to the prize ball processing in step S7. On the contrary, when it is determined that the interval time has elapsed (step S615: YES), the processes after step S605 described above are executed.

When the main CPU 81 determines that it is not during the interval period (step S614: NO), that is, when it is in a round game, as illustrated in FIG. 47, the setting information of the valid period set in the process of step S604. Based on the above, it is determined whether or not the validity period is in effect (step S617). Here, if it is determined that the period is not valid (step S617: NO), the process proceeds to step S621, which will be described later. On the contrary, when it is determined that the valid period is in effect (step S617: YES), it is determined whether or not the game ball has passed through the V winning opening 287 based on the presence or absence of the detection signal from the V winning opening sensor 283. (Step S618). Here, when it is determined that the game ball has not passed through the V winning opening 287 (step S618: NO), the process proceeds to step S621, which will be described later.

When the main CPU 81 determines that the game ball has passed the V winning opening 287 (step S618: YES), the main CPU 81 sets the V winning flag stored in the main RAM 83 to “ON” (step S619). This V winning flag is a flag indicating whether or not the game ball has passed the V winning opening 287 during the valid round game, and although it is normally set to "OFF", the V winning opening is during the valid round game. When the passage of the game ball is detected by the sensor 283, it is set to "ON".

Following the process of step S619, the main CPU 81 sets a V winning command in the main RAM 83 for notifying that the game ball has won a V during the effective round game (step S620).

When the main CPU 81 executes the process of step S620, determines that it is not in the valid period (step S617: NO), or determines that the game ball has not passed through the V winning opening 287 (step S618: NO), it is determined whether or not the second big winning opening opening / closing control started in the process of step S607 (or the first big winning opening opening / closing control started in the process of step S611) is completed (step S621). Here, when it is determined that the large winning opening opening / closing control has not been completed (step S621: NO), the process proceeds to the prize ball processing in step S7.

When the main CPU 81 determines that the opening / closing control of the large winning opening has been completed (step S621: YES), does the number of rounds R stored in the main RAM 83 match the number of rounds Rmax set in the process of step S604? Whether or not it is determined (step S622). Here, when it is determined that the number of rounds R does not match the number of rounds Rmax (step S622: NO), the process proceeds to the prize ball processing in step S7.

When the main CPU 81 determines that the number of rounds R matches the number of rounds Rmax (step S622: YES), the main CPU 81 starts measuring the ending time, which is the elapsed time from the start of the ending period (step S623), and the ending period is set. An ending command for notifying the start is set in the main RAM 83 (step S624). This ending command is transmitted to the sub-control board 90 by the transmission process in step S8.

On the other hand, when the main CPU 81 determines that the ending period is in progress in the process of step S613 in FIG. 46 (step S613: YES), the main CPU 81 determines whether or not the ending time has elapsed, as illustrated in FIG. 48. (Step S626). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the ending time has elapsed based on whether or not the ending time that started the measurement in the process of step S623 has reached the ending time set in the process of step S604. Here, if it is determined that the ending time has not elapsed (step S626: NO), the process proceeds to the prize ball processing in step S7.

When the main CPU 81 determines that the ending time has elapsed (step S626: YES), the main CPU 81 determines whether or not the V winning flag stored in the main RAM 83 is set to “ON” (step S627). Here, when it is determined that the V winning flag is set to "ON" (step S627: YES), the probability variation game flag stored in the main RAM 83 is set to "ON" (step S628), and the same main The high-probability game remaining number K stored in the RAM 83 is set to "80" (step S629). As a result, after the jackpot game is completed, the second special symbol determination (or the first special symbol determination) is performed in a high probability state up to 80 times.

When the main CPU 81 executes the process of step S629, or when it is determined that the V winning flag is not set to "ON" (step S627: NO), the time saving game flag stored in the main RAM 83 is set to "ON". It is set to "ON" (step S630), and the time-saving game remaining number J also stored in the main RAM 83 is updated to "80" (step S631). As a result, the above-mentioned support function is enabled (that is, the game is controlled in a high base state) until the second special symbol determination (or the first special symbol determination) is performed up to 80 times.

[Main processing by sub-control board 90]
Next, the main process executed on the sub-control board 90 will be described with reference to FIG. 49. Here, FIG. 49 is a flowchart illustrating the main process executed on the sub-control board 90. The processing performed by the sub control board 90 described based on the flowcharts of FIGS. 49 and 49 is performed according to an instruction issued by the sub CPU 91 based on the program stored in the sub ROM 92.

That is, the sub CPU 91 first executes the initial setting process (step S41). Specifically, stack setting, constant setting, setting of SIO, PIO, CTC (interrupt time controller), etc., and resetting of flags, statuses, counters, etc. stored in the sub RAM 93 are executed. Next, the sub CPU 91 determines whether or not the power cutoff signal is “ON” (step S42). Here, when it is determined that the power cutoff signal is "ON" (step S42: YES), the process proceeds to step S45, which will be described later.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the power cutoff signal is not "ON" (step S42: NO), it is determined whether or not the stored contents of the sub RAM 93 are normal (step S43). Here, if it is determined that the stored contents of the sub RAM 93 are normal (step S43: YES), the process proceeds to step S45. On the contrary, when it is determined that the stored contents of the sub RAM 93 are not normal (step S43: NO), the RAM initialization process for initializing the sub RAM 93 is executed (step S44).

When the sub CPU 91 executes the process of step S44, determines that the power cutoff signal is "ON" (step S42: YES), and determines that the stored contents of the sub RAM 93 are normal (step S43: YES), interrupt processing is prohibited (step S45), and random number update processing for updating various random numbers for deciding whether or not to execute various effects and determining the effect pattern when executing the effects is performed. Is executed (step S46).

Following the processing in step S46, the sub CPU 91 sends commands stored in a predetermined area of the sub RAM 93 by the first interrupt processing in step S51 and the second interrupt processing in step S53, which will be described later, to the image / acoustic control board 100 and the lamp control board. The command transmission process to be transmitted to 120 is executed (step S47). On the other hand, the image / sound control CPU 101 performs processing based on this command to control the execution of the effect using the image display device 7 and the speaker 38, and the lamp CPU 121 performs processing based on this command to frame the frame. The execution of the effect using the lamp 37, the board lamp 5, the movable decorative member 14, the vibration motor 128, and the like is controlled.

Following the process of step S47, the sub CPU 91 determines whether or not the hold effect flag stored in the sub RAM 93 is set to "ON" (step S48), and sets the hold effect flag to "ON". If it is determined that the setting has been made (step S48: YES), the hold effect flag is set to “OFF” (step S48). The pending effect flag will be described in detail later.

When the sub CPU 91 executes the process of step S49 or determines that the hold effect flag is not set to "ON" (step S48: NO), the sub CPU 91 executes an interrupt enable process that permits execution of the interrupt process. (Step S50) By executing this interrupt enable processing, the first interrupt processing in step S51 and the second interrupt processing in step S53 can be executed.

After the second interrupt process in step S53 is executed, the process is returned to step S45, and the processes after step S45 are repeatedly executed.

[First interrupt processing by the sub control board 90]
Hereinafter, the first interrupt process executed on the sub-control board 90 will be described with reference to FIG. 50. Here, FIG. 50 is a detailed flowchart of the first interrupt process in step S51 of FIG. 49. In this first interrupt process, the sub CPU 91 first determines whether or not a hold command transmitted from the main control board 80 has been received in response to the process of step S212 or the process of step S220 in FIG. 40 (step S511). ). Here, if it is determined that the hold command has not been received (step S511: NO), the first interrupt process ends, and the process proceeds to the second interrupt process (see FIG. 49) in step S53.

When the sub CPU 91 determines that the hold command has been received (step S511: YES), the sub CPU 91 updates the hold number of the special symbol determination stored in the sub RAM 93 to a value obtained by adding "1" (step S512). Specifically, when the hold command related to the first special symbol determination is received, the hold number of the first special symbol determination is updated to the value obtained by adding "1", and the hold command related to the second special symbol determination is executed. When it is received, the number of pending second special symbol determinations is updated to the value obtained by adding "1".

Following the process of step S512, the sub CPU 91 determines whether or not the hold command received from the main control board 80 includes the pre-determination information (step S513). Here, when it is determined that the received hold command does not include the pre-determination information (step S513: NO), the hold icon display command is set in the sub RAM 93 (step S514). The hold icon display command set by the process of step S514 is a command for instructing the display of the hold icon, and is a command that does not include the setting information of the icon change effect.

When this hold icon display command is transmitted to the image / sound control board 100 and the lamp control board 120 by the command transmission process of step S47 in FIG. 49, a white hold icon is displayed in the hold icon display area 71, and the white hold icon is displayed. The icon change effect for the hold icon of is not performed.

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 91 determines that the received hold command includes the pre-determination information (step S513: YES), the sub CPU 91 sets the hold effect flag stored in the sub RAM 93 to "ON" (step S515). ). Here, the hold effect flag is a flag indicating whether or not various processes related to the look-ahead effect based on the pre-determination information included in the hold icon command received from the main control board 80 have been executed, and is a flag indicating whether or not various processes related to the look-ahead effect have been executed. This flag is set to "ON" when the process of step S523 is executed.

Following the process of step S515, the sub CPU 91 stores the pre-determination information included in the hold command in a predetermined area of the sub RAM 93 (step S516), and based on this pre-determination information, the icon change effect pattern setting process. (Step S517), the expected image change effect pattern setting process (step S518), the expected effect pattern setting process (step S519), the precursor effect pattern setting process (step S521), and hold. The icon display command is set in the sub RAM 93 (step S523). This hold icon display command is transmitted to the image / sound control board 100 and the lamp control board 120 by the command transmission process in step S47 in FIG. 49.

When the setting information of the icon change effect is set in the process of step S517, the hold icon display command including the setting information of the icon change effect is set in the sub RAM 93 in the process of step S523. Then, by transmitting the hold icon display command including the setting information of the icon change effect to the image / sound control board 100 and the lamp control board 120, the above-mentioned icon change effect is realized based on FIGS. 21 and 35 and the like. Will be. The icon change effect pattern setting process in step S517 will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 51.

Further, when the setting information of the expected image change effect is set in the process of step S518, the hold icon display command including the setting information of the expected image change effect is set in the sub RAM 93 in the process of step S523. Then, by transmitting the hold icon display command including the setting information of the expected image change effect to the image / sound control board 100 and the lamp control board 120, the above-mentioned expected image change effect is realized based on FIGS. 21 to 23. Will be done. The expected image change effect pattern setting process in step S518 will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 52.

When the expected effect setting information is set in the process of step S519, the hold icon display command including the expected effect setting information is set in the sub RAM 93 in the process of step S523. Then, by transmitting the hold icon display command including the setting information of the expected effect to the image / sound control board 100 and the lamp control board 120, the above-mentioned expected effect is realized based on FIGS. 24 to 26. Become. The expected effect pattern setting process in step S519 will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 53.

Further, when the setting information of the precursor effect is set in the process of step S521, the hold icon display command including the setting information of the precursor effect is set in the sub RAM 93 in the process of step S523. Then, by transmitting the hold icon display command including the setting information of the precursor effect to the image / sound control board 100 and the lamp control board 120, the above-mentioned precursor effect is realized based on FIG. 34. The precursor effect pattern setting process in step S521 will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 54.

[Icon change effect pattern setting process by sub-control board 90]
Next, the icon change effect pattern setting process executed on the sub-control board 90 will be described with reference to FIG. 51. Here, FIG. 51 is a detailed flowchart of the icon change effect pattern setting process in step S517 of FIG.

When the sub CPU 91 executes the process of step S516 in FIG. 50, the sub CPU 91 executes the icon change effect lottery (step S5171). Specifically, the icon change effect random number is acquired and stored in the sub RAM 93. This icon change effect random number is added by "1" each time the random number update process of step S46 described above is performed based on FIG. 49, and the sub CPU 91 uses the count value at the time of receiving the hold command as the icon change effect random number. get. Then, it is determined whether or not to execute the icon change effect based on whether or not the icon change effect random number matches any of the random numbers related to the icon change effect random number stored in the sub ROM 92 in advance.

Although not shown in the figure, the sub ROM 92 contains the pre-judgment result (whether or not it is a "big hit") related to the first special symbol determination, the variation pattern of the first special symbol, and the above icon change effect. A table associated with a random number value related to a random number is stored. The sub CPU 91 refers to this table and determines the determination result of the first special symbol determination in which the acquired icon change effect random number is specified from the prior determination information stored in the sub RAM 93 in the process of step S516 (see FIG. 50). , And, based on whether or not it matches any of the random number values associated with the variation pattern of the first special symbol, it is determined whether or not to execute the icon change effect. In this table, with respect to the preliminary determination result related to the first special symbol determination, more random values are associated with "big hit" than with "loss". Further, the longer the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is, the more random values are associated with it. Therefore, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the higher the jackpot reliability is, the easier it is to execute the icon change effect, and conversely, the lower the jackpot reliability is, the more difficult it is to execute the icon change effect.

Subsequently, the sub CPU 91 determines whether or not to execute the icon change effect based on the lottery result in step S5171 (step S5172), and when it is determined to execute the icon change effect (step S5172: YES), the icon. As the setting information of the change effect, the icon change effect pattern information is set in the sub RAM 93 (step S5173).

Although not shown in the figure, the sub ROM 92 stores an icon change effect pattern selection table for selecting an icon change effect pattern for each effect mode. In these icon change effect pattern selection tables, the determination result of the first special symbol determination, the variation pattern of the first special symbol, the number of pending first special symbol determination at the start of the icon change effect, and the display of the icon. The change pattern of the mode and the random value are associated with each other. When the sub CPU 91 determines that the icon change effect is to be executed (step S5172: YES), the sub CPU 91 reads the icon change effect pattern selection table corresponding to the current effect mode from the sub ROM 92 and sets it in the sub RAM 93. Then, the determination result of the first special symbol determination and the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol specified by the prior determination information stored in the sub RAM 93, and the number of pending first special symbol determination updated in the process of step S512. By reading the change pattern corresponding to the icon change effect random number acquired when the hold command is received from the icon change effect pattern selection table set in the sub RAM 93, one change pattern related to the icon change effect can be obtained. select. Then, the icon change effect pattern information indicating the change pattern selected in this way is set in the sub RAM 93.

In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the effect is controlled in the third normal mode, in addition to the icon change effect similar to that performed in the other effect modes, it is based on FIGS. 35 to 37. The above-mentioned hold icon proliferation effect and the icon proliferation effect are executed. Therefore, in the icon change effect pattern selection table for the third normal mode, the effect pattern of the icon change effect, the effect pattern of the hold icon proliferation effect, and the effect pattern of the icon proliferation effect correspond to the change pattern of the icon display mode. By referring to the icon change effect pattern selection table for the third normal mode and executing the process of step S5173, the effect pattern of the hold icon proliferation effect and the effect pattern of the icon proliferation effect are determined. Will be done.

Further, here, when selecting the change pattern of the icon change effect, the case where the same icon change effect random number used for the icon change effect lottery in step S5171 is used has been described as an example. May use another random number to select the change pattern of the icon change effect.

Here, the case where the lottery for determining whether or not to execute the icon change effect and the lottery for selecting the effect pattern for the icon change effect are separate lottery has been described as an example, but the icon change effect is executed. Whether or not to execute the icon change effect and, if executed, what kind of effect pattern to execute the icon change effect may be determined by one lottery.

[Expected image change effect pattern setting process by sub-control board 90]
Next, with reference to FIG. 52, the expected image change effect pattern setting process executed on the sub-control board 90 will be described. In this expected image change effect pattern setting process, the effect pattern of the expected image change effect for changing the first expected image into the second expected image and the third expected image of the first expected image are described above based on FIGS. 21 to 23. In the process for setting the effect pattern of the expected image change effect that directly changes to the image, the effect pattern of the expected image change effect that changes the first expected image to the second expected image and then to the third expected image, etc. be. Here, FIG. 52 is a detailed flowchart of the expected image change effect pattern setting process in step S518 of FIG.

Following the icon change effect pattern setting process in step S517, the sub CPU 91 determines whether or not the effect with reach is performed due to the change in the look-ahead target, as illustrated in FIG. 52 (step S5181). Specifically, the variation pattern of the first special symbol selected for the look-ahead target variation specified by the pre-determination information stored in the sub RAM 93 in the process of step S513 is the variation pattern for jackpot and the variation pattern for reach loss. Based on whether or not it is either, it is determined whether or not the effect with reach is performed due to the change in the look-ahead target. Here, when it is determined that the effect with reach is not performed due to the change in the look-ahead target (step S5181: NO), the expected image change effect pattern setting process is completed, and the process proceeds to the expected effect pattern setting process in step S519. Be done.

By the way, in the game machine 1 of the present embodiment, for example, the expected image illustrated in FIG. 23 cooperates with the hold icon as a special icon (hold icon of a display color other than white) to suggest the jackpot reliability. Therefore, when only the default hold icon (white hold icon) is displayed, the expected image is not displayed. Therefore, when the sub CPU 91 determines that the effect with reach is performed due to the change in the look-ahead target (step S5181: YES), the sub CPU 91 does not display the expected image when the special icon is not displayed as the hold icon. Execute the following processing.

That is, when the sub CPU 91 determines that the effect with reach is performed due to the change in the look-ahead target (step S5181: YES), the sub CPU 91 determines whether or not the special icon is displayed as the hold icon of the look-ahead target (step S5182). Specifically, based on whether or not the process of step S5173 is executed and the setting information of the icon change effect for displaying the hold icon as a special icon is set in the sub RAM 93 by the process of step S5173. , It is determined whether or not the special icon will be displayed in the hold icon display area 71 as the hold icon to be read ahead.

Here, when it is determined that the special icon is not displayed as the hold icon to be read ahead (step S5182: NO), the expected image change effect pattern setting process is completed, and the process proceeds to the expected effect pattern setting process in step S519. Be done. In this case, since the process of step S5189 described later is not executed, the expected image change effect is not performed.

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 91 determines that the special icon is displayed as the hold icon to be read ahead (step S5182: YES), the sub CPU 91 executes the expected image change effect lottery (step S5183). Specifically, the expected image change effect random number is acquired and stored in the sub RAM 93. This expected image change effect random number is added by "1" each time the random number update process of step S46 described above is performed based on FIG. 49, and the sub CPU 91 expects the count value at the time of receiving the hold command. Get it as a random number. Then, it is determined whether or not to execute the expected image change effect based on whether or not the expected image change effect random number matches any of the random numbers related to the expected image change effect random number stored in the sub ROM 92 in advance. ..

Although not shown in the figure, the sub ROM 92 contains the pre-judgment result (whether or not it is a “big hit”) related to the first special symbol determination, the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol, and the above-mentioned expected image change. A table associated with a random number value related to the effect random number is stored. The sub CPU 91 refers to this table and determines the first special symbol determination in which the acquired expected image change effect random number is specified from the pre-determination information stored in the sub RAM 93 in the process of step S516 (see FIG. 50). It is determined whether or not to execute the expected image change effect based on the result and whether or not it matches any of the random number values associated with the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol. In this table, with respect to the preliminary determination result related to the first special symbol determination, more random values are associated with "big hit" than with "loss". Further, the longer the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is, the more random values are associated with it. Therefore, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the higher the jackpot reliability is, the easier it is to execute the expected image change effect, and conversely, the lower the jackpot reliability is, the more difficult it is to execute the expected image change effect.

Subsequently, the sub CPU 91 determines whether or not to execute the expected image change effect based on the lottery result in step S5183 (step S5184). Here, when it is determined by the sub CPU 91 that the expected image change effect is not executed (step S5184: NO), the expected image change effect pattern setting process is completed as in the case where it is determined as "NO" in step S5182. Then, the process proceeds to the expected effect pattern setting process in step S519.

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 91 determines that the expected image change effect is to be executed (step S5184: YES), is the determination result of the first special symbol determination indicated by the prior determination information stored in the sub RAM 93 a "big hit"? Whether or not it is determined (step S5185). Here, when it is determined that it is a "big hit" (step S5185: YES), the expected image change effect pattern selection table for the big hit is read from the sub ROM 92 and set in the sub RAM 93 (step S5186), and it is not a "big hit". If it is determined (step S5185: NO), the expected image change effect pattern selection table for reach loss is read from the sub ROM 92 and set in the sub RAM 93 (step S5187).

Then, the sub CPU 91 refers to the expected image change effect pattern selection table set in the sub RAM 93 by the process of step S5186 or the process of step S5187, and selects the expected image change effect pattern selection process. Is executed (step S5188).

Although not shown in the figure, in the expected image change effect pattern selection table stored in the sub ROM 92, the determination result of the first special symbol determination, the variation pattern of the first special symbol, and the expected image change effect effect are started. The number of pending first special symbol determinations, the change pattern of the expected image, and the random value are associated with each other. In the process of step S5188, the sub CPU 91 updates the determination result of the first special symbol determination and the variation pattern of the first special symbol specified by the prior determination information stored in the sub RAM 93, and the process of step S512. 1 By reading the change pattern corresponding to the number of pending special symbol determinations and the expected image change effect random number acquired when the hold command is received from the expected image change effect pattern selection table set in the sub RAM 93. Select 1 change pattern of the expected image.

In addition, when the expected image change effect pattern selection table for jackpot is referred to, the first expected image is the second expected image or the third, as compared with the case where the expected image change effect pattern selection table for reach loss is referred to. There is a feature that it is difficult to select a change pattern that does not change to the expected image. Further, when the expected image change effect pattern selection table for jackpot is referred to, the first expected image is the second expected image or the third expected image as compared with the case where the expected image change effect pattern selection table for reach loss is referred to. The feature is that a change pattern that changes to the expected image can be easily selected.

Further, here, a case where the same expected image change effect random number used for the expected image change effect lottery in step S5183 is used when selecting the change pattern of the expected image has been described as an example, but the expected image change effect has been described. A random number different from the random number may be used to select the change pattern of the expected image.

Here, a case where the lottery for determining whether or not to execute the expected image change effect and the lottery for selecting the effect pattern (expected image change pattern) for the expected image change effect are separate lottery will be described as an example. However, it may be decided by one lottery whether or not to execute the expected image change effect, and if so, what kind of effect pattern to execute the expected image change effect.

Subsequently, the sub CPU 91 sets the expected image change effect pattern information indicating the change pattern of the expected image selected in the process of step S5188 in the sub RAM 93 as the setting information of the expected image change effect (step S5189).

[Expected effect pattern setting process by sub-control board 90]
Next, the expected effect pattern setting process executed on the sub-control board 90 will be described with reference to FIG. 53. This expected effect pattern setting process is a process for setting the effect patterns of the first expected effect and the second expected effect described above based on FIGS. 24 to 26. Here, FIG. 53 is a detailed flowchart of the expected effect pattern setting process in step S519 of FIG. 50.

Following the expected image change effect pattern setting process in step S518, the sub CPU 91 determines whether or not the effect with reach is performed due to the change in the look-ahead target (step S5191), as illustrated in FIG. 53. The determination process of step S5911 is performed in the same manner as the process of step S5181 described above. Here, when it is determined by the sub CPU 91 that the effect with reach is not performed due to the change in the look-ahead target (step S5191: NO), the expected effect pattern setting process is completed, and the process is applied to the precursor effect pattern setting process in step S521. It can be advanced.

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 91 determines that the effect with reach is performed due to the change in the look-ahead target (step S5191: YES), the sub CPU 91 executes the first expected effect lottery (step S5192). Specifically, the first expected effect random number is acquired and stored in the sub RAM 93. The first expected effect random number is added by "1" each time the random number update process of step S46 described above is performed based on FIG. 49, and the sub CPU 91 sets the count value at the time of receiving the hold command as the first expected effect. Get it as a random number. Then, it is determined whether or not to execute the first expected effect based on whether or not the first expected effect random number matches any of the random numbers related to the first expected effect random number stored in the sub ROM 92 in advance. ..

Although not shown in the figure, the sub ROM 92 contains the pre-judgment result (whether or not it is a “big hit”) related to the first special symbol determination, the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol, and the above-mentioned first expectation. A table associated with a random number value related to the effect random number is stored. The sub CPU 91 refers to this table and determines the first special symbol determination in which the acquired first expected effect random number is specified from the prior determination information stored in the sub RAM 93 in the process of step S516 (see FIG. 50). It is determined whether or not to execute the first expected effect based on the result and whether or not it matches any of the random number values associated with the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol. In this table, with respect to the preliminary determination result related to the first special symbol determination, more random values are associated with "big hit" than with "loss". Further, the longer the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is, the more random values are associated with it. Therefore, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the higher the jackpot reliability is, the easier it is to execute the first expected effect, and conversely, the lower the jackpot reliability is, the more difficult it is to execute the first expected effect.

Subsequently, the sub CPU 91 determines whether or not to execute the first expected effect based on the lottery result in step S5912 (step S5913). Here, if it is determined by the sub CPU 91 that the first expected effect is not executed (step S5193: NO), the process proceeds to step S5199, which will be described later.

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 91 determines that the first expected effect is to be executed (step S5193: YES), is the determination result of the first special symbol determination indicated by the prior determination information stored in the sub RAM 93 a "big hit"? Whether or not it is determined (step S5194). Here, when it is determined that the hit is "big hit" (step S5194: YES), the first expected effect pattern selection table for big hit is read from the sub ROM 92 and set in the sub RAM 93 (step S5195), and it is not "big hit". If it is determined (step S5194: NO), the first expected effect pattern selection table for reach loss is read from the sub ROM 92 and set in the sub RAM 93 (step S5196).

Then, the sub CPU 91 refers to the first expected effect pattern selection table set in the sub RAM 93 by the process of step S5195 or the process of step S5196, and selects the first expected effect pattern selection process. Is executed (step S5197).

Although not shown in the figure, in the first expected effect pattern selection table stored in the sub ROM 92, the determination result of the first special symbol determination, the variation pattern of the first special symbol, and the first expected effect are started. The number of pending first special symbol determinations, the effect pattern of the first expected effect, and the random number value are associated with each other. In the process of step S5197, the sub CPU 91 updates the determination result of the first special symbol determination and the variation pattern of the first special symbol specified by the prior determination information stored in the sub RAM 93, and the process of step S512. By reading the effect pattern corresponding to the number of holds for 1 special symbol determination and the first expected effect random number acquired when the hold command is received from the first expected effect pattern selection table set in the sub RAM 93, Select one production pattern of the first expected production.

It should be noted that when the first expected effect pattern selection table for jackpot is referred to, the first expectation is made during the execution of the first expected effect, as compared with the case where the first expected effect pattern selection table for reach loss is referred to. It has the characteristic that the production pattern of the production is easily changed.

Further, here, when selecting the effect pattern of the first expected effect, the case where the same first expected effect random number used for the first expected effect lottery in step S5912 is used has been described as an example. A random number different from the expected effect random number may be used to select the effect pattern of the first expected effect.

Here, the case where the lottery for determining whether or not to execute the first expected effect and the lottery for selecting the effect pattern of the first expected effect are separate lottery has been described as an example, but the first expected effect has been described. It may be decided by one lottery whether or not to execute the above, and if so, what kind of effect pattern the first expected effect is to be executed.

Subsequently, the sub CPU 91 sets the first expected effect pattern information indicating the effect pattern of the first expected effect selected in the process of step S5197 in the sub RAM 93 as the setting information of the first expected effect (step S5198).

When the sub CPU 91 executes the process of step S5198 or determines that the first expected effect is not executed (step S5193: NO), the sub CPU 91 executes the second expected effect lottery (step S5199). Specifically, the second expected effect random number is acquired and stored in the sub RAM 93. The second expected effect random number is added by "1" each time the random number update process in step S46 described above is performed based on FIG. 49, and the sub CPU 91 sets the count value at the time of receiving the hold command as the second expected effect. Get it as a random number. Then, it is determined whether or not to execute the second expected effect based on whether or not the second expected effect random number matches any of the random numbers related to the second expected effect random number stored in the sub ROM 92 in advance. ..

Although not shown in the figure, the sub ROM 92 contains the pre-judgment result (whether or not it is a “big hit”) related to the first special symbol determination, the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol, and the second expectation described above. A table associated with a random number value related to the effect random number is stored. The sub CPU 91 refers to this table and determines the first special symbol determination in which the acquired second expected effect random number is specified from the prior determination information stored in the sub RAM 93 in the process of step S516 (see FIG. 50). It is determined whether or not to execute the second expected effect based on the result and whether or not it matches any of the random number values associated with the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol. In this table, with respect to the preliminary determination result related to the first special symbol determination, more random values are associated with "big hit" than with "loss". Further, the longer the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is, the more random values are associated with it. Therefore, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the higher the jackpot reliability is, the easier it is to execute the second expected effect, and conversely, the lower the jackpot reliability is, the more difficult it is to execute the second expected effect.

Subsequently, the sub CPU 91 determines whether or not to execute the second expected effect based on the lottery result in step S5199 (step S5200). Here, when it is determined by the sub CPU 91 that the second expected effect is not executed (step S5200: NO), the process proceeds to the precursor effect pattern setting process of step S521.

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 91 determines that the second expected effect is to be executed (step S5200: YES), is the determination result of the first special symbol determination indicated by the prior determination information stored in the sub RAM 93 a "big hit"? It is determined whether or not (step S5201). Here, when it is determined that the hit is "big hit" (step S5201: YES), the second expected effect pattern selection table for big hit is read from the sub ROM 92 and set in the sub RAM 93 (step S5202), and it is not "big hit". If it is determined (step S5201: NO), the second expected effect pattern selection table for reach loss is read from the sub ROM 92 and set in the sub RAM 93 (step S5203).

Then, the sub CPU 91 refers to the second expected effect pattern selection table set in the sub RAM 93 by the process of step S5202 or the process of step S5203, and selects the second expected effect pattern selection process. Is executed (step S5204).

Although not shown in the figure, in the second expected effect pattern selection table stored in the sub ROM 92, the determination result of the first special symbol determination, the variation pattern of the first special symbol, and the second expected effect are started. The number of pending first special symbol determinations, the effect pattern of the second expected effect, and the random number value are associated with each other. In the process of step S5204, the sub CPU 91 updates the determination result of the first special symbol determination and the variation pattern of the first special symbol specified by the prior determination information stored in the sub RAM 93, and the process of step S512. By reading the effect pattern corresponding to the number of hold of 1 special symbol determination and the second expected effect random number acquired when the hold command is received from the second expected effect pattern selection table set in the sub RAM 93, Select the production pattern of 1 of the second expected production.

It should be noted that when the second expected effect pattern selection table for jackpot is referred to, the second expectation is performed during the execution of the second expected effect, as compared with the case where the second expected effect pattern selection table for reach loss is referred to. It has the characteristic that the production pattern of the production is easily changed.

Further, here, when selecting the effect pattern of the second expected effect, the case where the same second expected effect random number used for the second expected effect lottery in step S5199 is used has been described as an example. A random number different from the expected effect random number may be used to select the effect pattern of the second expected effect.

Here, the case where the lottery for determining whether or not to execute the second expected effect and the lottery for selecting the effect pattern for the second expected effect are separate lottery has been described as an example, but the second expected effect has been described. It may be decided by one lottery whether or not to execute the above, and if so, what kind of effect pattern the second expected effect is to be executed.

Subsequently, the sub CPU 91 sets the second expected effect pattern information indicating the effect pattern of the second expected effect selected in the process of step S5204 in the sub RAM 93 as the setting information of the second expected effect (step S5205).

In the process of selecting the effect pattern of the third expected effect (see FIG. 26) and setting the information indicating the selection result in the sub RAM 93 as the third expected effect pattern information, the random numbers and tables used are different. Except for this, since the process is performed in the same manner as the process related to the first expected effect and the process related to the second expected effect described above based on FIG. 53, detailed description here will be omitted.

[Precursor effect pattern setting process by sub-control board 90]
Next, with reference to FIG. 54, the precursor effect pattern setting process executed on the sub-control board 90 will be described. This precursor effect pattern setting process is a process of setting either one of the first precursor effect and the second precursor effect described above based on FIG. 34. Here, FIG. 54 is a detailed flowchart of the precursor effect pattern setting process in step S521 of FIG. 50.

Following the expected effect pattern setting process in step S519, the sub CPU 91 executes a precursor effect lottery as illustrated in FIG. 54 (step S5211). Specifically, the precursor effect random number is acquired and stored in the sub RAM 93. This precursor effect random number is added by "1" each time the random number update process of step S46 described above is performed based on FIG. 49, and the sub CPU 91 acquires the count value at the time when the hold command is received as the precursor effect random number. .. Then, it is determined whether or not to execute the precursor effect based on whether or not the precursor effect random number matches any of the random numbers related to the precursor effect random number stored in the sub ROM 92 in advance.

Subsequently, the sub CPU 91 determines whether or not to execute the precursor effect based on the lottery result in step S5211 (step S5212). Here, if it is determined by the sub CPU 91 that the precursor effect is not executed (step S5212: NO), the process proceeds to step S523 in FIG.

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 91 determines that the precursor effect is to be executed (step S5212: YES), the sub CPU 91 specifies whether or not each suggestion effect is executed (step S5213). Specifically, in the preliminary determination information related to the first special symbol determination stored in the sub RAM 93 in the process of step S516 in FIG. 50, whether or not the determination result of the first special symbol determination is a "big hit" is indicated. In addition to the information shown, information indicating the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol is included. Therefore, the sub CPU 91 determines whether the variation pattern of the first special symbol selected at the start of the look-ahead target variation is the variation pattern for reachless loss based on the information indicating the variation pattern of the first special symbol. Judge whether or not. Here, when it is determined that the fluctuation pattern is for loss without reach, the reach effect is not performed due to the change in the look-ahead target. Therefore, the effect without reach in the change in the look-ahead target (an example of the fourth suggestion effect: FIG. ) Can be identified as being performed.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol selected at the start of the look-ahead target fluctuation is not the fluctuation pattern for reach-less loss, that is, the fluctuation pattern for jackpot or the fluctuation pattern for reach loss. If this is the case, the sub CPU 91 refers to the variation effect pattern selection table for reach stored in the sub ROM 92 to specify the effect performed by the look-ahead target variation. In this variation effect pattern selection table for reach, a plurality of types of variation effect patterns for reach effect are associated with each combination of the determination result of the first special symbol determination and the variation pattern of the first special symbol. However, the flow of the variable effect itself is the same for the plurality of types of the variable effect pattern of the effect with reach, except that the variation mode of the effect symbol is different. Therefore, if the determination result of the first special symbol determination and the variation pattern of the first special symbol can be specified, it is possible to specify the flow of the variation effect performed by the look-ahead target variation. Therefore, when the sub CPU 91 determines that the variation pattern of the first special symbol selected at the start of the look-ahead target variation is not the variation pattern for reachless loss, it is based on the information included in the pre-determination information. By specifying the determination result of the first special symbol determination and the variation pattern of the first special symbol and reading out the variation effect pattern of the corresponding reachable effect, the flow of the variation effect performed by the look-ahead target variation is specified. .. Whether or not normal reach (an example of the first suggestion effect: see FIG. 34 (B)) is performed in the look-ahead target variation by such processing, and a pseudo-third consecutive variation effect (an example of the second suggestion effect: FIG. It is possible to specify whether or not 34 (C)) is performed and whether or not SPSP reach (an example of the third suggestion effect: see FIG. 34 (D)) is performed.

As described above, in the process of step S5213, the sub CPU 91 executes the non-reach effect, the normal reach, the pseudo third consecutive variation effect, and the SPSP reach in the read-ahead target variation. When the presence or absence is specified, whether or not the first precursor effect can be executed is specified based on the specific result (step S5214). In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, as described above based on FIG. 34, at least one of the normal reach (see FIG. 34 (B)) and the pseudo-third consecutive variation effect (see FIG. 34 (C)) is It is set in advance that the first precursor effect (an example of the first expected effect) is executed prior to the look-ahead target change, provided that it is executed in the look-ahead target change. Therefore, the sub CPU 91 determines whether or not at least one of the normal reach and the pseudo-third consecutive variation effect is executed in the look-ahead target variation based on the specific result in the process of step S5213, and the first Identify whether or not the precursory effect is feasible.

Following such processing in step S5214, the sub CPU 91 specifies whether or not the second precursor effect can be executed (step S5215). In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, as described above based on FIG. 34, either one of the non-reach effect (see FIG. 34 (A)) and the SPSP reach (see FIG. 34 (D)) is in the look-ahead target variation. On condition that it is executed, it is preset to execute the second precursor effect (an example of the second expected effect) prior to the change in the look-ahead target. Therefore, the sub CPU 91 determines whether or not one of the no-reach effect and the SPSP reach is executed due to the change in the look-ahead target based on the specific result in the process of step S5213, and executes the second precursor effect. Identify if it is possible.

Next, the sub CPU 91 determines whether or not both the first precursor effect and the second precursor effect can be executed based on the specific result of step S5214 and the specific result of step S5215 (). Step S5216). For example, when SPSP reach is executed after developing into a pseudo-third consecutive variation effect in the look-ahead target variation, both the execution condition of the first precursor effect and the execution condition of the second precursor effect are satisfied. You may perform the precursory effect of.

When the sub CPU 91 determines that both precursor effects can be executed (step S5216: YES), for example, a lottery using random numbers is performed to select either the first precursor effect or the second precursor effect. , Information indicating the selection result is set in the sub RAM 93 as setting information for the precursor effect (step S5217).

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 91 determines that neither of the precursory effects can be executed (step S5216: NO), that is, only one of the execution condition of the first precursory effect and the execution condition of the second precursory effect is satisfied. If not, it is determined whether or not the feasible precursor effect is the first precursor effect based on the specific result of step S5214 and the specific result of step S5215 (step S5218). Here, when it is determined that it is the first precursor effect (step S5218: YES), the setting information of the first precursor effect is set in the sub RAM 93 (step S5219), and it is determined that it is not the first precursor effect (step). S5218: NO), that is, when the second precursor effect can be executed, the setting information of the second precursor effect is set in the sub RAM 93 (step S5220).

[Second interrupt processing by the sub control board 90]
Hereinafter, the second interrupt process executed on the sub-control board 90 will be described with reference to FIG. 55. Here, FIG. 55 is a detailed flowchart of the second interrupt process in step S53 of FIG. 49.

Following the first interrupt process in step S51 of FIG. 49, the sub CPU 91 executes a command reception process that performs a process according to the command (other than the hold command) received from the main control board 80 (a command reception process). Step S10). This command reception process will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 56.

Following the process of step S10, the sub CPU 91 is shown in FIG. 1 based on the presence or absence of input of operation information from the first effect button detection sensor 96 or the second effect button detection sensor 97 shown in FIG. It is determined whether or not the 1 effect button 35 or the second effect button 36 has been operated (step S30). Here, when it is determined that the first effect button 35 or the second effect button 36 has been operated (step S30: YES), an operation command for notifying that fact is set in the sub RAM 93 (step S31). By transmitting this operation command to the image / sound control board 100 and the lamp control board 120, processing for realizing the effect on the effect corresponding to the operation of the first effect button 35 or the second effect button 36 is performed. ..

When the sub CPU 91 executes the process of step S31, or when it is determined that neither the first effect button 35 nor the second effect button 36 is operated (step S30: NO), the sub CPU 91 executes the data transfer process. (Step S33). Specifically, since the data related to the image / sound control is transmitted from the image / sound control board 100, the data is transferred to the lamp control board 120. As a result, the effect by the effect means such as the frame lamp 37, the board lamp 5, the movable decorative member 14, and the vibration motor 128 is controlled by the lamp control board 120 so as to be synchronized with the effect performed by the image display device 7 and the speaker 38. NS.

[Command reception processing by sub-control board 90]
FIG. 56 is a detailed flowchart of the command reception process in step S10 of FIG. 55. As illustrated in FIG. 56, the sub CPU 91 first determines whether or not a command (command other than the hold command) from the main control board 80 has been received (step S14). Here, if it is determined that the command has not been received (step S14: NO), the process proceeds to step S30 described above.

When the sub CPU 91 determines that the command from the main control board 80 has been received (step S14: YES), the command is a fluctuation start command transmitted from the main control board 80 in response to the process of step S310 of FIG. 42. It is determined whether or not there is (step S15). Here, if it is determined that the received command is not the fluctuation start command (step S15: NO), the process proceeds to step S17, which will be described later.

When the sub CPU 91 determines that the received command is the variation start command (step S15: YES), the sub CPU 91 executes the variation start command reception process (step S16). The variable start command reception process will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 57.

When the sub CPU 91 determines that the received command is not the fluctuation start command (step S15: NO), the sub CPU 91 is a fluctuation end command transmitted from the main control board 80 in response to the process of step S314 of FIG. 42. Whether or not it is determined (step S17). When the sub CPU 91 determines that the command is a variation end command (step S17: YES), the sub CPU 91 stops the effect symbol in a manner indicating the determination result of the special symbol determination executed at the start of the symbol variation after ending the variation display of the effect symbol. A variable effect end command instructing the execution of the process to be displayed is set in the sub RAM 93 (step S18).

The determination of the first special symbol determination (or the second special symbol determination) is made by transmitting this variation effect end command to the image / sound control board 100 and the lamp control board 120 by the command transmission process (see FIG. 49) in step S47. As the special symbol indicating the result is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 41 (or the second special symbol display 42), the determination result of the first special symbol determination (or the second special symbol determination) is shown. The effect symbol is stopped and displayed on the display screen 70.

When the sub CPU 91 determines that the received command is not the variable end command (step S17: NO), is the command an opening command transmitted from the main control board 80 in response to the process of step S3175 of FIG. 45? Whether or not it is determined (step S19). Here, when it is determined that the received command is the opening command (step S19: YES), the start of the opening effect of notifying the type of the jackpot or urging the player to hit right during the opening period of the jackpot game is imaged. An opening effect start command for instructing the acoustic control board 100 (and the lamp control board 120) is set in the sub RAM 93 (step S20). For example, when the opening command related to "5R probability variation A" is received, if the three effect symbols indicating doublets of "777" or "333" are immediately stopped, the above is described based on FIG. 13 (A). If the opening effect start command for instructing the execution of the opening effect is set and the other three effect symbols indicating doublets have just stopped, the above is described based on FIGS. 14 (A) to 14 (C). Set the opening effect start command to instruct the execution of the opening effect.

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 91 determines that the received command is not the opening command (step S19: NO), the sub CPU 91 is an effective round game in which the command is transmitted from the main control board 80 in response to the process of step S609 of FIG. The start command, the second large winning opening opening / closing round game start command transmitted from the main control board 80 in response to the process of step S610 of FIG. 46, and the transmission from the main control board 80 in response to the process of step S612 of FIG. It is determined whether or not it is any of the round game start commands of the first grand prize opening opening / closing round game start command (step S21).

When the sub CPU 91 determines that the received command is a round game start command (step S21: YES), the sub CPU 91 executes a round game start command reception process that performs processing according to the received round game start command (step S23). .. The round game start command reception process will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 63.

When the sub CPU 91 determines that the received command is not the round game start command (step S21: NO), the sub CPU 91 is a V winning command transmitted from the main control board 80 in response to the process of step S620 of FIG. 47. It is determined whether or not there is (step S25). Here, when it is determined that the received command is a V winning command (step S25: YES), the V winning command receiving process that performs processing according to the V winning command is executed (step S26). The V winning command reception process will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 64.

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 91 determines that the received command is not a V winning command (step S25: NO), the sub CPU 91 executes the ending command receiving process (step S27). Specifically, when the three effect symbols indicating the doublet of "777" or "333" are stopped, the condition is that the V winning command is received before the ending command is received. Set the ending effect start command in the sub RAM 93 to instruct the execution of the ending effect to notify that the effect in the effect mode named "Fierce fight RUSH" is started, which definitely notifies that the game is in the "probability change game state". .. In addition, if the V winning command is not received before the ending command is received even though the three production symbols indicating the doublets of "777" or "333" are stopped, the "probability change game state" is obtained. The sub-RAM 93 is instructed to execute the ending effect that notifies that the effect in the effect mode named "challenge mode" is started. set. On the other hand, when the three effects symbols other than "777" and "333" that show doublet are actually stopped, the ending effect that instructs the execution of the ending effect that notifies that the effect in the challenge mode is started is started. Set the command in the sub RAM 93.

These ending commands are transmitted to the image / sound control board 100 (and the lamp control board 120) by the command transmission process in step S47 of FIG. 49. As a result, the above-mentioned ending effect based on FIG. 13 (F) and the above-mentioned ending effect based on FIG. 14 (I) are realized.

[Variation start command reception processing by sub-control board 90]
FIG. 57 is a detailed flowchart of the fluctuation start command reception process in step S16 of FIG. 56. When the sub CPU 91 determines that the command received from the main control board 80 is the fluctuation start command (step S15: YES), the sub CPU 91 executes a series of fluctuation start command reception processes exemplified in FIG. 57.

That is, the sub CPU 91 acquires the value at the time when the fluctuation start command is received from the main control board 80 with respect to the effect random number appropriately updated by the random number update process (step S46 in FIG. 49) on the sub control board 90, and the sub RAM 93 It is stored in (step S161). Then, the received fluctuation start command is analyzed (step S162).

As described above, the fluctuation start command includes the setting information of the symbol indicating the determination result of the jackpot determination process, whether the setting information of this symbol is related to the first special symbol determination, or is related to the second special symbol determination. It includes information on a winning start port indicating whether or not the game is a game, information on setting a variation pattern of a special symbol, information indicating the game state of the gaming machine 1, and the like. Therefore, by analyzing the fluctuation start command, the type and result of the special symbol determination can be specified. That is, it is possible to specify whether it is a big hit or a loss, and if it is a big hit, what kind of big hit it is. Further, by specifying whether or not the fluctuation pattern is a fluctuation pattern for loss based on the fluctuation pattern setting information, it is possible to determine whether it is necessary to perform the effect with reach or the effect without reach. .. In addition, the fluctuation time of the special symbol can be specified based on the setting information of the fluctuation pattern. In addition, the current gaming state of the gaming machine 1 can be specified based on the information indicating the gaming state.

When the sub CPU 91 analyzes the variation start command, the sub CPU 91 executes a variation effect pattern setting process for setting the variation effect pattern of the variation effect accompanying the variation display of the special symbol based on the analysis result (step S163). By executing this variable effect pattern setting process, the variation mode of the effect symbol, the presence / absence of the reach effect, the presence / absence of the pseudo continuous effect, the type of the effect symbol constituting the reach pattern, the type and content of the reach effect, and the pseudo continuous effect. The content of, the type of effect symbol to be stopped and displayed, etc. are determined. This variation effect pattern setting process will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 58.

Following the process of step S163, the sub CPU 91 executes various advance notice effects (for example, step-up effect, dialogue advance notice, group advance notice) when the effect symbol is variablely displayed in the variable effect pattern set in the process of step S163. , Cut-in, etc.) is executed (step S164). The notice effect pattern setting process will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 59.

Following the process of step S164, the sub CPU 91 executes the stage suggestion effect pattern setting process for setting the effect pattern of the stage suggestion effect described above based on FIGS. 15 to 19 (step S172). The step suggestion effect pattern setting process is as described above based on FIG.

Next, the sub CPU 91 subsubscribes the variation effect start command instructing the start of the variation effect in the variation effect pattern set in the process of step S163 and the execution of the advance notice effect in the advance notice effect pattern set in the process of step S164. It is set in the RAM 93 (step S174).

This variation effect start command includes at least information indicating the variation effect pattern set by the process of step S163 and information indicating the notice effect pattern set by the process of step S164, and includes the command of step S47. It is transmitted to the audiovisual control board 100 and the lamp control board 120 by the transmission process (see FIG. 49). As a result, the variation effect and the advance notice effect in which the effect pattern is determined on the sub control board 90 are realized by the image / sound control board 100 and the lamp control board 120.

When the step suggestion effect pattern is set in the step suggestion effect pattern setting process of step S172 described above based on FIG. 17, the variable effect pattern set in the process of step S163 in the process of step S174 is used. The sub-RAM 93 is a variable effect start command that instructs the start of the variable effect, the advance notice effect in the advance notice effect pattern set in the process of step S164, and the execution of the step suggestion effect in the stage suggestion effect pattern set in the process of step S172. Is set to. Then, when this variation effect start command is transmitted to the image / sound control board 100 and the lamp control board 120, the variation effect, the advance notice effect, and the stage suggestion effect in which the effect pattern is determined on the sub control board 90 are image / sound. It will be realized by the control board 100 and the lamp control board 120.

Following the process of step S174, the sub CPU 91 updates the hold number stored in the sub RAM 93 to a value obtained by subtracting "1" (step S175). Specifically, when the fluctuation start command received from the main control board 80 notifies the start of the fluctuation display of the first special symbol, the value obtained by subtracting "1" from the number of pending first special symbol determinations. Update to. On the other hand, when the received fluctuation start command notifies the start of the fluctuation display of the second special symbol, the pending number of the second special symbol determination is updated to a value subtracted by "1".

[Variation effect pattern setting process by sub-control board 90]
FIG. 58 is a detailed flowchart of the variation effect pattern setting process in step S163 of FIG. 57, and here, the variation effect pattern setting executed when the variation start command related to the first special symbol determination in the normal game state is received. The processing will be described. Following the process of step S162, the sub CPU 91 sets an effect symbol to be finally confirmed (mainly stopped) on the display screen 70 along with the stop display of the first special symbol (or the second special symbol) (step). S1631). Specifically, based on the symbol setting information included in the fluctuation start command received from the main control board 80, is the special symbol (big hit symbol) indicating the jackpot stopped and displayed at the end of the symbol variation? It is specified whether the special symbol (missing symbol) indicating the loss is stopped and displayed. Then, when it is specified that the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed, an effect symbol for notifying the jackpot (for example, an effect symbol indicating doublet) is set as the effect symbol to be stopped, and the lost symbol is stopped and displayed. When it is specified that the case is specified, an effect symbol for notifying the loss is set. In addition, when setting the effect symbol for notifying the loss, if the loss is notified after the reach effect is performed, the reach loss eye is set as the effect symbol for notifying the loss, and the reach effect is performed. In the case of notifying the loss, a loose eye is set as an effect pattern for notifying the loss.

For example, when a fluctuation start command related to the first special symbol determination including the setting information of the symbol indicating that the 5R probability variation A or the 5R probability variation B is won is received, the first finalized effect symbol stored in the sub ROM 92 is received. Refer to the selection table and select the effect symbol to be confirmed and displayed. In this first finalized effect symbol selection table, 15 random values are associated with "777" and 15 random values are associated with "333", and "111" and "222" are associated with each other. , "444", "555", "666", "888", and "999", and 10 random values are associated with each of the seven types. The sub CPU 91 acquires the value at the time of receiving the fluctuation start command as the selected random number with respect to the selected random number that is appropriately updated each time the above-mentioned random number update process is performed, and has three effect symbols corresponding to the acquired selected random number. By reading the combination from the first finalized effect symbol selection table, the effect symbol to be confirmed and displayed is selected. In this embodiment, 100 random numbers with selected random numbers of "0" to "99" can be taken. Therefore, the ratio of selecting "777" or "333" is 15% (= 15/100 x 100), and the ratio of selecting the combination of the other seven types of three effect symbols is any. Is also 10% (= 10/100 × 100).

Therefore, "777" and "333" are selected as the three effect symbols to be confirmed and displayed, and the above-mentioned effect is executed during the jackpot game based on FIG. 13, and "777" and "333". Other than that may be selected, and the above-mentioned effect based on FIG. 14 may be executed during the jackpot game.

On the other hand, when the fluctuation start command related to the first special symbol determination including the symbol setting information indicating that the 5R normal A or the 5R normal B has been won is received, the second final effect stored in the sub ROM 92 is received. Refer to the symbol selection table and select the effect symbol to be confirmed and displayed. In this second finalized effect symbol selection table, 15 random values are associated with each of the six types of "111", "222", "444", "666", "888", and "999". Has been done. Ten random numbers are associated with "555", and no random values are associated with "777" and "333". The sub CPU 91 acquires the value at the time of receiving the fluctuation start command as the selected random number with respect to the selected random number that is appropriately updated each time the above-mentioned random number update process is performed, and has three effect symbols corresponding to the acquired selected random number. By reading the combination from the second finalized effect symbol selection table, the effect symbol to be confirmed and displayed is selected. As described above, since the selected random number can take 100 random numbers, the ratio of selecting "111", "222", "444", "666", "888", or "999" is any. The ratio of 15% (= 15/100 x 100) and "555" selected is 10% (= 10/100 x 100), and the ratio of "777" or "333" selected is It is 0%.

In this way, when 5R normal A or 5R normal B is selected as the type of jackpot related to the first special symbol determination, three effect symbols indicating "777" or "333" are confirmed and displayed. Therefore, during the jackpot game, the effect illustrated in FIG. 13 is not executed, and the effect illustrated in FIG. 14 is executed.

Next, whether or not the sub CPU 91 needs to perform the effect with reach in accordance with the variation display of the special symbol this time based on the setting information of the variation pattern of the special symbol included in the received variation start command. Is determined (step S1632). Here, when it is determined that it is not necessary to perform the effect with reach (step S1632: NO), the variable effect pattern of the effect without reach is set (step S1633). For example, from the non-reach variable effect pattern selection table in which a plurality of types of non-reach effect variable effect patterns are associated with each special symbol variation pattern, any one corresponding to the effect random number acquired in the process of step S161. The variation effect pattern is read out, and the information indicating the variation effect pattern is set in the sub RAM 93.

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 91 determines that it is necessary to perform the effect with reach (step S1632: YES), the sub CPU 91 sets a variable effect pattern of the effect with reach (step S1634). For example, from the variation effect pattern selection table for reach, in which a plurality of types of variation effect patterns of reach effect are associated with each combination of the determination result of the special symbol determination and the variation pattern of the special symbol, step S161 is performed. Any one of the variation effect patterns corresponding to the effect random numbers acquired in the process is read out, and the information indicating the variation effect pattern is set in the sub RAM 93.

When the process of step S1633 or the process of step S1634 is performed, what kind of variation pattern the effect symbol is variablely displayed, which reach effect is performed when the reach effect is performed, and when the reach effect is developed. Will decide how to develop the reach production.

In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, a variation effect start command for instructing the start of the variation effect in the variation effect pattern set in the process of step S1633 (or the process of step S1634) is issued from the sub-control board 90 to the image / sound control board. By transmitting to 100 (and the lamp control board 120), a variable effect including a variable display of the effect symbol is realized.

[Preliminary effect pattern setting process by sub-control board 90]
FIG. 59 is a detailed flowchart of the advance notice effect pattern setting process in step S164 of FIG. 57. Following the variation effect pattern setting process in step S163, the sub CPU 91 executes the basic notice effect pattern setting process as illustrated in FIG. 59 (step S165). Examples of the basic notice production here include the above-mentioned step-up notice, dialogue notice, group notice, cut-in, and the like. The basic advance notice effect pattern setting process in step S165 will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 60.

Next, the sub CPU 91 has an effect pattern of the definite notification effect executed when the game is controlled in the normal game state, the probabilistic game state, or the time-saving game state among the above-mentioned definite notification effects based on FIG. Is executed (step S166). The final notification effect pattern setting process in step S166 will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 61.

Subsequently, the sub CPU 91 executes the advance suggestion effect pattern setting process for setting the effect pattern of the advance suggestion effect described above based on FIGS. 30 to 33 (step S167). The pre-suggestion effect pattern setting process in step S167 will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 62.

Following the process of step S167, the sub CPU 91 determines whether or not the hold effect flag stored in the sub RAM 93 is set to "ON" (step S168). Here, when it is determined that the hold effect flag is set to "ON" (step S168: YES), the hold effect flag is set to "OFF" (step S169).

[Basic notice effect pattern setting process by sub-control board 90]
FIG. 60 is a detailed flowchart of the basic advance notice effect pattern setting process in step S165 of FIG. 59. Following the variation effect pattern setting process in step S163, the sub CPU 91 acquires and stores the basic advance notice effect random number as illustrated in FIG. 60 (step S1651). Specifically, the basic advance notice effect random number is updated to a value obtained by adding "1" each time the random number update process (see FIG. 49) of step S46 described above is performed, and the sub CPU 91 receives the fluctuation start command. The count value of is acquired as a basic advance notice effect random number, and the acquired basic advance notice effect random number is stored in the sub RAM 93.

Following the process of step S1651, the sub CPU 91 determines whether or not the hold effect flag stored in the sub RAM 93 is set to “ON” (step S1652). Here, when it is determined that the hold effect flag is not set to "ON" (step S1652: NO), the basic advance notice effect pattern selection table for the first control state is read from the sub ROM 92 and set in the sub RAM 93 (step). S1653). On the contrary, when it is determined that the hold effect flag is set to "ON" (step S1652: YES), the basic advance notice effect pattern selection table for the second control state is read from the sub ROM 92 and set in the sub RAM 93 (step). S1654).

The sub CPU 91 executes the basic advance notice effect pattern selection process following the process of step S1653 or the process of step S1654 (step S1655). In the first control state basic advance notice effect pattern selection table set in the sub RAM 93 in the process of step S1653 and the second control state basic advance notice effect pattern selection table set in the sub RAM 93 in the process of step S1654, the first A plurality of judgment results (big hit or loss) of special symbol judgment, fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol, and various basic notice effects (in this embodiment, step-up notice, dialogue notice, group notice, cut-in, etc.) The effect pattern and the random value are associated with each other. The sub CPU 91 includes the determination result of the first special symbol determination and the variation pattern of the first special symbol specified based on the variation start command received from the main control board 80 in step S1655, and the basic acquired in the process of step S1651. One basic advance notice effect pattern is selected by reading the effect pattern of the basic advance notice effect corresponding to the random number of the advance notice effect from the basic advance notice effect pattern selection table set in the sub RAM 93. As a result, the effect pattern of the step-up notice, the effect pattern of the dialogue notice, the effect pattern of the group notice, and the effect pattern of the cut-in are selected. Then, the information indicating the selected basic advance notice effect pattern is set in the sub RAM 93 as the setting information of the basic advance notice effect (step S1656).

The variation effect start command including the setting information of the basic notice effect set in the process of step S1656 is transmitted to the image / sound control board 100 (and the lamp control board 120) by the command transmission process (see FIG. 49) of step S47. Will be done. As a result, the basic advance notice effect in which the effect pattern is set on the sub control board 90 is realized by the image / sound control board 100 (and the lamp control board 120).

(About the basic notice effect pattern selection table for the first control state)
In the present embodiment, the basic advance notice effect pattern selection table for the first control state, which is set in the sub RAM 93 in the process of step S1653, is configured as follows. That is, in the basic advance notice effect pattern selection table for the first control state, eight types of effect patterns are defined for the step-up notice, including "no step-up notice". In addition, regarding the dialogue notice, six types of production patterns are defined, including "no dialogue notice". In addition, regarding the group notice, two types of production patterns are defined when "no group notice" is combined. In addition, regarding cut-in, five types of production patterns are defined when "no cut-in" is combined. Therefore, it can be said that 17 (= 8 types + 6 types + 2 types + 5 types -4) basic advance notice effects are prepared in the basic advance notice effect pattern selection table for the first control state.

(About the basic notice effect pattern selection table for the second control state)
On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the basic advance notice effect pattern selection table for the second control state, which is set in the sub RAM 93 in the process of step S1654, is configured as follows. That is, in the basic advance notice effect pattern selection table for the second control state, three types of effect patterns are defined for the step-up notice, including "no step-up notice". In addition, regarding the dialogue notice, three types of production patterns are defined when "no dialogue notice" is combined. In addition, regarding the group notice, two types of production patterns are defined when "no group notice" is combined. In addition, regarding cut-in, three types of production patterns are defined when "no cut-in" is combined. Therefore, it can be said that seven (= 3 types + 3 types + 2 types + 3 types -4) basic advance notice effects are prepared in the basic advance notice effect pattern selection table for the second control state.

As described above, in the basic advance notice effect pattern selection table for the first control state, 17 basic advance notice effects are prepared, whereas in the basic advance notice effect pattern selection table for the second control state, the first control state 7 basic notice effects are prepared, which is 10 less than the 17 in the basic notice effect pattern selection table.

Therefore, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the hold effect flag is set to "ON" (when it is determined as "YES" in step S1652), the hold effect flag is set to "OFF". There is an advantage that the number of processes related to the basic advance notice effect pattern setting process of FIG. 60 can be reduced as compared with the case where “NO” is determined in step S1652). Further, since the specified effect pattern of the basic advance notice effect pattern selection table for the second control state is smaller than that of the basic advance notice effect pattern selection table for the first control state, the data capacity of the basic advance notice effect pattern selection table for the first control state is smaller than that of the basic advance notice effect pattern selection table for the first control state. It is smaller than the pattern selection table.

By the way, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the sub CPU 91 receives the hold command from the main control board 80 in the first interrupt process of step S51 in FIG. 49, the icon changes as is clear from the notation of FIG. The setting process related to the effect (step S517), the setting process related to the expected image change effect (step S518), the setting process related to the expected effect (step S519), and the setting process related to the precursor effect (step S521) are performed. It is said. Therefore, when the hold command is received in the first interrupt processing, the processing of the sub CPU 91 increases. In other words, when the state when the sub CPU 91 has not received the hold command is set to the first control state, the sub CPU 91 receives the hold command, so that the second control state has more processing than the first control state. Become.

In this way, when the sub CPU 91 is in the second state, it is determined that the command has been received in the second interrupt process (step S53 in FIG. 49) following the first interrupt process (in step S14 in FIG. 56). If it is determined that the command is a fluctuation start command (if it is determined to be "YES" in step S15 of FIG. 56), the series of processes exemplified in FIG. 57 is the first. It will be executed continuously with one interrupt process, and there is a concern that the load on the sub CPU 91 will increase.

Therefore, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the second control state described above is reached by proceeding with the process after step S516 of FIG. 50, the sub CPU 91 sets the hold effect flag to “ON” in the process of step S515. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S1652 of FIG. 60 that the hold effect flag is set to "ON", the basic advance notice effect is usually referred to the first control state basic advance notice effect pattern selection table. The pattern is set by referring to the basic advance notice effect pattern selection table for the second control state instead of the basic advance notice effect pattern selection table for the first control state. As a result, as described above, the number of processes related to the basic advance notice effect pattern setting process of FIG. 60 is reduced, and it is possible to suppress the load on the sub CPU 91 from becoming excessive.

Based on such a hold effect flag, the gaming machine 1 that switches the basic advance notice effect pattern selection table and executes the basic advance notice effect pattern setting process of FIG. 60 can be regarded as the following game machine.

A determination means for determining whether or not to execute a special game (for example, a jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player (for example, the main CPU 81 that executes the jackpot determination process in step S308 of FIG. 42).
When the determination means determines that the special game is to be executed, the special game execution means for executing the special game (for example, the main CPU 81 that executes the large winning opening opening / closing control process in step S6 of FIG. 39)
An effect executing means (image display device 7, speaker 38, frame lamp 37, board lamp 5, movable decorative member 14, vibration motor 128, etc.) that executes the effect in a predetermined effect pattern, and
A production control means (for example, a sub CPU 91) for controlling the execution of the production is provided.
The effect control means
When the effect pattern is set in the first control state (for example, the processes after step S516 are not executed in the first interrupt process of FIG. 50, and the sub CPU 91 is in the state where the hold effect flag is “OFF”, the sub CPU 91 steps S1655 and S1656. When the effect pattern is set in the second control state, which has more processing than the first control state (for example, the processing after step S516 is executed in the first interrupt processing of FIG. 50). (When the sub CPU 91 executes the processes of steps S1655 and S1656 while the hold effect flag is "ON").
In the second control state, a gaming machine characterized by setting an effect pattern that does not include a predetermined effect (for example, a predetermined basic advance notice effect) for which an effect pattern is set in the first control state. ..

In the present embodiment, since the basic advance notice effect pattern selection table for the first control state is referred to in the first control state, 17 basic advance notice effects are prepared as described above. On the other hand, in the second control state, since the basic advance notice effect pattern selection table for the second control state is referred to, only seven basic advance notice effects are prepared. Therefore, in the second control state, there is a possibility that the effect pattern may be set in the first control state. The effect pattern of the basic advance effect that does not include the 10 (= 17-7) basic advance effects. Is set. As a result, it is possible to prevent the load on the sub CPU 91 from becoming excessive.

[Confirmed notification effect pattern setting process by the sub control board 90]
FIG. 61 is a detailed flowchart of the final notification effect pattern setting process in step S166 of FIG. 59. Following the basic advance notice effect pattern setting process in step S165, the sub CPU 91 executes the following processes exemplified in FIG. 61. That is, the sub CPU 91 determines the first special symbol this time based on the information indicating the determination result of the first special symbol determination included in the fluctuation start command related to the first special symbol determination received from the main control board 80. It is determined whether or not the determination result of is a "big hit" (step S1661). Here, when it is determined by the sub CPU 91 that it is not a "big hit" (step S1661: NO), the process proceeds to the pre-suggestion effect pattern setting process (see FIG. 59) in step S167, which will be described later.

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 91 determines that the determination result of the first special symbol determination this time is a "big hit" (step S1661: YES), the sub CPU 91 acquires and stores the definite notification effect random number (step S1662). Specifically, the definite notification effect random number is updated to a value obtained by adding "1" each time the random number update process (see FIG. 49) of step S46 described above is performed, and the sub CPU 91 receives the fluctuation start command. The count value of is acquired as a definite notification effect random number, and the acquired definite notification effect random number is stored in the sub RAM 93.

Following the process of step S1662, the sub CPU 91 reads the final notification effect pattern selection table from the sub ROM 92, sets it in the sub RAM 93 (step S1663), and executes the final notification effect pattern selection process (step S1664).

In the above-mentioned definite notification effect pattern selection table, the variation pattern of the first special symbol (variation pattern for jackpot), the effect pattern of various definite notification effects (see FIG. 20) in the normal gaming state, and the random value correspond. It is attached. The sub CPU 91 is the variation pattern of the first special symbol specified based on the variation start command related to the "big hit" of the first special symbol determination received from the main control board 80 in step S1664, and the process of step S1662. The effect pattern of the definite notification effect is selected by reading the effect pattern of the definite notification effect corresponding to the acquired random number of the definite notification effect from the definite notification effect pattern selection table set in the sub RAM 93. Then, the information indicating the effect pattern of the selected definite notification effect is set in the sub RAM 93 as the setting information of the definite notification effect (step S1665). The final notification effect is realized by transmitting the variation effect start command including the setting information of the final notification effect to the image / sound control board 100 and the lamp control board 120.

Although detailed description is omitted, two or more final notification effect production patterns may be set by executing the above-mentioned final notification effect pattern setting process based on FIG. 61. In this case, two or more definite notification effects are executed within the same variation of the variation display of the first special symbol in the normal game state. In addition, in the fixed notification effect pattern selection table, a random number value is also associated with the effect pattern of "no fixed notification effect", so that the final notification effect is always executed when the result is a "big hit". Instead, the definite notification effect is executed for a part of the case where the determination result of the first special symbol determination in the normal game state is "big hit". Further, since the execution conditions, the execution timing, the effect mode, and the like of the final notification effect are as described above based on FIG. 20, detailed description here will be omitted.

Further, here, regarding the definite notification effect pattern selection process executed when the sub CPU 91 receives the fluctuation start command related to the "big hit" of the first special symbol determination while the game is controlled in the normal game state. explained. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 91 receives the variation start command related to the second special symbol determination while the game is controlled in the probabilistic game state (or the time saving game state), it is set in the sub RAM 93 in the process of step S1663. Since the same processing as described above is performed based on FIG. 61 except that the confirmation notification effect pattern selection table is different, the confirmation notification in the above-mentioned probability variation game state (or time-saving game state) is performed based on FIG. 20. The description of the final notification effect pattern setting process relating to the effect will be omitted.

[Preliminary suggestion effect pattern setting process by sub-control board 90]
FIG. 62 is a detailed flowchart of the pre-suggestion effect pattern setting process in step S167 of FIG. 59, and is a flowchart illustrating the process of setting the above-mentioned pre-suggestion effect pattern setting process based on FIGS. 30 to 33.

Following the definite notification effect pattern setting process in step S166 of FIG. 59, the sub CPU 91 executes the following process exemplified in FIG. 62. That is, the sub CPU 91 acquires and stores the advance suggestion effect random number (step S1671). Specifically, the prior suggestion effect random number is updated to a value obtained by adding "1" each time the random number update process (see FIG. 49) of step S46 described above is performed, and the sub CPU 91 receives the fluctuation start command. The count value of is acquired as a prior suggestion effect random number, and the acquired prior suggestion effect random number is stored in the sub RAM 93.

Next, the sub CPU 91 determines whether or not to execute the prior suggestion effect based on whether or not the acquired prior suggestion effect random number matches any of the random numbers related to the prior suggestion effect stored in the sub ROM 92 in advance. Determine (step S1672). Here, when it is determined that the prior suggestion effect is not executed (step S1672: NO), the process proceeds to step S168 of FIG. 59 described above.

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 91 determines that the advance suggestion effect is to be executed (step S1672: YES), for example, the information indicating the variation effect pattern set in the process of step S163 and the basic notice set in the process of step S165. Based on the information indicating the effect pattern, the effect to be executed during the variable display of the first special symbol this time is specified (step S1673).

Next, the sub CPU 91 determines the number of effects to be pre-suggested by the pre-suggestion effect (that is, the number of effect suggestion images displayed during the effect display of FIGS. 31 (H) and 31 (I)) (step S1674). ). In the present embodiment, the number of effects suggested in advance is selected by lottery using random numbers. For example, a table in which the determination result of the first special symbol determination, the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol, the number of effects suggested in advance, and the random number value are associated with each other is stored in the sub ROM 92, and the fluctuation start command is executed. The number of pre-suggested effects corresponding to the pre-suggested effect random number acquired by the received timing, the determination result of the first special symbol specified based on the fluctuation start command, and the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol is described above. As an example, a method of determining the number of pre-suggested effects by reading from the table of. In this case, if the judgment result of the first special symbol determination this time is "missing" and the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol having a relatively short fluctuation time is selected, the number of effects suggested in advance is When the number is reduced and the judgment result of the first special symbol judgment this time is "big hit", or when the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol with a relatively long fluctuation time is selected even if it is "missing". It is preferable to distribute random values so that the number of effects suggested in advance is large.

Following the process of step S1674, a pre-suggested effect is selected (step S1675). For example, if there are seven effects specified in the process of step S1673 and the number of pre-suggested effects determined in the process of step S1674 is "4", four effects are selected from the above seven effects. A lottery is conducted and four effects are selected. Then, the information indicating the effect suggestion image (see FIG. 30) corresponding to the selected effect is set in the sub RAM 93 as the setting information of the prior suggestion effect (step S1676). By transmitting the variation effect start command including the setting information of the advance suggestion effect to the image / sound control board 100 and the lamp control board 120, the above-mentioned advance suggestion effect is realized based on FIGS. 30 to 33. Become.

[Round game start command reception processing by sub-control board 90]
FIG. 63 is a detailed flowchart of the round game start command reception process in step S23 of FIG. 56. When the sub CPU 91 determines that the command received from the main control board 80 is the round game start command (step S21: YES), the sub CPU 91 executes the following processing. That is, as illustrated in FIG. 63, it is determined whether or not the received command is an effective round game start command transmitted from the main control board 80 in response to the process of step S609 of FIG. 46 (step S231). ). Here, if it is determined that the received command is not a valid round game start command (step S231: NO), the process proceeds to step S236, which will be described later.

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 91 determines that the received command is a valid round game start command (step S231: YES), for example, it is based on whether or not the sub CPU 91 has received the opening command related to the jackpot of the first special symbol determination. Then, it is determined whether or not the current jackpot is the first hit (step S232). Here, when it is determined that it is not the first hit (step S232: NO), that is, when it is a big hit of the second special symbol determination, as is clear from the notation of FIG. 6C, the second special symbol determination is performed. Since there is usually no jackpot (effective round game is not executed) in the jackpot, a command for instructing the execution of the launch promotion effect for promoting the launch of the game ball aiming at the V winning opening 287 is set in the sub RAM 93 (step S233). By transmitting this command to the image / sound control board 100 (and the lamp control board 120) by the command transmission process in step S47 of FIG. 49, the launch promotion effect described above based on FIGS. 13 (B) and 13 (C) is produced. It will be executed.

When the sub CPU 91 determines that the current jackpot is the first hit (step S232: YES), the sub CPU 91 determines whether or not the current jackpot game is a jackpot game started according to the symbol alignment of the specific symbols. (Step S234). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the three effect symbols for notifying the jackpot of "777" or "333" have been selected by the process of step S1631 of FIG. 58. Here, when it is determined that the jackpot game is started according to the symbol alignment of the specific symbols (step S234: YES), that is, the doublet of "777" or "333" is confirmed and the jackpot game is started. If so, the process of step S233 described above is executed.

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 91 determines that the current jackpot game is not a jackpot game started according to the symbol alignment of the specific symbols (step S234: NO), that is, symbols other than "777" or "333". When the jackpot game is started according to the alignment, a command for executing the effect during the round without the launch promotion effect is set in the sub RAM 93 (step S235). By transmitting this command to the image / sound control board 100 (and the lamp control board 120) by the command transmission process in step S47 of FIG. 49, the above-mentioned in-round effect is produced based on FIGS. 14 (D) to 14 (E). It will be executed.

Next, when the sub CPU 91 executes the process of step S233, executes the process of step S235, or determines that the received command is not a valid round game start command (step S231: NO), the sub CPU 91 receives the command. It is determined whether or not the command is the second large winning opening opening / closing round game start command transmitted from the main control board 80 in response to the process of step S610 of FIG. 46 (step S236).

When the sub CPU 91 determines that the received command is the second large winning opening opening / closing round game start command (step S236: YES), the sub CPU 91 is a round related to the second large winning opening opening / closing game that opens / closes the second large winning opening 28. A command for executing the medium effect is set in the sub RAM 93 (step S237). By transmitting this command to the image / sound control board 100 (and the lamp control board 120) by the command transmission process in step S47 of FIG. The above-mentioned in-round effect will be executed based on 14 (F) to (H).

In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, as described above based on FIG. 20, the second special symbol is displayed at the start of the round game of the predetermined round (for example, the first round) for opening and closing the second special winning opening 28. The right to judge is reserved, and some of the reserved rights are judged to be "big hits", and it is decided whether or not to execute the special winning sound output effect. On condition that the lottery for the production is won, the special winning sound output production as the final notification production will be executed.

The sub CPU 91 executes, for example, the following processing in order to realize such a special winning sound output effect. That is, following the process of step S237, it is determined whether or not the current round game is a round game of a predetermined round (for example, the first round) that opens and closes the second special winning opening 28 (step S238). In this embodiment, since the predetermined round is set to the first round, the sub CPU 91 adds "1" to the number of receptions each time it receives the second large winning opening opening / closing round game start command. The process of updating to the value is executed, and the predetermined round (for example, the first round) in which the current round game opens and closes the second winning opening 28 based on whether or not the number of receptions after the update is "1". ) Is a round game.

Next, when the sub CPU 91 determines that the current round game is a round game of a predetermined round (for example, the first round) that opens and closes the second special winning opening 28 (step S238: YES), the sub CPU 91 is held. It is determined whether or not the right of the second special symbol determination that is present includes the one that is determined to be a "big hit" (step S239). Specifically, the pre-determination indicating that the determination result of the second special symbol determination is a "big hit" in the one or a plurality of pre-determination information stored in the sub RAM 93 by the process of step S515 of FIG. Based on whether or not the information is included, it is determined whether or not the reserved second special symbol determination right includes one that will be determined as a "big hit".

Subsequently, when the sub CPU 91 determines that the reserved second special symbol determination right includes a thing to be determined as a "big hit" (step S239: YES), the sub CPU 91 wins a special prize. An effect lottery is performed to determine whether or not to execute the sound output effect (step S240). Specifically, regarding the special winning sound output production random number that is appropriately updated every time the random number update processing is performed, the count at the time when the first second big winning opening opening / closing round game start command is received in this big hit game. The value is acquired as a special winning sound output effect random number, and it is based on whether or not the special winning sound output effect random number matches the random number value (winning value) related to the special winning sound output effect random number stored in advance in the sub ROM 92. Then, it is decided whether or not to perform the special winning sound output production.

Based on the lottery result in step S240, the sub CPU 91 determines whether or not to perform the special winning sound output effect (step S241), and when it is determined to perform the special winning sound output effect (step S241: YES), the sub CPU 91 is special. The setting information of the winning sound output effect is set in the sub RAM 93 (step S242). In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, when a game ball is detected by the second major winning opening sensor 281 during the opening / closing of the second major winning opening 28, a winning notification is notified to that effect. The command is transmitted to the sub control board 90 by the main CPU 81. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 91 receives the above winning notification command during the second big winning opening opening / closing game of the first round, the setting information of the special winning sound output effect is set in the sub RAM 93. As a condition, a special winning sound output effect command is set in the sub RAM 93. This special winning sound output effect command is transmitted to the image / sound control board 100 and the lamp control board 120 by the command transmission process in step S47 of FIG. 49, whereby the special winning sound output effect is realized.

The setting information of the above-mentioned special winning sound output effect is, for example, the timing at which the second big winning opening opening / closing round game start command for notifying that the second big winning opening opening / closing game of the second round is started is received. Since it is discarded from the sub RAM 93, the special winning sound output effect is not performed after the second big winning opening opening / closing game of the first round is completed.

Following the process of step S242, the sub CPU 91 sets the confirmation notification flag stored in the sub RAM 93 to “ON” (step S243). This definite notification flag is a flag indicating whether or not the definite notification effect (here, the special winning sound output effect) is executed during the jackpot game, and is set to "ON" in response to the processing in step S242 being executed. Is set to.

In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, during the fifth round game (fifth second large winning opening opening / closing round game) in which the second special winning opening 28 is opened, the above-mentioned special is described based on FIG. A V-winning notification effect may be executed, but this special V-winning notification effect includes a reserved second special symbol determination right that is determined to be a "big hit". It has the same function as the special winning sound output effect in that it is a definite notification effect that notifies the presence. Therefore, in the present embodiment, a configuration is adopted in which the special V winning notification effect is not performed when the special winning sound output effect is executed, and whether the sub CPU 91 executes the special V winning notification effect. With reference to the above-mentioned definite notification flag indicating whether or not, a process for determining whether or not to execute the special V winning notification effect is performed. This process will be described in detail later based on FIG. 64.

Returning to the description of FIG. 63, when the sub CPU 91 determines that the received command is not the second grand prize opening open / close round game start command (step S236: NO), that is, the received command is step S612 of FIG. In the case of the first large winning opening opening / closing round game start command transmitted from the main control board 80 by the process of, a command for instructing the execution of the predetermined round-time effect related to the first large winning opening opening / closing game is set in the sub RAM 93. do. By transmitting this command to the image / sound control board 100 (and the lamp control board 120) by the command transmission process in step S47 of FIG. 49, the first large winning opening opening / closing game in which the effect pattern is set in the sub control board 90. The round game related to is realized.

[V prize command reception processing by the sub control board 90]
FIG. 64 is a detailed flowchart of the V winning command receiving process in step S26 of FIG. 56. When the sub CPU 91 determines that the command received from the main control board 80 is the V winning command (step S25: YES), for example, it is based on whether or not the sub CPU 91 has received the opening command related to the jackpot of the first special symbol determination. Then, it is determined whether or not the current jackpot is the first hit (step S261). Here, when it is determined that it is not the first hit (step S261: NO), that is, the second special symbol determination in the "probability variation game state" or the "time saving game state" becomes a big hit, and the current big hit game is executed. If so, it is determined whether or not the definite notification flag stored in the sub RAM 93 is set to “ON” (step S264). Here, when it is determined that the confirmation notification flag is set to "ON" (step S264: YES), the confirmation notification flag is set to "OFF" (step S265). In this way, when the confirmation notification flag is set to "ON", since the special winning sound output effect has been executed, a command for instructing the execution of the normal V winning notification effect is set in the sub RAM 93. (Step S263). By transmitting this command to the image / sound control board 100 (and the lamp control board 120) by the command transmission process in step S47 of FIG. 49, the above-mentioned V winning notification effect is realized based on FIG. 13 (D). It will be.

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 91 determines that the current jackpot is the first hit (step S261: YES), the current jackpot game corresponds to the symbol alignment of the specific symbols, as in the determination process of step S234 of FIG. It is determined whether or not the game is a jackpot game started (step S262). Here, when it is determined that the current jackpot game is a jackpot game started according to the symbol alignment of the specific symbols (step S262: YES), that is, "777" or "333" is doublet. When one effect symbol is confirmed and displayed and the current jackpot game is started, the process of step S263 is executed in order to realize the above-mentioned V winning notification effect based on FIG. 13 (D). On the other hand, when it is determined that the current jackpot game is not a jackpot game started according to the symbol alignment of the specific symbols (step S262: NO), that is, doublets other than "777" and "333" are shown. When one doublet symbol is confirmed and the current jackpot game is started, as described above based on FIG. 14, even if the game ball wins a V prize, the V prize notification effect is not executed. A series of V winning command receiving processes is completed without executing the process of step S263, and the process proceeds to step S30 of FIG. 55.

Further, when the sub CPU 91 determines that the confirmation notification flag is not set to "ON" (step S264: NO), the second special symbol determination is held, as in the process of step S239 in FIG. 63. It is determined whether or not the rights include those that will be determined as "big hits" (step S266). Here, when it is determined that the item to be determined as "big hit" is not included (step S266: NO), the process proceeds to step S263.

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 91 determines that the reserved second special symbol determination right includes a thing to be determined as a "big hit" (step S266: YES), FIG. 63 shows. Performing the same processing as the processing of step S240, an effect lottery for determining whether or not to execute the special V winning notification effect is executed (step S267). Then, based on the result of the effect lottery, it is determined whether or not to execute the special V prize notification effect (step S268), and when it is determined not to execute the special V prize notification effect (step S268: NO), the above The process of step S263 is executed. On the contrary, when it is determined that the special V winning notification effect is to be executed (step S268: YES), the special V winning notification effect command for instructing the execution of the special V winning notification effect is set in the sub RAM 93 (step S269). This special V winning notification effect command is transmitted to the image / sound control board 100 and the lamp control board 120 by the command transmission process in step S47 of FIG. 49, whereby the special V prize notification effect as described above based on FIG. 20 is transmitted. The V prize notification effect will be realized.

[Interrupt processing by the image / sound control board 100]
Next, the interrupt processing executed on the image / sound control board 100 will be described with reference to FIG. 65. Here, FIG. 65 is a flowchart illustrating interrupt processing executed on the image / sound control board 100. The image / sound control board 100 repeatedly executes a series of processes illustrated in FIG. 65 at regular time intervals (for example, 33 milliseconds) during normal operation except for special cases such as when the power is turned on or when the power is turned off. ..

First, the image / sound control CPU 101 executes an image display control process that controls the image display on the display screen 70 based on the command received from the sub control board 90 (step S71). This image display control process will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 66.

Following the process of step S71, the image / sound control CPU 101 executes an effect sound output control process for outputting various effect sounds from the speaker 38 so as to synchronize with or asynchronously with the screen display performed on the display screen 70. (Step S72).

Following the process in step S72, the image / sound control CPU 101 executes the data transmission control process (step S73). Specifically, data related to image / acoustic control performed on the image / acoustic control board 100 is transmitted to the sub control board 90. On the other hand, the sub control board 90 transfers the data received from the image / acoustic control board 100 to the lamp control board 120 by the data transfer process in step S33 of FIG. 55. As a result, the frame lamp 37, the board lamp 5, the movable decorative member 14, and the like are controlled so as to be synchronized with the effect executed by the display screen 70 and the speaker 38.

[Image display control processing by the image / sound control board 100]
FIG. 66 is a detailed flowchart of the image display control process in step S71 of FIG. 65. The image / sound control CPU 101 first determines whether or not the command transmitted from the sub control board 90 has been received (step S711). Here, if it is determined that the command has not been received (step S711: NO), the process proceeds to step S72.

On the other hand, when the image / sound control CPU 101 determines that the command from the sub control board 90 has been received (step S711: YES), the setting information included in the command is set in the control RAM 103 (step S712). Then, based on the setting information set in the control RAM 103, it is determined how the effect image should be displayed on the display screen 70, a display list for controlling the drawing process of the VDP 104 is created, and a predetermined area of the control RAM 103 is created. (Step S713), and the display list is set in the display list storage area of the VRAM 106 (step S714). When the VDP 104 executes the drawing process based on the display list set in the display list storage area, the effect display instructed by the sub-control board 90 is realized.

[Timer interrupt processing by the lamp control board 120]
Next, the interrupt processing executed on the lamp control board 120 will be described with reference to FIG. 67. Here, FIG. 67 is a flowchart illustrating interrupt processing executed on the lamp control board 120. The lamp control board 120 is transmitted from the image / acoustic control board 100 via the command from the sub control board 90 and the sub control board 90 during normal operation except for special cases such as when the power is turned on or when the power is turned off. A series of processes illustrated in FIG. 67 is repeatedly executed at regular intervals based on data related to image and sound control.

First, the lamp CPU 121 of the lamp control board 120 executes a data reception process of receiving data related to image / sound control transmitted from the image / sound control board 100 via the sub control board 90 (step S801). The lamp CPU 121 has a frame lamp 37, a board lamp 5, a movable decorative member 14, and a vibration motor so as to synchronize with the effect of the display screen 70 and the speaker 38 based on the data related to the image / sound control received by the process of step S801. It controls 128 etc.

Following the process of step S801, the lamp CPU 121 determines whether or not the variation effect start command transmitted from the sub-control board 90 has been received (step S802). Here, when it is determined that the variation effect start command has been received (step S802: YES), the light emission pattern data corresponding to the setting information included in the received variation effect start command is read from the lamp ROM 122 and set in the lamp RAM 123. By doing so, a light emitting pattern such as an LED built in the frame lamp 37, the board lamp 5, and the movable decorative member 14 is set (step S803). Then, the lamp CPU 121 starts the light emission control of each light emitting means based on the set light emitting pattern data (step S804).

In this way, when the lamp CPU 121 executes the processes of steps S803 and S804, the lamp CPU 121 controls the light emission of the first light emitting group 511 and the third light emitting group 523 described above based on FIGS. 28 to 29. become.

Following the process of step S804, the lamp CPU 121 is instructed to perform an accessory effect for operating the movable decorative member 14 in the current symbol variation based on the setting information included in the received variation effect start command. Whether or not it is determined (step S805). Specifically, for example, the character effect is performed based on whether or not the setting information indicating the advance notice effect pattern included in the received variable effect start command is the information indicating that the character effect is executed. Determine if you are instructed to do so. Here, when it is determined that the user is instructed to perform the accessory effect (step S805: YES), the operation pattern data corresponding to the setting information included in the received variable effect start command is read from the lamp ROM 122 and the lamp is lamped. By setting it in the RAM 123, the operation pattern of the movable decorative member 14 is set (step S806). Further, although not shown in FIG. 67, when the received variation effect start command includes setting information instructing the execution of the effect using the vibration motor 128 (see FIG. 20), the received variation effect start command. The vibration pattern of the vibration motor 128 is set by reading the vibration pattern data corresponding to the setting information included in the lamp ROM 122 from the lamp ROM 122 and setting the vibration pattern data in the lamp RAM 123. Then, based on the data related to the image / sound control received in the process of step S801, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the effect using the vibration motor 128 has been reached, and if it is determined that the execution timing has been reached, the lamp RAM 123 is set. The drive control of the vibration motor 128 is executed based on the vibration pattern data. As a result, the effect of using the vibration motor 128 described above based on FIG. 20 is realized.

Returning to the description of FIG. 67, the lamp CPU 121 is instructed to execute the process of step S806, determine that it has not received the variation effect start command (step S802: NO), or perform the accessory effect. If it is determined that this is not the case (step S805: NO), it is determined whether or not the operation pattern of the movable decorative member 14 is set based on whether or not the operation pattern data of the movable decorative member 14 is set in the lamp RAM 123. Determine (step S807). Here, when it is determined that the operation pattern of the movable decorative member 14 is set (step S807: YES), for example, the movable decorative member 14 is based on the data related to the image / acoustic control received by the data reception process in step S801. It is determined whether or not it is the operation start timing of (step S808).

When the lamp CPU 121 determines that it is the operation start timing of the movable decorative member 14 (step S808: YES), the lamp CPU 121 executes the movable decorative member control process for operating the movable decorative member 14 in the operation pattern set in the process of step S806. (Step S809).

When the lamp CPU 121 executes the process of step S809, when it is determined that the operation pattern of the movable decorative member 14 is not set (step S807: NO), when it is determined that it is not the operation start timing of the movable decorative member 14. (Step S808: NO), it is determined whether or not the variation effect end command transmitted from the sub-control board 90 has been received (step S810). Here, when it is determined that the variation effect end command has been received (step S810: YES), the light emission control for the final effect for notifying the winning is executed (step S811). Specifically, by reading the light emission pattern data corresponding to the setting information included in the received variation effect end command from the lamp ROM 122 and setting it in the lamp RAM 123, the frame lamp 37, the board lamp 5, and the movable decorative member 14 Set the light emission pattern of the LED etc. built into the. Then, the lamp CPU 121 executes the light emission control of each light emitting means based on the set light emitting pattern data until the fixed time elapses.

When the lamp CPU 121 executes the process of step S811 or determines that the variation effect end command has not been received (step S810: NO), the lamp CPU 121 has received the hold icon display command transmitted from the sub-control board 90. Whether or not it is determined (step S812). Here, if it is determined that the hold icon display command has not been received (step S812: NO), a series of interrupt processing is completed, and the processing is returned to step S801. Although not shown in FIG. 67, when it is determined in step S812 that the hold icon display command has not been received, the second light emitting group 512 blinks white as described above based on FIG. 29. In addition, the lamp CPU 121 controls the light emission of the second light emitting group 512.

On the other hand, when the lamp CPU 121 determines that the hold icon display command has been received (step S812: YES), the icon change effect pattern information set in the sub RAM 93 in the process of step S5173 of FIG. 51 displays the received hold icon. It is determined whether or not it is included in the command (step S813). Here, if the received hold icon display command does not include the icon change effect pattern information, the white hold icon is displayed and the white hold icon does not change to a special icon. Therefore, in step S812. As in the case of determining "NO", the lamp CPU 121 controls the light emission of the second light emitting group 512 so that the second light emitting group 512 blinks white.

When the lamp CPU 121 determines that the received hold icon display command includes the icon change effect pattern information (step S813: YES), the lamp CPU 121 executes the hold-corresponding light emission pattern setting process (step S814). Specifically, the second light emission is performed by reading the light emission pattern data of the second light emission group 512 corresponding to the icon change effect pattern information included in the received hold icon display command from the lamp ROM 122 and setting it in the lamp RAM 123. The emission pattern of the group 512 is set.

The lamp CPU 121 can specify the hold icon to be read ahead and the timing at which the display mode of the icon changes based on the data related to the image / sound control received in the process of step S801. Therefore, the lamp CPU 121 sets the light emitting pattern of the second light emitting group 512 based on the set light emitting pattern and the hold icon specified based on the data related to the image / acoustic control and the timing at which the display mode of the icon changes. While controlling, the light emission pattern is changed at a required timing. As a result, as described above based on FIGS. 29 (A) to 29 (C), the second light emitting group 512 emits light in a color common to the display color after the change of the hold icon (or the icon) to be read ahead. The production will be realized.

[Modification example]
The present invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and may be, for example, the following embodiment. That is, in the above embodiment, when the determination result of the first special symbol determination in the normal gaming state is "big hit", the second big winning opening 28 (and V winning) is not used without using the first big winning opening 26. An example of executing a jackpot game using the mouth 287) has been described (see FIGS. 6 (B) and 7). On the other hand, in another embodiment, when the determination result of the first special symbol determination in the normal gaming state is "big hit", the second big winning opening 28 (and V winning) is obtained for at least a part of the big hits. The jackpot game may be executed using both the mouth 287) and the first big winning mouth 26.

Further, in the above embodiment, the effective round game (corresponding to the 1R round game of FIG. 7 (A) and the 3R round game of FIG. 7 (B)) is the second large winning opening 28 (and An example has been described in which the V winning opening 287) is composed of one short opening and one long opening. On the other hand, in other embodiments, these effective round games are round games in which the second major winning opening 28 (and V winning opening 287) is opened only once (without short opening). Alternatively, it may be a round game in which the second large winning opening 28 (and V winning opening 287) is opened a plurality of times (without long opening).

Further, in the above embodiment, the case where the four types of jackpots related to the first special symbol determination (see FIG. 6B) are jackpots in which only a prize ball equivalent to 2R can be obtained is described as an example. In another embodiment, these four types of jackpots may be used as jackpots capable of obtaining prize balls for 3Rs or more.

Further, in the above embodiment, on condition that the launch promotion effect (see FIGS. 13B and 13C) for prompting the player to launch the game ball aiming at the V winning opening 287 and the V winning of the game ball are performed. After neither of the possible V prize notification effects (see FIGS. 13 (D) and 13 (E)) is executed and the jackpot game is completed, the challenge mode (does not notify whether or not the game is in the "probability change game state"). The case of executing the production in is described as an example. On the other hand, in another embodiment, for example, after the jackpot game is completed, the effect is executed in the challenge mode until the special symbol and the effect symbol are fluctuated 40 times, and a V prize is generated during the jackpot game. If this is the case, the effect is executed in the effect mode (which may be the fierce fighting RUSH illustrated in the above embodiment) that deterministically notifies that the player is in the "probability change game state" from the fluctuation display at the 41st rotation. You may.

Further, in the above embodiment, with respect to the jackpot related to the first special symbol determination, the above-mentioned game control is performed based on FIG. 7, and the above-mentioned effect control is performed based on FIGS. 13 and 14 as an example. explained. On the other hand, in another embodiment, for example, a normal jackpot is provided as a part of the jackpot related to the second special symbol determination, and the jackpot related to the second special symbol determination is related to the jackpot related to the first special symbol determination. The above-mentioned game control and effect control may be performed in the same manner.

Further, in the above embodiment, the case where the present invention is applied to a one-type pachinko gaming machine called a so-called V-ST machine has been described, but the present invention has been described as a one-type pachinko gaming machine called a so-called probabilistic loop type. It may be applied to other gaming machines such as.

Further, it goes without saying that the configuration of the gaming machine 1 and the operation mode of each member described in the above embodiment are merely examples, and the present invention can be realized even with other configurations and operation modes. Further, the processing order, set value, random number value, threshold value used for determination, etc. in the above-mentioned flowchart are merely examples, and the present invention may have other orders or values as long as they do not deviate from the scope of the present invention. Needless to say, it can be realized. The drawings and the like illustrated in the above embodiment are merely examples, and may be in other embodiments.

1 Gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine), 5 Board lamp, 7 Image display device, 14 Movable decorative member, 21 1st starting port, 22 2nd starting port, 23 Opening / closing member, 26 1st big winning opening, 28 2nd big Winning opening, 37 frame lamp, 41 1st special symbol display, 42 2nd special symbol display, 44 1st special symbol hold indicator, 45 2nd special symbol hold indicator, 70 display screen, 71 hold icon display area , 72 The icon display area, 80 main control board, 81 main CPU, 90 sub control board, 91 sub CPU, 100 image acoustic control board, 101 image acoustic control CPU, 128 vibration motor, 211 first start port sensor, 221th 2 Start port sensor, 510 1st substrate, 511 1st light emitting group, 512 2nd light emitting group, 520 2nd substrate, 523 3rd light emitting group.

Claims (1)

Judgment means for determining whether or not to execute a special game that is advantageous to the player,
When the determination is made, the symbol display control means that causes the symbol display means to display the special symbol in a variable manner and then stops and displays the special symbol indicating the result of the determination.
A gaming machine characterized by being provided with an effect control means for controlling the execution of an effect.

Images